ST1 Manuel en

ST1
Version 23
January 2015
Structure
calculation
C E R E M A - D T e c I T M
CONTENTS
CHAPTERS PAGES
PART I -
PROJECT COMMANDS GLOSSARY .................................................................4
PRESENTATION OF ST1 ............................................................................ 22
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 24
NEW FEATURES .................................................................................................. 25
LIMITS OF THE PROGRAM ..................................................................................... 26
LEXICAL DEFINITION OF THE TYPES ....................................................................... 27
WRITING CONVENTIONS ....................................................................................... 29
USE ................................................................................................................... 30
ERROR DETECTION .............................................................................................. 31
COMMAND LIST ....................................................................................... 32

GENERAL COMMANDS ......................................................................................... 34
DESCRIPTION OF GEOMETRY ................................................................................ 40
DEFINITION OF MATERIALS ................................................................................... 71
DESCRIPTION OF PRE-STRESSING ......................................................................... 86
SELECTIVE ENABLING (OUTSIDE PHASING) ............................................................ 92
STUDY AREA ...................................................................................................... 94
FIXED LOADS .................................................................................................... 100
LIVE LOADS ...................................................................................................... 119
PHASE OF CONSTRUCTION (ST1 V2 ONLY) .......................................................... 163
DYNAMIC .......................................................................................................... 183
CRITICAL MODE FOR LINEAR ELASTIC BUCKLING .................................................. 200
ENVELOPES AND COMBINATIONS ........................................................................ 202
DATA RECAP .................................................................................................... 208
RESULTS EDITING ............................................................................................. 212
GRAPHICS COMMANDS....................................................................................... 214
GRAPHIC SCREENS ............................................................................................ 226
PSEUDO-PROGRAMMING .................................................................................... 230
EXAMPLES OF DATA FILES.................................................................................. 253
APPENDICES ......................................................................................... 286

DESCRIPTION OF THE PARAMETERS FILE ............................................................. 288
CALCULATION PRINCIPLES................................................................................. 291
CONCEPTION .................................................................................................... 329
Part ST1 - Project commands reminder 4
PROJECT COMMANDS
GLOSSARY
ST1 - Project commands reminder 5
GENERAL COMMANDS
READ <'Nom du file',CONSOLE> p34-35
OUTPUT <'Nom du file',CONSOLE,FILE> (SUITE) (NOT PAGINE) p36
RECORD (PROJET) ('Nom du projet') p37
PROJET ('Nom du projet') p37
LIST PROJET p37
PAGINATION p38
(ASC_PAGE i)
(MAX_LIGNE n)
END
RETURN p34-35
QUIT p37
MESSAGE NONE, ALL, (REDUCE) p38
GEOMETRY
OPTION <PLANE,GRILL,SPATIAL> p41-42-42
TITLE 'Title structure' p43
NODE liste coor1 coor2 coor3 p44
ou NODE liste (X coor1) (Y coor2) (Z zcoor3)
GENER n NODE (ID) j(pas0) X coor1 (pas1) Y coor2 (pas2) p44
Z coor3 (pas3)
RESTRAINT liste1 (NODE liste2) (DECOL < NOT, <X,Y,Z> <POS,NEG> >) p45
(DX) (DY) (DZ) (RX) (RY) (RZ)
RESTRAINT liste1 (NODE liste2) (DECOL < NOT, <X,Y,Z> <POS,NEG> >) p47
(ROT alpha) EL m1 mj1
RESTRAINT liste1 (NODE liste2) (DECOL < NOT , <X,Y,Z> <POS,NEG> >) p47
(ROT alpha) EL DI d1 dj2
BAR liste DE j1 TO j2 p50
or BAR liste j1 j2
GENER n BAR (ID) j (pas0) DE j1 (pas1) TO j2 (pas2) p50
EXC liste (OR (X) x (Z) z) (EX (X) x (Z) z) p51
ART liste (OR (RY) (RZ)) (EX (RY) (RZ)) p53
BETA liste beta p55
CARA liste SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz) (EXTY exty)(EXTZ extz) P57
CARA VAR LIN Y liste p57

OR SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz) (EXTY exty)(EXTZ extz)
EX SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz) (EXTY exty)(EXTZ extz)
CARA VAR LIN Z liste p57
CARA PSE liste SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz) p57
ZONE 1 (KFX kfx) (KFY kfy) (KFZ kfz) (KMX kmx) XL xl
CARA VAR PARA liste p57
MI SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz) (EXTY exty)(EXTZ extz)
MASS EIGEN p67
(NODE liste MASS (SUP) m1 mj1)
(NODE liste MASS (SUP) DI d1 dj1)
(BAR listeb (< MASS (SUP) DI, MASS (SUP), MASS NUL > ) )
(BAR listeb (EXC (OR (X) x (Z) z) (EX (X) x (Z) z))
MASS(SUP)<(UNI m1),(LIN m1 m2),(PARABOL m1 m2 m3)>)
END
MATERIALS
CONS liste <(E e) (NU nu) (RO ro) (TEMP temp) (DAMPING dam) ,MAT i> p71-72
MAT i ('Title material') p74
E <BPEL,BHP1,BHP2,BPEL_BL> (<MPA,TM2,KNM2>) FC28 fc28
(NU nu)
(RO ro) (G_DYN g)
(TEMP temp)
(SHRINKAGE <BPEL,BHP1,BHP2,BPEL_BL> (ER er))
(CREEP<BPEL,BHP1,BHP2,BPEL_BL>(TRACTION<YES,NOT>))
(ROH roh ROS ros RM rom)
(ROBS robs EA Ea)
(T_THERM FCP fcp LAMBDA lambda DT tpa THETA tetamax)
END
E CEB (<MPA,TM2,KNM2>) FCK fck
(NU nu)
(RO ro) (G_DYN g)
(TEMP temp)
(SHRINKAGE CEB (ER ecs0))
(CREEP CEB (TRACTION <YES, NOT>))
(RH rh H h) (CIMENT <SL,N,R,RS>)
END

E EC2 (<MPA,TM2,KNM2>) FCK fck
(NU nu)
(RO ro) (G_DYN g)
(TEMP temp)
(SHRINKAGE EC2 (ER ecs0))
(CREEP EC2 (TRACTION <YES, NOT>)(LIN<YES,NOT>))
(RH rh RM_EC h) (CIMENT <S,N,R>)
(T_THERM FCMP fcmp LAMBDA lambda DTP lisdt THETA listeta)
END
E <EC2_BHP1, EC2_BHP2> (<MPA,TM2,KNM2>) FCK fck
(NU nu)
(RO ro) (G_DYN g)
(TEMP temp)
(SHRINKAGE <EC2_BHP1, EC2_BHP2> (ER ecs0))
(CREEP <EC2_BHP1, EC2_BHP2>(TRACTION <YES, NOT>)(LIN<YES,NOT>))
(RH rh RM_EC h) (CIMENT <S,N,R>)(ROS ros)
END
E parameters
SHRINKAGE parameters
CREEP paramtres
AVANCE K_MODULE km
K_SHRINKAGE_ENDOGENE kre K_SHRINKAGE_DESSICATION krd
K_CREEP_ENDOGENE kfe K_CREEP_DESSICATION kfd
K_CREEP_KINETIK kfc
END
PRESTRESSED
PREC i ('Title prestress') p86
SECTION ap
TENSION sigma
E ep
(<RG fprg, FPK fpk> R1000 ro1000)
(RECUL g)
<(LOSS F f PHI phi),(LOSS MU f KPHI kphi)> (LOSS INST pinst)
(PRETENSION <PARABOL LG_SCEL lg1, LINEAIRE LG_SCEL lg1,
BILINEAIRE LG_SCEL lg1 lg2 COEF alpha>)
END
CABLE i ('Nom du cble') p88
PREC j ((NOT) SIMUL n)
TENSION <OR,EX,OR EX,EX OR>
(BAR liste)
(STEP_CABLE step)
(LG_GAINE OR lg1 EX lg2)
TRACE (INTERIEUR,EXTERIEUR)
(X)x (Y)y ((Z)z) (ALIGNE, SLOPE pt, GIS gis, RAYON ray)
END
SELECTIVE ENABLING (OUTSIDE PHASING)

ACTIVATE ALL p92
ACTIVATE (BAR liste) (RESTRAINT liste) p92
DEACTIVATE ALL p93
DEACTIVATE (BAR liste) (RESTRAINT liste) p93
STUDY AREA
STUDY (SUP,SEUL) (EFFORT) (DEPLA)
liste1 SE liste2 (STEP lpas) (ABS,REL) p94
STRESSG i ('Title genralised stress')
(CTE) p96
liste (N cfn) (TY cfty) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)
VAR LIN
liste OR (N cfn) (TY ctfy) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)
EX (N cfn) (TY ctfy) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)
VAR PARA
liste OR (N cfn) (TY ctfy) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)
MI (N cfn) (TY ctfy) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)
EX (N cfn) (TY ctfy) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)
END
FIXED LOADS
LOAD i ('Title load') p100
WEIGHT SELF liste p102
WEIGHT SELF <X,Y,Z> (POS,NEG) liste
NODE liste (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz) p103
BAR
liste CON XL xl (REL,ABS) (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz) p104
(GLO,LOC)
liste UNI (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz) (GLO,LOC) p106
liste LIN XL xl1 xl2 (REL,ABS) p107
(FX fx1 fx2) (FY fy1 fy2) (MZ mz1 mz2) (GLO,LOC)
RESTRAINT liste (DX dx) (DY dy) (RZ rz) p108
TEMP
liste UNI dt p109
liste (GY dty) (GZ dtz) p110
DEFOR
liste CON XL xl (REL,ABS) (DX dx) (DY dy) (RZ rz) p111
(GLO,LOC)
liste UNI (DX dx) (DY dy) (RZ rz) (GLO,LOC) p112
liste LIN XL xl1 xl2 (REL,ABS) p113
(DX dx1 dx2) (DY dy1 dy2) (RZ rz1 rz2) (GLO,LOC)
CABLE p114
liste (TENSION)
(LOSS (INST) (SHRINKAGE er) (UNI dsig) (RELAX (cf)))
END
FULFILLING FIXED LOADS

EXEC LOAD (liste) p117
LIVE LOADS
DECK
(CLASSE (TRAFIC) iclass) p122
(ZONE_TRANS i WIDTH xlarg (LANE nvoie))
(PAS_LIGNE pasl)
(LDIF ldif)
BAR listeb
(REP_TRANS
KBARRE listekb KTRANS listek
)
END
LIVE_LOAD i ('Title live load ')
( < EFFORT <N,TY,TZ,MX,MY,MZ>, p129
DEPLA <DX,DY,DZ,RX,RY,RZ>,
STRESS <VY,VZ,WY,WZ,VYVZ,VYWZ,WYVZ,WYWZ>,
STRESSG j
PRESS <PX,PY,PZ,MX> > )
(REAC <FX,FY,FZ,MX,MY,MZ>)
< AL,AL BRAKE,AL PLANCHER,AL PLANCHER BRAKE,AL PEDESTRIAN,

BC,BC BRAKE,BT, SIDEWALK,
MC80,ME80,MC120,ME120,
CV_C1,CV_C2,CV_D2F1,CV_D3F1,CV_D3F2,CV_E2F1,CV_E3F1,CV_E3F2,
ALG j,CONV j
p151
LM1 <(CARA),FREQ> <(CENTRE), FREE)>,
LM2 <CARA, FREQ>,
LM3 <VSJ,nj>
(ZONEVS kvs YVS yvs1 yvs2 (REL,ABS))
(<EXC exc,DEBORDVOIE debv>) (PONDVS pondvs)
(LM1 <CARA,(FREQ),NUL> <(CENTRE), FREE>
(LGEXCLU lg) (CORRELATED vj vk)),
LM4 <CTE,VAR>,
TROT_EC, TROT_LM1,
CH_23M3, CH_34M3,
LMF3, LMF3B >
(ZONE liste)
(POND pond)
(PAS_CONV pasc) (SENS psens)
(THRESHOLD threshold)
END
EUROCODE p151
(PSI FREQ (TS psits) (UDL psiudl))
(WEIGHT (TS list_poidsts) (UDL listpoidsudl))
(CLASSE iclass AJUSTEMENT (TS lstcoeff)(UDL lstcoeff)(LM2 coef))

END
ALG i ('Title live load ')

(DIR GLO (FX fx) (FY fy) (FZ fz) (MX mx) (MY my) (MZ mz)) p144
(DIR LOC (FX fx) (FY fy) (FZ fz) (MX mx) (MY my) (MZ mz))
DENS
long1 dens1

longi densi

(WIDTH LANE v0)
(COEF TRANS liste)
END
CONV i ('Title convoy') p148

(DIR GLO (FX fx) (FY fy) (FZ fz) (MX mx) (MY my) (MZ mz))
ESSIEU
j XL xl WEIGHT weight (YL listeyl) (IMPACT impactl impactt)

(MAX_TRUCK ncam)
(MAX_LANE nfile)
(LENGTH xlong)
(WIDTH xlarg)
(COEF TRANS liste)
END
FULFILLING LIVE LOADS

EXEC LIVE_LOAD (liste) p162
PHASE DEFINITION (ONLY ST1 V2)

PHASAGE (i) ('Title phasage') p163
(SUITE PHASAGE list) p166
ENV v ( <EFFORT <N,TY,TZ,MX,MY,MZ>, p167
STRESS <VY,VZ,WY,WZ,VYVZ,VYWZ,WYWZ>,
STRESSG c
(REAC <FX,FY,FZ,RX,RY,RZ>)
(ACTIVATE,DEACTIVATE) ENV liste
DATE d p170
ACTIVATE RESTRAINT liste p171
JACK RESTRAINT liste p171
ACTIVATE BAR liste (AGE a) (MODE <ABS,REL>) p172
DEACTIVATE (BAR liste,RESTRAINT liste) p175
LOAD (see. command LOAD p100) p176
...
END
TENDRE CABLE liste (NOT) (INJECTE) p177
DETENDRE CABLE liste p178
TENSION_BENCH CABLE liste
RELEASE_BENCH CABLE liste
STATE e ('Title state') p180
MODIFIER RESTRAINT liste (see command SUPPORT p181
p108)
END PHASAGE
PHASE FULFILLMENT (ONLY ST1 V2)

EXEC PHASAGE (liste) p182
DYNAMIC
p183
FULFILLING OF EIGEN MODES

EXEC MODE(nb)(METHOD <1,2>) p184
or
EXEC MODE(METHOD <1,2>) (<FREQUENCY fq, RATIO rt >)(ADVANCE nm)
SPECTRUM
DAMPING i p186
< AUTO MASS alpha STIFFNESS beta ,
MODE j KSI ksij
...,
ENERGY KSI ksij
>
(POND pond)
END
SPECTRUM j p188
(POND pond)
(BETA beta)
<ACCELERATION
PERIOD tj AX axj AY ayj (AZ azj)
...,
EUROCODE
<HORIZONTAL(<X,Y>),VERTICAL>AX ax (S s)(ST st)(ALPHA alpha)
(ETA eta) PERIOD tb tc td te
EUROCODE REDUCE
<HORIZONTAL(<X,Y>),VERTICAL>AX ax (S s)(ST st)(ALPHA alpha)
(GAMMA gamma) (Q q) (BETA beta0) PERIOD tb tc td te
>
END
SPECTRUM ic RESPONSE p191

SPECTRUM isp
<LIN, SRSS, CQC>
(POND X pondx Y pondy (Z pondz))
END
FULFILLING OF SPECTRUM
EXEC SPECTRUM RESPONSE(listj) p191
HISTORY OF GROUND MOTIONS (ONLY ST1 V2)

ACCELEROGRAM j p193
( < EFFORT <N,TY,TZ,MX,MY,MZ>,
DISPLA <DX,DY,DZ,RX,RY,RZ>,
STRESSG ic
(METHOD < (1), 2, 3 (ALPHA alpha )>)
(TIME_STEP time_step)
(POND pond)
(BETA beta)
(ACCELERATION
AX axj AY ayj (AZ azj)
...
)
END
EXECUTION OF A TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS WITH GROUND MOTIONS (ONLY ST1

V2)
EXEC HISTORY (lstj) p194
DYNAMIC OF ROLLING LOADS (ONLY ST1 V2)

DYNAMIC CONV j p195
STRESSG ic
CONV numc
TIME_STEP time_step
TIME time
SPEED speed
(POND pond)
END
EXECUTION OF A TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS FOR ROLLING LOADS (ONLY ST1 V2)
EXEC HISTORY CONV(lstj) p197
HISTORY UNDER IMPOSED LOAD (ONLY ST1 V2)

DYNAMIC LOAD j p198
CONTR <VY,VZ,WY,WZ,VYVZ,VYWZ,WYVZ,WYWZ>,
CONTRG ic
(METHOD < (1), 2, 3 (ALPHA alpha)>)
TIME_STEP time_step
TIME time
MODE nm
(FREQUENCY f0)
BAR lstb (FX fx)(FY fy)(FZ fz)(MX mx)(MY my)(MZ mz) (GLO,LOC)

END
EXECUTION OF TIME HISTORY FOR AN IMPOSED LOAD (ONLY ST1 V2)

EXEC HISTORY LOAD(lstj) p199
CRITICAL MODE FOR LINEAR ELASTIC BUCKLING

p200
FULFILLING OF CRITICAL LOADS FOR LINEAR ELASTIC BUCKLING MODES

EXEC BUCKLING (nb)( METHOD <1, 2 >)>)(CTE <LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE p200
i>) (VAR <LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE j>)
ENVELOPES AND COMBINATIONS

COMB i ('Title combination') p202
LOAD liste1 (coef1)
COMB liste2 (coef2)
STATE liste3 (coef3)
PHASAGE liste4 (coef4)
SPECTRUM liste5 (coef5)
END
ENV i ('Title enveloppe') p203
STRESSG ie
LOAD liste1 (coef1)
LIVE_LOAD liste2 (coef2)
COMB liste3 (coef3)
HISTORY liste7 (coef7)
ENV liste8 (coef8)
END
ENV i COMB ('Title combinaison of enveloppe') p206
STRESSG ie
LOAD liste1 (cfmin1) (cfmax1)
LIVE_LOAD liste2 (cfmin2) (cfmax2)
COMB liste3 (cfmin3) (cfmax3)
STATE liste4 (cfmin4) (cfmax4)
PHASAGE liste5 (cfmin5) (cfmax5)
SPECTRUM liste6 (cfmin6) (cfmax6)
HISTORY liste7 (cfmin7) (cfmax7)
ENV liste8 (cfmin8) (cfmax8)
END
DATA RECAP
LIST GEOM p208
LIST NODE (liste) p208
LIST BAR (liste) p208
LIST CARA (liste) p208
LIST MAT (liste) p208
LIST RESTRAINT (liste) p208
LIST STRESSG (liste) p208
LIST ACTIVATION (RESTRAINT) (BAR) p208
LIST PREC (liste) p209
LIST CABLE (liste) p209
LIST CARA CABLE (liste) p209

LIST LOAD (liste) p209
LIST DECK p210
LIST ALG (liste) p210
LIST CONV (liste) p210
LIST LIVE_LOAD (liste) p210
LIST PHASAGE (liste) p210
LIST MASS p211
LIST DAMPING p211
LIST SPECTRUM p211
LIST HISTORY p211
RESULTS EDITING
RESU p212
(LOAD (list)) (COMB (liste)) (ENV (list)) (LIVE_LOAD (list))
(STATE (list))(PHASAGE (list))
(NODE (list)) (RESTRAINT (LOC)(list))
(CABLE (list) (XS <REL,ABS> list))
(BAR (list)(EFFORT) (DISPLA) (STRESS) (STRESSG (list)) (PRESS))
(MODE (listm) (FREQUENCY) (DISPLA) )
(SPECTRUM (list) (MODE(listm)) (RESTRAINT)
(BAR (listb)(EFFORT)(DISPLA) (SPEED)(ACCELERATION)
(STRESS)(PRESS)(STRESSG(lst)))
(HISTORY(listh)(NODE(listen)
(<DISPLA , SPEED, ACCELERATION >))(RESTRAINT (LOC))
(BAR(listb) (EFFORT)(STRESS)(PRESS)(STRESSG(lst)))
(BUCKLING (listm) (MODE) (DISPLA) )
END
PSEUDO-PROGRAMMING: RESULTS RECOVERY

liste = vide p232
DIM nom(n) p233
IF (test) << >> p237
IFNOT << >>
FOR i = liste << >> p240
GET DEPLA NODE i (LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE> j p242
GET DEPLA <MAX,MIN> NODE i ENV j p242
GET REAC RESTRAINT i <LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE> j p243
GET REAC <MAX,MIN> RESTRAINT i <ENV,LIVE_LOAD> j p243
GET <EFFORT,DEPLA,STRESS,PRESS,STRESSG k> p244
BAR i SEC n <LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE> j
GET <EFFORT,DEPLA,STRESS,PRESS,STRESSG k> p244
<MAX,MIN> BAR i SEC n <ENV,LIVE_LOAD > j
GET <ACCELERATION, SPEED> <MAX,MIN> BAR i SEC n HISTORY j p246
GET TENSION CABLE i SEC n < LOAD,STATE,PHASAGE > j p247
WRITE 'test' p248
PAUSE p248
GRAPHICS COMMANDS
DESS p214
ECRAN (nom) p215
TRA nom (COULEUR,MONOCHRONE) p215
SAUV p216
CLS p217
VUE (X ux) (Y uy) (Z uz) p217
ZOOM cf (xc yc) p217
SELEC <BAR liste,NODE liste,ALL> p218
CENTR (GEOM) p219
CENTR < EFFORT <N,TY MZ>, p219
DEPLA (DX,DY,DZ,RX,RY,RZ),
STRESS <VY WZ>
STRESSG
PRESS <PX,PY,PZ,RX> >
GEOM p220
NUM (NODE) (BAR) p220
COUL <EFFORT,DEPLA,STRESSG,PRESS> (couleur) p220
DEPLA (DX,DY RZ) <LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste(couleur) p221
EFFORT <N,TY MZ> <LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste(couleur) p222
STRESS <VY WZ> <LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste(couleur) p223
STRESSG i <LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste(couleur) p224
RETURN p214
ST1 - Presentation of ST1 21
Part ST1 - Presentation of ST1 22
II
PRESENTATION OF ST1
Chapter ST1 - Presentation of ST1 24
1. INTRODUCTION
The ST1 version 1 Software calculates three-dimensional or flat structures, based essentially on a
linear elastic analysis on the fisrt order with many features specific to the field of engineering
structures.
Its characteristics are the following ones:
Description of structures (2D or 3D) with fixed or variable feature bars, as well as modelling
foundations using ground beams on elastic ground
automatic calculation of road live loads
evaluation of stress combinations and envelopes required to implement the regulations
pertaining to concrete or metal
editing and display of all results
All ST1 features are managed using a data programming language enabling the setting of any
structural parameters.
ST1 also has a graphical interface with pull-down menus and toolbars. This interface is used to
visualise the structure and results.
ST1 version 2 is an extension of ST1 version 1 enabling the following points to be
processed:
consideration of concrete creep and shrinkage in relation to the laws of BPEL, the CEB,
EN1992 to-1-1 and EN1992-2
the introduction of construction modelling phases on the various parts of construction
the time history (linear elastic nalysis)
2. NEW FEATURES
The new features offered by version 23 of ST1 are :

Dynamic : eigen modes, spectral calculation, time history analysis
Linear elastic buckling loads
For information: Core calculations redesign and change of compilation program (Intel 2010)
The new features offered by version 22 of ST1 are with limited changes:
Compatibility with Windows 7 64b
English Version (Input Data and documentation)
The new features offered by version 21 of ST1 are as follows. These include such major innovations:
Live loads Eurocode EN1991-2: LM3 with VS- on specific channel of LM1 ("correlated"
command), construction loads 23m3, 34m3, Update according to the National Appendix: LM3
standard VS width modified and LM2 coefficient adjustment (see p151)
tension in the cables: (See p 212) for the loads, phasing and reports
Pressuring pre-stressing: Linear-bilinear pressuring Eurocode EN1922-2 and parabolic
pressuring French Regulation rules (see p86)
Pressuring cable: Cable sheathing (see p88)
Concrete: Heat treatments for pressured constructions by pre-stressing Eurocode EN1922-2
and the French Regulation rules (see p73)
size of projects can be changed via the st1.par file for large calculation projects (results over
2 Gb)
Advanced material: setting affinity on shrinkage, creep, and Young modulus deformations
phasing of construction, and pre-stressing and BHP updated
The new features offered by version 20 of ST1 are many. These include such major innovations:
Live loads: Eurocode EN1991-2: LM1, LM2, LM3, pavement, LM4 (see p151)
Concrete: Eurocode ZN1992-1-1 and EN1922-2 in addition to the French Regulation rules
(see p79)
ability to define a transverse distribution in 2D modelling: Courbon, f (y), ... (see p122)
Generalized stress complemented by a constant term for the calculation of fixed loads (see
p96)
Due to the reworking of the ST1 calculation node:

- old project files .STD
and .STI
are incompatible and should be regenerated (see
command READ p34),
- differences may appear between the results (improved digital precision)
3. LIMITS OF THE PROGRAM
Some ST1 limits can be modified by the user:

Memory allocated of 300 MB for running ST1
The maximum size of the project database scaled at 1 280 MB ( BASEDAT file), for larger
structures, modify the st1.par file (cf.P288)
256 characters maximum for a filename, including directory
128 characters maximum for a line of the data file (cf.P288)
8 digits maximum for a node or bar number
100,000 for a load number
the generalized number of constraints for flat and spatial structures, depending on available
memory
Limits to change in the parameter file (see.P288) are by default:
20000 nodes - 40000 bar
4000 supports
80000 study sections
These are the data table limits, however the rigidity matrix may be too large to be stored in
RAM, even within these limits. In this case ST1 displays Not Enough Memory
when you make
changes.
Some limits are changeable using commands in the parameters file (see p. 288) and:
para_structure nd nb na gives respectively the values nd, nb and na to the
limit numbers of nodes, bars and supports
mx_etude nse gives the value nse to the limit number of study sections
All commands can be used in a data file, or be typed directly using the console interactively.
However, the amount of data needed to describe common problems, often requires the creation of data
files.
It is advisable to use a .ST1

extension for data files.
ST1 will recognize these files as data files if this extension was associated with ST1 during
installation.
4
4.1 - SEPARATORS
LEXICAL DEFINITION OF THE
TYPES
The separator, separates commands entered on one line.
4.2 - COMMENTS
The # character can insert comments into data files. Comments can be placed at the end of line after
the commands.
4.3 - KEYWORDS
These are reserved words used to describe the problem to be addressed. A list of these keywords can
be found in the description of ST1 commands.
The keywords are defined in uppercase or lowercase.
EXAMPLE
NODE or nodeare equivalent key words, but Node or NODe are unknown and will not be considered as
keywords.
4.4 - NUMERICAL VALUES

There is no distinction between integer and real type values.
Angles are defined in radians.
4.5 - CHARACTER STRINGS

Character strings should be defined between quotes ('). A quote in the chain must be doubled (").
Do not use accented characters in ST1.
4.6 - NUMERICAL LISTS

A numerical list is a sequence of numeric values separated by commas, or an interval divided into
steps (the default step is equal to 1).
Numerical lists can be written on multiple lines. To achieve this, the last character in the line has to be
a comma.
EXAMPLE
the numerical list 1,23,12,5,6,7,8,9

is equivalent to 1,23,12,5 to 9 step 1
and 1,23,12,5 to 9
and 1,23,12,5 to 6,7 to 9
5. WRITING CONVENTIONS
5.1 - DISTINGUISHING KEYWORDS AND NUMERIC VALUES OR LISTS

In the description of commands, keywords are written with this font.
In the examples, the keywords are written in UPPERCASE, numerical values or lists in lowercase.
5.2 - OPTIONAL PARAMETERS

Optional parameters are written in brackets.
EXAMPLE
TEMP list (GY dty) (GZ dtz)
5.3 - MANDATORY CHOICE BETWEEN SEVERAL PARAMETERS

Parameters where selection is mandatory are noted between the signs < and > and are separated by
commas.
EXAMPLE
OPTION <PLANE,GRILL,SPATIAL>
5.4 - COMMENTS
Throughout the manual:
Comments are indicated by

Important comments are marked by are marked
6. USE
Using an editor the user creates the data file(s) containing the data for the calculation. These files may
contain any counting results and editing commands.
These data files are run:
Either by calling up the ST1 program (st1.exe) followed by the command READ (see READ
command p34) and the file name from the console side
or by double clicking the file (if the .ST1 file extension association was preserved during
installation)
or by dragging and dropping the st1 data file onto a shortcut that points to the st1 executable to
be placed on the desktop
or launch from a text editor that enables you to launch executables (such as PSPAD or
equivalent). It should be noted that a syntax colouring file for this software is available, which
enables you to view the syntax of the code in a more ergonomic manner (please call the dealer
for more information)
All commands in the data file are then interpreted and ST1 displays the prompt > on the console and
waits for the following commands.
You leave ST1 using the QUIT command (see QUIT command p38) which requests a project name
(between quotes).
If the user enters a project name, ST1 backs up the state of the structure and the results already
obtained in a database. This data can be reused for subsequent calculations (see PROJECT command
p37).
If the user types a carriage return in place of the project name, no backup is performed.
7.
7.1 - ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR DETECTION
Errors detected during the running of ST1 trigger display of a message on the screen.
EXAMPLE
--- fichier : >f1
--- ligne : 101 ---
erreur : parentheses non apairees
Messages displayed on the screen are saved in a file named

after running ST1 to locate the reported errors.
erreur.txt. This file is available
n
The action number displayed on-screen or in
carried out in the phasing calculation.
erreur.txt corresponds to the nth action
7.2 - WARNING MESSAGES

Messages indicate that certain uses may, though legitimate, be involuntary.
EXAMPLE
Redefinition of the characteristics of a bar:

CARA 10 SX .2 IZ .3

CARA 10 IZ .45
The second use of the CARA command for bar 10 triggers the message:
--- fichier : >f1
--- ligne : 112 ---
attention : redefinition des caracteristiques de la bar 10
Part ST1 - Liste des commandes (Commandes gnrales) 32
III
COMMAND LIST
ST1 - Liste des commandes (Commandes gnrales) 33
Chapter ST1 - Liste des commandes (Commandes gnrales) 34
1.
1.1 - READING A FILE
GENERAL COMMANDS
Reading a data file from the console or other data file is achieved by the command:
READ 'Nom du file'
EXAMPLE
READ 'pont.st1'
Commands in the pont.st1 file are interpreted until ST1 displays the > prompt on the console.
Reading a data file can be achieved within another data file.
1.2 - INTERUPTING READING A FILE BEFORE REACHING THE END

Reading a data file can be interrupted using the following command:
RETURN
EXAMPLE
In the file toto.st1:

NODE 1 12 15

RETURN

NODE 2 6 8
All commands in the data file toto.st1 after the RETURN keyword will be ignored during reading.
1.3 - TEMPORARY EXIT TO THE CONSOLE WHEN READING A DATA FILE

Reading a data file can be interrupted by a temporary exit to the console using the following
command:
READ CONSOLE
The prompt displayed on the console then contains the name of all files being read.
EXAMPLE
in the file toto.st1:

READ CONSOLE

When prompted in the ST1 prompt, the command:
READ 'toto.st1' reading file toto.st1 up to instruction READ CONSOLE

Displays the prompt >toto.st1>> on the screen.
1.4 - CONTINUING READ AFTER TEMPORARY EXIT TO THE CONSOLE

Continuing to read a data file after a temporary exit to the console is achieved using the command:
RETURN
EXAMPLE
in the file toto.st1:

READ CONSOLE

When prompted in ST1:
READ 'toto.st1' reading file toto.st1 up to instruction READ CONSOLE
>toto.st1>> displayed by ST1
RETURN

>
The RETURN command enables continued reading of the file. The instructions in the toto.st1 file
are interpreted until the end of the file. The prompt> is displayed on the console while waiting for the
next commands.
1.5 - PROJECT EDITING

The definition of the editing output file is made according to the following syntaxes:
1.5.1 - EDITING TO A FILE

OUTPUT 'Nom du file' (SUITE) (NOT PAGINE)
The key word SUITE enables you to write output at the end of the file if it already exists.
The key word NOT PAGINE provides non paginated output.
1.5.2 - CONSOLE EDITING

CONSOLE OUTPUT
1.5.3 - EDITING OF THE LAST OUTPUT FILE USED (AFTER EDITING TO THE CONSOLE)
OUTPUT FILE
EXAMPLE
OUTPUT 'toto' # cration du file toto
LIST GEOM # criture dans le file toto des caractristiques
# gomtriques et mcanique de la structure
1.6 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT

The current ST1 database, which contains all the definitions and results of a calculation, should be
saved under a specific name to be recovered during a subsequent use of ST1.
The management of databases is ensured through the concept of the project. At each session the user
can create a project, recall or modify a project already stored.
The structure of ST1 has changed (from single real to double in the calculations in
particular), it is impossible to re-read the .STD and .STI files from a previous version.
The project must be regenerated by replaying the data file (see. Command RELECTURE DUN
PROJETT p37).
1.6.1 - SAVING A PROJECT

The current status of a session can be saved in the project using the command:
RECORD PROJET 'Nom du projet'
or:
RECORD 'Nom du projet'
1.6.2 - REVIEWING A PROJECT

Reviewing of a project is carried out using the command:
PROJET 'Nom du projet'
1.6.3 - RECALLING THE NAME OF THE CURRENT PROJECT

The name of the current project can be obtained by using the command:
PROJET
1.6.4 - LIST OF PROJECTS STORED ON THE DISK

The list of projects already stored on the disk can be obtained by using the command:
LIST PROJET
If a syntax error occurs during re-reading of a project, check whether the length of the file
name with the directory exceeds the limit (256 characters). If this is the case, re-create the
project in a directory with a shorter name (if necessary rename each file).
1.6.5 -MODIFYING THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF THE PROJECTS ON THE DISK

The project size on the disk is limited to a little over 1GB. It is possible to modify the storage size by
modifying the ST1.par parameter file. The 3rd digit of the file can be increased (by default this value
is set at 64). Here is an excerpt of the ST1. par file
st1-v23
200 # taille memoire de travail en mega-octets
64 # taille nb_lign_index - BASEIND ( modifier pour les gros projets)
This change results in a modification in the database structure, the project file generated will
always be associated with the modified "st1.par" file. Indeed, the project can be read only in
the presence of the modified file. For this reason, we recommend that the user does not modify
the usual ST1.par file in the directory of the executable, but makes a copy of this file in the
project directory. ST1 first checks that this file is present in the directory, and if absent, uses
the one in the ST1 executables directory.
Note: Over sizing the index base size parameter (related to the size of the project) has the
disadvantage of slowing the initial run of ST1 as it starts by reserving the space for the index
base on the disk, which unnecessarily penalizes routine calculations, which generally require
very little space on the disk.
1.7 - DEFINING THE OUTPUT FILE PAGE NUMBERING PARAMETERS

The number of lines per page and the ASCII character indicating the page break can be defined by the
following commands:
PAGINATION
(ASC_PAGE iasc)
(MAX_LIGNE n)
END
with:
n number of lines per page
iasc ASCII code indicating the page break:
=12 : printers recognizing the standard page break character
=49 :printers recognizing the Fortran programs page break
The number of characters per line depends on the selected calculation option:
options PLANE and GRILL 80 characters per line
options SPATIAL 128 characters per line
The page numbering parameters are initialized in the parameters file (see.P288) which enables
a default initialization. They can, however, be redefined in the data file.
1.8 - DELETING WARNING MESSAGES

The runtime and warning message display (warning: redefinition, etc.) in the erreur.txt file
is achieved using the command:
MESSAGE ALL
Deleting warning messages only:
MESSAGE REDUCE
Deleting all messages is achieved using:
MESSAGE NONE
The command takes effect from where it is inserted into the data file.
1.9 - ST1 OUTPUT

Stop using ST1 by using the command:
QUIT
When entered on the keyboard, this command asks for a project name (between quotes).
If the user enters a project name, ST1 backs up the status of the structure and the results already
obtained in a database. This data can be reused for subsequent calculations (see PROJET command
p37).
If the user types a carriage return in place of the project name, no backup is performed.
ST1 - Liste des commandes (Gomtrie) 39
Chapter ST1 - Liste des commandes (Gomtrie) 40
2. DESCRIPTION OF GEOMETRY
The geometry of the structure is defined by the description:

of the title of the structure
of the nodes
of the supports
of the bars
of the characteristics of the bars
of the constants in the constituent materials of the bars
of the bar joints (optional)
of the eccentricity of the bars (optional)
of the study sections on the bars (optional)
of the enabled bars (optional)
The geometry description commands can be used several times, and in any order. The last description
is the one taken into account. The values that are not redefined are therefore previous values.
In the case of selective enabling, changing the coordinates of a node must be followed by the
enabling of all the bars that were linked to it, to be really taken into account in during loading
calculations.
2.1 - CALCULATION OPTION

The calculation option is defined using the following syntax:
OPTION <PLANE,GRILL,SPATIAL>
This command is inserted into the parameter file (see.P288) which defines a default option
when using the ST1.
Use this command before any command at the beginning of data enables you to change the
default option.
2.1.1 - DRAWING FRAME: FLAT OPTION

The structure is flat and loaded into its drawing:
co-ordinates x, y
displacement dx, dy, rz
Y
Geometry
Z
Displacement
2.1.2 - DRAWING FRAME: GRID BEAM OPTION

The structure is flat and loaded perpendicular to its drawing:
co-ordinates x, y
displacement rx, dz, ry
Geometry Displacement
2.1.1 - DRAWING FRAME: SPATIAL OPTION

The structure and loads are described in space:
co-ordinates x, y, z
displacement dx, dy, dz, rx, ry, rz
Geometry Displacement
2.2 - TITLE OF THE STRUCTURE

The definition of the title of the structure can be achieved using the following syntax:
TITLE 'Title structure'
The title of the structure is recalled when printing out the results and on the drawings.
It can be modified within a data file.
2.3 - DEFINITION OF NODES

The description of the nodes (in the global coordinate system) can be achieved according to the
following syntaxes:
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
NODE liste coor1 coor2 coor3
NODE liste (X coor1) (Y coor2) (Z coor3)
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
NODE
liste coor1 coor2 coor3
liste (X coor1) (Y coor2) (Z coor3)
INSTRUCTION TO GENERATE MULTIPLE NODES

GENER n NODE (ID) j (pas0) X coor1 (pas1) Y coor2 (pas2) Z coor3 (pas3)
with:
n number of nodes to generate
j number of the first node
pas0 increment on the node numbers (default = pas0=1)
coor1 first coordinate 1 of node
pas1 increment on node coordinate1 (default = pas1=0)
etc.
The coordinates that can be used are:
Option PLANE x, y
Option GRILL x, y
Option SPATIAL x, y, z
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
GENER 5 NODE ID 100 10 X 5. 2. Y 4
is equivalent to:
NODE ou NODE
100 X 5. Y 4. 100 5. 4.
110 X 7. Y 4. 110 7. 4.
120 X 9. Y 4. 120 9. 4.
130 X 11. Y 4. 130 11. 4.
140 X 13. Y 4. 140 13. 4.
The order of the node definitions contained in the file directly influences the size of the matrix
bar (diagonal bar of non-zero terms) of the stiffness matrix and therefore the size of the memory
occupied by the corresponding calculation.
Thus for models consisting of a large number of nodes, users can significantly reduce the
amount of memory allocated to the matrix by simply generating the nodes of the model in order
of iX increasing and then Y increasing (the numbering can be done in any order).
2.4 - RIGID SUPPORTS

The locked directions for a rigid support are defined in the general reference of the structure according
to the following syntaxes:
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
RESTRAINT liste1 (NODE liste2) (DECOL < NOT, <X,Y,Z><POS,NEG> >) (DX) (DY)
(DZ) (RX) (RY) (RZ)
POS NEG
determines the sign of the degree of freedom affected by the separation condition
(default POS, meaning that the support is bonded if the reaction is positive and the support not
bonded if the reaction is negative).
When the DECOL

option is enabled, the detachment criteria only concerns the enabled degree of
freedom (reaction , or ). X Y Z
When the criterion of detachment is determined on this single degree of freedom, all degrees of
freedom are released.
For use with loads but not for use with mobile loads . (NB: Prestressing is calculated with
simultaneous cables (SIMUL) in the case of DECOL)
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
RESTRAINT
list 1 (NODE liste2) (DECOL < NOT, <X,Y,Z><POS,NEG> >) (DX) (DY) (DZ) (RX)
(RY) (RZ)
with:
list1 list of support numbers
list2 list of node numbers on which the support will be placed
(by default liste1=liste2)
DECOL keyword for the detachment of a support in one direction
The key words used are:
Option PLANE dx, dy, rz
Option GRILL rx, dz, ry
Option SPATIAL dx, dy, dz, rx, ry, rz
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
RESTRAINT 1 to 5 DX RZ
Means that the nodes 1,2,3,4,5 are locked rigid supports following the X axis and rotation Z of the
general reference.
The instruction:
RESTRAINT 1 to 5 NODE 11 to 15 DY
Means that the nodes 11,12,13,14,15 are locked rigid supports following the Y axis of the general
reference.
At least one of the supports must be locked to to make the structure stable.
X
If there is a pre-stress, just one support should be locked to or the pre-stress will have no
X
effect.
The definition of different numbers for supports and nodes enables easier description of the
phasing of certain structures (thrust bridges). It also enables the definition of two types of
support on a single node.
The lengths of the lists of numbers of support and nodes must be identical.
The block instruction RESTRAINT can contain rigid and elastic supports.
In the instructions above, the list may be replaced by the word

all the nodes that are already defined.
ALL. The instruction will act on
2.5 - ELASTIC SUPPORTS

The upper half-stiffness matrix of an elastic support is defined in the general reference of the structure
according to the following syntaxes:
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
RESTRAINT liste1 (NODE liste2) (DECOL < NOT,<X,Y,Z><POS,NEG> >) (ROT alpha)
EL m1 mj1
RESTRAINT liste1 (NODE liste2)(DECOL < NOT, <X,Y,Z><POS,NEG> >) (ROT alpha)
EL DI d1 dj2
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
RESTRAINT
liste1 (NODE liste2) (DECOL < NOT, <X,Y,Z><POS,NEG> >) (ROT alpha)
EL m1 mj1
liste1 (NODE liste2) (DECOL < NOT, <X,Y,Z><POS,NEG> >) (ROT alpha)
EL DI d1 dj2
with:
list1 list of support numbers
list2 list of node numbers on which the support will be placed
(by default liste1=liste2)
m1 mj1 lower half-stiffness matrix, being:
6 terms for flat structures
21 terms for spatial structures
d1 dj2 diagonal terms of the stiffness matrix, being:
alpha angle of rotation around the Z axis (case of curved bridges)
When the DECOL

option is enabled, the detachment criteria only concerns the enabled degree of
freedom (reaction , or ). X Y Z
When the criterion of detachment is determined on this single degree of freedom, all degrees of
freedom are released.
(default
POS NEG determines the sign of the degree of freedom affected by the separation condition
POS, meaning that the support is bonded if the reaction is positive and the support not
bonded if the reaction is negative).
The DECOL option is to use with statics loads only , (NB: prestressing is
calculated as simulatneoaus (SIMUL option)), do not use this option with mobiles loads
(LIVE_LOAD).
The alpha angle is in radians, defined in the general reference, counted counter-clockwise.
EXAMPLE
In PLANE option (see command OPTION p41) the instruction:

RESTRAINT 1 to 5 EL DI 1000. 2000. 0.
Means that the nodes 1,2,3,4,5 are elastic supports for which are the stiffness matrix expressed in
the general reference of the structure is:
1000. 0. 0.
0. 2000. 0.
0. 0. 0.
In SPATIAL option (see command OPTION p42) the instruction:
RESTRAINT 1 to 3 NODE 7,8,9 EL
1.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10.
11. 12. 13 14. 15.
16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21
means that the supports 1, 2, 3 are located on the nodes 7, 8, 9. These supports are elastic supports for
which are the stiffness matrix expressed in the general reference of the structure is:
1. 2. 4. 7. 11. 16.
2. 3. 5. 8. 12. 17.
4. 5. 6. 9. 13. 18.
7. 8. 9. 10. 14. 19.
11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 20.
16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
Reminder: a stiffness matrix expresses the efforts based on displacement:

effort matrice _ rigidity displacement
for a flat structure:
fx m1 m2 m4 dx

fy m2 m3 m5 dy
mz m4 m6 rz
m5
for a grid of cross members:
mx m1 m2 m4 rx

fz m2 m3 m5 dz
my m4 m5 m6 ry

for a spatial structure:
fx m1 m2 m4 m7 m11 m16 dx

fy m2 m3 m5 m8 m12 m17 dy
fz m4 m5 m6 m9 m13 m18 dz

mx m7 m8 m9 m10 m14 m19 rx
my m11 m12 m13 m14 m15 m20 ry

mz m16 m17 m18 m19 m21 rz
m20
The definition of different numbers for supports and nodes enables easier description of the
phasing of certain structures (thrust bridges). It also enables the definition of two types of
support on the same node.
The lengths of the lists of numbers of support and nodes must be identical.
The block instruction RESTRAINT

can contain rigid and elastic supports.

all the nodes that are already defined.
2.6 - NODES CONNECTED BY A BAR

The description of the nodes connected by a bar can be based on the following syntaxes:
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
BAR liste DE j1 TO j2
BAR liste j1 j2
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
BAR
liste DE j1 TO J2
liste j1 j2
INSTRUCTION TO GENERATE MULTIPLE BARS

GENER n BAR (ID) j (pas0) DE j1 (pas1) TO j2 (pas2)
with:
n number of bars to generate
j number of the first bar
pas0 Increment on the bar numbers (default = pas0=1)
j1 Original node number of the first bar
pas1 Increment on the original bar number (default = pas1=0)
j2 End node number of the first bar
pas2 Increment on the end bar number (default = pas2=0)
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
GENER 5 BAR ID 100 10 DE 4 2 TO 14 7
is equivalent to:
BAR
100 4 14
110 6 21
120 8 28
130 10 35
140 12 42
The definition of nodes connected by a bar determines the orientation of the

description of this bar.
X axis of the local
2.7 - ECCENTRICITY AT THE ENDS OF THE BARS

The eccentricity of the bars / nodes links are defined from the nodes following the axes of the general
description of the structure.
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
EXC liste (OR X ox1 Y ox2 Z ox3) (EX X ex1 Y ex2 Z ex3)
EXC liste (OR ox1 ox2 ox3) (EX ex1 ex2 ex3)
EXC liste
(OR X ox1 Y ox2 Z ox3)
(EX X ex1 Y ex2 Z ex3)
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
EXC
liste (OR X ox1 Y ox2 Z ox3) (EX X ex1 Y ex2 Z ex3)
liste (OR ox1 ox2 ox3) (EX ex1 ex2 ex3)
liste
(OR X ox1 Y ox2 Z ox3)
(EX X ex1 Y ex2 Z ex3)

Option PLANE x, y
Option GRILL x, y
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
EXC 2,3,4 TO 6 OR Y 2.5
Means that the bars 2,3,4,5,6 are originally connected to the nodes of the structure by an infinitely
rigid bar. This connection originates from the structural node and the end is the point deduced from
the node coordinates by a translation vector (0,2.5) in the local description of the structure.

all the bars already defined.
ALL
. The instruction will act on
The eccentricities remain outside the bar and cannot receive any load or study section.
EXAMPLE
BAR 1 1 2
EXC 1 OR X 1.9 Y 3.1 EX X 1.1 Y 2.6
Barre
2.6
3.1 Excentrement
l'extrmit
Excentrement
l'origine
1.1
Noeud 2
X
1.9
Noeud 1
2.8 - JOINTS AT THE ENDS OF THE BARS

The ends of the bars may contain joints in the local description of the bars.
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
ART liste (OR (RY) (RZ)) (EX (RY) (RZ))
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
ART
liste (OR RY RZ) (EX RY RZ)

Option PLANE rz
Option GRILL ry
Option SPATIAL ry, rz
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
ART 1 TO 3 EX RY RZ
ART 3 EX RY
means that the bars 1,2,3 are articulated according to the rotation Y and Y of the bar description,
then only the joint in Z of bar 3 is locked .

ALL
To disable a joint, we use the same command

you want to lock again.
without specifying the degree of freedom that
ART
EXAMPLE
BAR 1 1 2
EXC 1 OR X 1.9 Y 3.1
ART 1 OR RZ EX RZ
Barre
2.6
3.1 Excentrement
l'extrmit
Excentrement
l'origine
1.1
Noeud 2
X
1.9
Noeud 1
2.9 - BETA ANGLE ROTATION AROUND THE OX AXIS IN THE CASE OF A SPATIAL
STRUCTURE
The rotation angle (in radians) is defined by the syntaxes:

SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
BETA liste beta
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
BETA
liste beta
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
BETA 1 TO 3 1.3
means that the bars 1,2,3 are rotated by 1.3 radians in relation to their original position.
The original position of a bar ((

neutral axis relative to the OZ
beta = 0
) depends on the orientation of the
of the general reference (see diagram).
ox
axis, its

ALL
ORIENTATION OF THE BARS WITH BETA UNDEFINED (NO ROTATION OF THE BAR AROUND ITS LOCAL
AXIS)
The Oy axis is horizontal.

Case: The ox axis of the beam is not parallel to the OZ axis of the general reference.
(for = 0., the oy axis of the bar belongs to the oXY plane)
Case 2: The ox axis of the beam is parallel to the OZ axis of the general reference.
(For = 0., the oy axis of the bar is coincident with the OY axis of the general reference)
2.10 - RDM FEATURES OF THE BARS

The bars may have RDM features of different types:
constant features
linear variation features of a rectangular section
definition of beams where the other side of the features is interpolated by a parabola
constant features on elastic ground
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
CARA liste SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz)
(EXTY exty) (EXTZ extz)
CARA VAR LIN Y liste
OR SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz) (EXTY exty) (EXTZ extz)
EX SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz) (EXTY exty) (EXTZ extz)
CARA VAR LIN Z liste
CARA VAR PARA liste
MI SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz) (EXTY exty) (EXTZ extz)
CARA PSE liste SX sx (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz)

ZONE n (KFX kfx) (KFY kfy) (KFZ kfz) (KMX kmx)
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
CARA
liste SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz) (EXTY exty) (EXTZ extz)

CARA VAR LIN Y
liste

CARA VAR LIN Z
liste

CARA VAR PARA
liste
MI SX sx (SY sy) (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz)

CARA PSE
liste SX sx (IZ iz) (VY vy) (WZ wz)

ZONE n (KFX kfx) (KFY kfy) (KFZ kfz) (KMX kmx)

with:
sx cross section
sy reduced shear section OY axis
sz reduced shear section OZ axis
ix torsion inertia
iy bending Inertia OY axis
iz bending Inertia OZ axis
vy order of the upper fibre OY axis
wy absolute value of the order of the lower fibre OY axis
vz order of the upper fibre OZ axis
wz absolute value of the order of the lower fibre OZ axis
kfx Reaction of an elastic ground along the local ox axis
kfy reaction of an elastic ground along the local oy axis
kfz reaction of an elastic ground along the local oz axis
kmx reaction of an elastic ground to torsion
xl abscissa of the end of an elastic ground zone
exty Eccentricity of centre of torsion along the local oy axis
extz eccentricity of center of torsion along the local oz axis
The features used are:
Option PLANE sx, sy, iz, vy, wy, kfx, kfy
Option GRILL ix, sz, iy, vz, wz, kmx, kfz
Option SPATIAL toutes
For the order CARA PSE

(in the case of bars on elastic ground), do not give values to reduced
shear sections (do not use the keywords SY
and ). SZ
In the case of large beams supported by elastic springs defined by the command CARA PSE
:
When strong ground stiffness values are used, if one defines the beam using a single bar,
ST1 can provide erroneous values related to the theory implemented. To eliminate this
problem, it is necessary to discretise the bar in several sections and apply the command
CARA PSE to each section.
You should avoid differences that are too large in the magnitudes of bar inertias. The
calculation of the effects of thermal gradient depends on the values and . VY WY
For users ofST1 version 2:

In the case of phasing, the calculation of creep depends on the values VY and WY.
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF CONSTANT SECTION BEAMS
CARA 2, 11 SX 1.25 IZ .2d-3

EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF BEAMS WHERE THE OTHER SIDE OF THE FEATURES IS INTERPOLATED BY
A PARABOLA
CARA VAR PARA 4,100

OR SX 1.25 SY .2 IZ .2d-3
MI SX 1.00 SY .2 IZ .5d-3
EX SX 2.25 SY .3 IZ .4d-3
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF BEAMS WHERE THE FEATURES VARY, LIKE THE FEATURES OF A
RECTANGULAR SECTION BEAM WHERE THE SIZE FOLLOWING THE LOCAL OY AXIS VARIES
LINEARLY
OPTION PLANE
CARA VAR LIN Y 3,8

OR SX 1.0 IZ 1.0
EX SX 1.5 IZ 2.0
b h( x )3
The IZ inertia varies in degree 3 from 1.0 to 2.0
12
CARA VAR LIN Z 3,8

OR SX 1.0 IZ 1.0
EX SX 1.5 IZ 2.0
h3
The IZ inertia varies linearly in b( x) from 1.0 to 2.0
12
GRID OPTION
CARA VAR LIN Y 3,8

OR IX 1.0 IY 1.0
EX IX 1.5 IY 2.0
h3
The IY inertia varies linearly in b( x) from 1.0 to 2.0
12
CARA VAR LIN Z 3,8

OR IX 1.0 IY 1.0
EX IX 1.5 IY 2.0
b h( x )3
The IY inertia varies in degree 3 in from 1.0 to 2.0
12
SPATIAL OPTION
CARA VAR LIN Y 3,8

OR SX 1.0 IY 1.0 IZ 0.5
EX SX 1.5 IY 2.0 IZ 1.5
h3
IY inertia varies linearly in b( x ) from 1.0 to 2.0 and the IZ inertia varies in degree 3 from 0.5 to
12
1.5
CARA VAR LIN Z 3,8

OR SX 1.0 IY 1.0 IZ 0.5
EX SX 1.5 IY 2.0 IZ 1.5
b h( x )3
The IY inertia varies in degree 3 in from 1.0 to 2.0 and the IZ inertia varies in degree 3
12
from 0.5 to 1.5
EXAMPLE: DEFINING THE CONSTANT FEATURES OF BEAMS ON ELASTIC GROUND
### EXEMPLE D'APPLICATION FASCICULE 62 ###

diam1 = 1.1 # diamtre des pieux
nbp = 3 # nombre de pieux
DIM lgt(10) # profondeur du fond de couche
lgt(1) = 1.20
lgt(2) = 4.80
lgt(3) = 5.50
DIM EM(10)
DIM alpha(10)
EM(1) = 200
alpha(1) = 1.000
EM(2) = 300 # t/m2
alpha(2) = 1.000
EM(3) = 100 # t/m2
alpha(3) = 0.667
EM(4) = 800 # t/m2
alpha(4) = 0.667
DIM KI1(6)
diam0 = 0.6
for i=1 to 4
<< KI1(i) = 12*EM(i) / (4/3*diam0/diam1*(2.65*diam1/diam0)**alpha(i)+alpha(i))
>>
# KI1(i) rigidit sol/pieu ramen l'unit de longueur de pieu, (t/m)/m1) = t/m2
# NB : KI1(i) = kfil(i)*diam1
# kfil(i) rigidit sol/pieu ramen l'unit de surface de pieu, (t/m)/m2) = t/m3
CARA PSE numbarpieu SX 3.14*diam1**2/4*nbp IZ 3.14*(diam1/2)**4/4*nbp
ZONE 1 KFY KI1(1)*nbp XL lgt(1)
ZONE 4 KFY KI1(4)*nbp
The end of the last zone must include the end of the bar.
By default, the features of the bar are constant.

all the bars already defined (no default constants).
ALL . The instruction will act on
Not defining reduced shear sections ( SY SZ

) allows shear deformity to be ignored.
VY WY
The definition of the bar end fibres ( , , etc.) is necessary to calculate normal stresses on
these fibres.
In SPATIAL
traction.
or FLAT
option, the normal force Nis positive in compression and negative in
In FLAT
traction.
or SPATIALoption, the normal stress is positive in compression and negative in
FLAT OPTION
with:
local axes
x longitudinal axis of the beam, axis normal to the direction
z principal bending axis
geometrical features
v, w defined in the local reference x, y, z
iz inertia around the axis z
calculated R.D.M. stresses
defined in the local reference x, y, z
calculated deformations
defined in the global reference X, Y, Z
normal stresses
N Mz
y y et y wy ; v y
Sx I z
SPATIAL OPTION
with:
Local axes
x longitudinal axis of the beam, axis normal at the section
y principal bending axis
z secondary bending axis
Geometrical features
v, w defined in the local reference x, y, z
IY inertia around the axis y
iz inertia around the axis z
Calculated R.D.M. stresses
Calculated deformations
defined in the global reference X, Y, Z
Normal stresses
N My M
yz z z y et y wy ; v y et z wz ; vz
Sx Iy Iz
2.11 - EIGEN MASS (DYNAMIC)

The description of eigen masses linked to a node or to a bar can be done with the following syntax :
INSTRUCTION SIMPLE
MASS EIGEN
(NODE liste MASS (SUP) m1 mj1)
(NODE liste MASS (SUP) DI d1 dj1)
(BAR listeb (< MASS (SUP) DI, MASS (SUP), MASS NUL >) )
(BAR listeb (EXC (OR (X) x (Z) z) (EX (X) x (Z) z))
MASS(SUP)<(UNI m1),(LIN m1 m2),(PARABOL m1 m2 m3)>)
END
The eigen masses can be linked to nodes. They must have dimensions homogeneous to mass
unity and not to weight unity. They are defined in this case in the global coordinate system.
For the masses linked to nodes, the user gives the values of eigen masses to nodes of the
structure either with a diagonal matrix, or with a consistent matrix (and symetric)
To facilitate the generation of masses, the user can generate automaticaly the calculation of
eigen masses to nodes by selecting bars : these bars will be affected of eigen masses to each
extremities.
To really have a mass affected to the bar, the density of these bars must be defined before this
command by the user. To calculate the masses affected to the nodes of the bars, the
acceleration of gravity G_DYN has to be defined (see Definition of materials).
The eigen masses defined automaticaly for the bars are diagonal and for translation by default
(the formulation of this matrix is define in annexe). Bby using the command MASS DI,
the
matrix is a complete diagonal with translation and rotation masses. It is also possible to use a
formulation with a consistent matrix (the formulation is given in annexe) by using only the
single command MASS.
The eigen masses can be nullified for a bar with the command NUL. NB: it does not affect the
masses defined directly to nodes
The key word

The key word
UNI allows to add lineic uniform masses to bars.
LIN allows to add lineic masses with a linear shape to bars.
The key word PARABOL allows to add lineic masses with a parabolic shape to bars.
The masses must be described as lineic weight and et , the acceleration of gravity G_DYN has to
be defined for the affected bars (see Definition of materials).
Mass = Weight / g_dyn
The key word

defined.
SUP
allows to add masses to bars or nodes where masses have already been
The optional key EXC

allows to get additional masses and having an excentrement with bar, but
without having necessarily an excentrement for the bar itself. Be careful, it is adviced to use it
for bars having already masses without excentrement, otherwise in some cases, no eigen mode
can be found.
The calculation of eigen masses and therefore of eigen modes is available only with the option
"plan" and "spatial".
The eigen masses are linked only to nodes: therefore there is no masses linked to all the
intermediate sections of studies in bars. The user must define enough nodes in its structure to
model correctly the dynamic behavior of its structure.
INSTRUCTION DE BLOC
MASS EIGEN
NODE liste MASS m1 mj1

NODE liste MASS DI d1 dj1

BAR listeb < (MASS DI), MASS, MASS NUL >

END
with :
List list of numbers of nodes
Listb list of numbers of bars with automatic calculation of masses
m1 mj1 Lower half-matrix of mass :
d1 dj2 Diagonal terms of the mass matrix :
EXAMPLE OF DEFINITION WITH BARS ONLY
MASS EIGEN
BAR all
BAR 3 a 7 MASS NUL
END
means that all bars are affected to each node at the ends of the bar with an eigen mass calculated with a
diagonal matrix according to the geometry of the cross section of each bar and the weight density of
the bar, but not for the bars 3 to 7 which will have no eigen mass.
ST1 - List of commands (Geometry) 69
EXEMPLE
In PLAN option (cf. command OPTION p41) the instruction :

NODE 1 to 5 MASS DI 1000. 2000. 0.
means that nodes 1,2,3,4,5 have eigen masses for which are the stiffness matrix expressed in the
general reference of the structure is::
1000. 0. 0.
0. 2000. 0.
0. 0. 0.
In SPATIAL option (cf. command OPTION p42) the instruction :
NODE 1 to 5 MASS DI 1. 2. 3. 0. 0. 0.
means that nodes 1,2,3,4,5 have eigen masses for which are the stiffness matrix expressed in the
general reference of the structure is::
1.
0. 2.
0. 0. 3.
0. 0. 0. 0.
0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
In SPATIAL option (cf. command OPTION p42) the instruction :
NODE 7,8,9 MASS
1.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10.
11. 12. 13 14. 15.
16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21
means that nodes 7,8,9 have eigen masses for which are the stiffness matrix expressed in the general
reference of the structure is:
1. 2. 4. 7. 11. 16.
2. 3. 5. 8. 12. 17.
4. 5. 6. 9. 13. 18.
7. 8. 9. 10. 14. 19.
11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 20.
16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
Reminder: a mass matrix expresses the efforts based on acclration :

effort mass _ matrix acceleration
for a plane structure :
fx m1 m2 m4 x

fy m2 m3 m5 y
mz m4 m6 Jz
m5
for a spatial structure :
fx m1 m2 m4 m7 m11 m16 x

fy m2 m3 m5 m8 m12 m17 y
fz m4 m5 m6 m9 m13 m18 z

mx m7 m8 m9 m10 m14 m19 Jx
my m11 m12 m13 m14 m15 m20 Jy

mz m16 m17 m18 m21 Jz
m19 m20
ST1 - List of commands (Geometry) 70
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Materials) 71
3. DEFINITION OF MATERIALS
The materials making up the bars can be defined in two ways:

3.1 - DIRECT DEFINITION OF THE PHYSICAL CONSTANTS OF A BAR
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
CONS liste (E e) (NU nu) (RO ro) (G_DYN g) (TEMP temp) (DAMPING dam)
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
CONS
liste (E e) (NU nu) (RO ro) (G_DYN g) (TEMP temp) (DAMPING dam)
with:
e Young's modulus
nu Poisson's ratio
ro density
g acceleration of gravity (only for the calculation of eigen masses: mass_vol=ro/g)
dam number of dynamic damping type (see p186)
temp coefficient of thermal expansion
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
CONS 2,11 NU .5 E 1e6
means that the bars 2 and 11 have a Poisson's ratio of 0.5and a Young's modulus of 1000000.
For users of ST1 version 2:

The physical constants of the elements defined according to the above syntax cannot
change over time during a phasing (see. MAT p73 and PHASING 163) commands.

ALL
The physical constants of all the enabled bars should be defined, there is no constant by default.
ST1 - List of commands (Materials) 72
3.2 - DEFINITION OF PHYSICAL CONSTANTS OF A BAR THROUGH A MATERIAL

SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
CONS liste MAT i
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
CONS
liste MAT i
with:
i material number associated with the list of bars
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
CONS 2,11 MAT 1
Means that the bars 2 and 11 are made of material No.1.

ALL
The constants of all the enabled bars should be defined, there is no constant by default.
The above statement should be supplemented by the definition of the material (see.
command p73).
MAT
3.3 - DEFINITION OF A MATERIAL

The definition of a material allows a complete description of the physical constants of the bars. In
particular, it defines the laws of evolution over time of the following parameters:
modulus of elasticity (Young's modulus)
shrinkage deformation
creep deformation
The definition of a material is achieved according to the following syntax:
MAT i ('Title material')
E...parameters (see below) ...
(SHRINKAGE ... parameters (see below) ...)
(CREEP .....parameters (see below) ...)
(NU nu)
(RO ro)
(G_DYN g) (DAMPING dam)
(TEMP temp)
(AVANCE ... parameters (see paragraph on this command) ...)
END
with:
nu Poisson's ratio
ro density
dam number of dynamic damping type
The parameters for Young's modulus, shrinkage and creep definitions depend on the type of regulatory
law chosen.
The following regulations are currently available:
BPEL Portland cement (fc28 60 MPa)
BHP AFREM proposal of May 16, 95 (40 MPa fc28 80 MPa)
BPEL Lightweight concrete
CEB90 Portland cement
EC2 concrete compliant with Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1 and
EN1992-2)
When using the definition of a material according to a regulation and not by directly specifying
the value of the module, the initial modulus has an instantaneous value (age of concrete is
equal to 28 days).

If the physical constants of the bars do not change during phasing (see. PHASING
command p.163), it is possible to define them directly or by means of a material.
The calculation of phasing uses the instantaneous modulus whose value changes over time
depending on the date (see. DEFINITION DUNE DATE command p170).
EXAMPLE
# dfinition l'aide d'un matriau
MAT 1 is equivalent to:
E 1e6 # dfinition directe
NU 0.2 CONS 12 to 15 E 1e6 NU 0.2 RO 2.5
RO 2.5
END
CONS 12 to 15 MAT 1
3.3.1 - DEFINITION OF A CONCRETE ACCORDING TO BPEL91 OR AFREM / BHP MAY 16,

1995
The definition of a material according to the BPEL91 regulations or according to AFREM / BHP May
16, 95 is made according to the following syntax:
E <BPEL, BHP1, BHP2, BPEL_BL> (<MPA,TM2,KNM2>) FC28 fc28
(NU nu)
(RO ro) (G_DYN g) (DAMPING dam)
(TEMP temp)
(SHRINKAGE <BPEL,BHP1,BHP2,BPEL_BL> (ER er))
(CREEP <BPEL,BHP1,BHP2,BPEL_BL> (TRACTION <YES, NOT>))
(ROH roh ROS ros RM rom)
(ROBS robs EA Ea)
(T_THERM FCP fcp (LAMBDA lambda) DTP tpa THETA tetamax)
END
with:
BPEL BPEL91 Law (fc28 60 MPa)
BHP1 AFREM / BHP Law - without silica (40 MPa fc28 80 MPa)
fume
BHP2 AFREM / BHP Law - with silica fume (40 MPa fc28 80 MPa)
BPEL_BL BPEL91 Law lightweight concrete
fc28 characteristic compressive strength of concrete (in MPa)
nu Poisson's ratio
ro density
er final value of shrinkage (if this value is not given, ST1 calculates it from the
values of roh, ros and rom)
roh average ambient humidity in %
ros relation of frames adhering to the concrete section (As /B)
rom mean radius of the part expressed in cm (Ac/u)
robs ( BPEL_BL Law) dry density in t/m3

Ea ( BPEL_BL Law) amount of water absorbed by the lightweight aggregate in litres
/ m3
fcp fcp resistance at the end of heat treatment (BPEL Appendix 6)

lambda coefficient of heat loss (heat treatment) applied to the cable (usually 0.1) (BPEL
Appendix 6)
tpa time interval (in days) during which the tetamax temperature is applied (BPEL
Appendix 6)
tetamax maximum temperature in degrees for heat treatment (BPEL Appendix 6) (Between
20 and 80 degrees)
The definition of the modulus of the material from the characteristic value
you specify
fc28
requires that
the unit chosen to express the module. This module can be expressed in:
Mega Pascals (MPa) keyword MPA
tons per square metre (t / m) keyword TM2
Kilo Newtons per square metre (kN / m) keyword KNM2
The acceleration g is defined automatically if the unit of the modulus of the material is defined
by the user. If the unit is in TM2, or KNM2 or MPA, the acceleration g is set to 9.81.
When using the definition of a material in compliance with BPEL

rules, the module start date is
a few days corresponding with a new concrete and a concrete module close to the
instantaneous modulus. For a deferred module, you must reach a much larger time span
(several months or years). If necessary, the designer may need to redefine the module for the
loads to be studied by directly defining the module (e.g. for live_load, we generally used E).
Heat treatment, if defined, is considered only for construction phasing as described in the
appendix (B3.3 specific case of BPEL91). For loads outside phasing, the user must directly
specify the additional losses in the fixed load commands.
The creep can be taken in account either in compression and in traction, or only in compression
by using the command TRACTION
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A B30 CONCRETE - MODULE EXPRESSED IN T/M

MAT 1 'B30'
E BPEL TM2 FC28 30

END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A B40 CONCRETE - MODULE EXPRESSED IN MPA
MAT 1 'B40'
E BPEL MPA FC28 40

END

During phasing (see. PHASAGE p163) ST1 reflects the deformations due to shrinkage
and creep. These deformations are calculated according to roh, ros androm.
In the case of shrinkage the final value may be imposed (keyword ER).
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF B40 CONCRETE WITHOUT CREEP AND FOR WHICH THE FINAL SHRINKAGE
IS 2.10-4
MAT 1 'bton B40'
E BPEL MPA FC28 40
SHRINKAGE BPEL ER 2e-4
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A B25 CONCRETE WITH NO CREEP AND SHRINKAGE DEFINED BY VALUES
mean radius of the part 25cm

average ambient humidity in % 70
relation of frames adhering to the concrete (As/B) 0.05
MAT 1 'bton B25'
E BPEL TM2 FC28 25
SHRINKAGE BPEL
RM 25 ROH 70 ROS 0.05
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A B60 CONCRETE LIABLE TO CREEP UNDER THE BPEL LAW, BUT WITHOUT
SHRINKAGE DEFORMATION
MAT 1 'bton B60 sans shrinkage' ou MAT 1 'bton B60 sans shrinkage'
E BPEL KNM2 FC28 60 E BPEL KNM2 FC28 60
CREEP BPEL SHRINKAGE BPEL ER 0
RM 25 ROH 70 ROS 0.05 CREEP BPEL
END RM 25 ROH 70 ROS 0.05
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A B80 CONCRETE WITHOUT SILICA FUME WITH SHRINKAGE AND CREEP
ACCORDING TO THE AFREM / BHP LAW
MAT 1 'bton B80
E BHP1 MPa FC28 80
SHRINKAGE BHP1
CREEP BHP1
RM 25 ROH 70 ROS 0.05
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A B40 CONCRETE WITH HEAT TREATMENT (PRE-STRESS)
MAT 1 'bton B25'
E BPEL TM2 FC28 40
SHRINKAGE BPEL
CREEP BPEL
RM 25 ROH 70 ROS 0.05
T_THERM FCP 30 LAMBDA 0.1 DTP 2 THETA 65
END
3.3.2 - DEFINITION OF A CONCRETE ACCORDING TO CEB-90

The definition of a material according to the CEB-90 model code is achieved using the following
syntax:
E CEB (<MPA,TM2,KNM2>) FCK fck
(NU nu)
(TEMP temp)
(SHRINKAGE CEB (ER ecs0))
(CREEP CEB (TRACTION <YES, NOT>))
(RH rh H h) (CIMENT <SL,N,R,RS>)
END
with:
fck characteristic compressive strength at 28 days (in MPa)
nu Poisson's ratio
ro density
ecs0 final value of shrinkage (if this value is not given, ST1 calculates it from the
values of rh, h and the type of cement: SL, N, R, RS)
rh average ambient humidity in %
h mean radius of the part in mm (2AC / u) (CEB90-2.1.69)
keywords:
SL slow setting cements
N, R normal or quick setting cement
RS high resistance quick setting cements
The definition of the modulus of the material from the characteristic value fck
requires that
you specify the unit chosen to express the module. This module can be expressed in:
by the user. If the unit is in TM2
, or KNM2
or MPA
, the acceleration g is set to 9.81.
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C30 CONCRETE - MODULE EXPRESSED IN T/M
MAT 1 'C30'
E CEB TM2 FCK 30

END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C40 CONCRETE - MODULE EXPRESSED IN MPA

MAT 1 'C40'
E CEB MPA FCK 40

END

During phasing (see. PHASAGE p163) ST1 reflects the deformations due to shrinkage
and creep. These deformations are calculated according to rh,h and the type of cement.
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF C40 CONCRETE WITHOUT CREEP AND FOR WHICH THE FINAL SHRINKAGE
IS 2.10-4
MAT 1 'bton C40'
E CEB MPA FCK 40
SHRINKAGE CEB ER 2e-4
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C25 CONCRETE WITH NO CREEP AND SHRINKAGE DEFINED BY VALUES
mean radius of the part 250 mm

normal cement
MAT 1 'bton C25'
E CEB TM2 FCK 25
SHRINKAGE CEB
H 250 RH 70 CIMENT N
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C35 CONCRETE LIABLE TO CREEP ACCORDING TO CEB90, BUT
WITHOUT SHRINKAGE DEFORMATION
MAT 1 'bton C35 sans shrinkage' ou MAT 1 'bton C35 sans shrinkage'
E CEB KNM2 FCK 35 E CEB KNM2 FCK 35
CREEP CEB SHRINKAGE CEB ER 0
H 250 RH 70 CREEP CEB
END H 250 RH 70 CIMENT N
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C30 CONCRETE WITH SHRINKAGE AND CREEP ACCORDING TO CEB90
MAT 1 'bton C30
E CEB MPA FCK 30
SHRINKAGE CEB
CREEP CEB
H 250 RH 70 CIMENT N
END
3.3.3 - DEFINITION OF A CONCRETE ACCORDING TO EUROCODE 2

The definition of a material according to Eurocode 1-2 (EN 1991-2) is achieved according to the
following syntax:
E EC2 (<MPA,TM2,KNM2>) FCK fck
(NU nu)
(TEMP temp)
(SHRINKAGE EC2 (ER ecs0))
(CREEP EC2 (TRACTION <YES, NOT>)(LIN<YES,NOT>))
(T_THERM FCMP fcmp (LAMBDA lambda) DTP lisdt THETA listeta)
END
with:
nu Poisson's ratio
ro density
ecs0 final value of desiccation shrinkage (if this value is not given, ST1 calculates it
from the values of rh, h and the type of cement: S, N, R)
the term of autogenous shrinkage (occurring during the curing of concrete) is
always calculated by ST1
rh average ambient humidity in %
h mean diameter of the part in mm (2AC / u)
fcmp mean fcmp resistance at the end of heat treatment (EC2-1-1 section 10.3)
lambda coefficient of heat losses applied to the cable during curing (normally 0.5) (EC2-1-
1 section 10.5.2) (N.B.: BPEL lambda = 0.1: 1 is used to remove these losses)
listdt list of time intervals (in days) during which the teta temperature list is applied
(EC2-1-1 section 10.3)
listeta list of maximum temperatures (in degrees) for heat treatment (EC2-1-1 section
10.3)
keywords:
S resistance class CEM 32.5 N (slow setting cements)
N resistance class CEM 32.5 R, CEM 42.5 N (normal cements)
R resistance class CEM 42.5 R, CEM 52.5 N, CEM 52.5 R (high resistance fast
setting cements)
requires that
by the user. If the unit is in TM2
, or KNM2
or MPA
, the acceleration g is set to 9.81.
Heat treatment, if defined, is considered only for construction phasing in accordance with the
rules described in the appendix (B3.6 specific case of EN1992-1-1). For loads outside
phasing, the user must directly specify the additional losses in the fixed load commands.
In the case of heat treatment, if defined, the user should reduce the resistance value fck (no
reduction of resistance is performed by ST1).
The non linear creep is the application of the coefficient given in 3.1.4(4)EN1992-1-1:
exp(1.5(ks-0.45)) and ks=max(0.45,sigma/fcm(t0)). By default, this coefficient is not applied. To
apply it, you must write "LIN NO".
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A EC2 CONCRETE - MODULE EXPRESSED IN T/M

MAT 1 'EC2'
E EC2 TM2 FCK 30

END
EXEMPLE : DEFINITION OF A C40 CONCRETE - MODULE EXPRESSED IN MPA
MAT 1 'C40'
E EC2 MPA FCK 40

END
During phasing (see.

PHASAGE p163) ST1 reflects the deformations due to shrinkage
IS 2.10-4
MAT 1 'bton C40'
E EC2 MPA FCK 40
SHRINKAGE EC2 ER 2e-4
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C25 CONCRETE WITH NO CREEP AND SHRINKAGE DEFINED BY VALUES
MAT 1 'bton C25'
E EC2 TM2 FCK 25
SHRINKAGE EC2
RM_EC 250 RH 70 CIMENT N
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C35 CONCRETE LIABLE TO CREEP ACCORDING TO EC2, BUT WITHOUT
SHRINKAGE DEFORMATION
MAT 1 'bton C35 sans shrinkage'
E EC2 KNM2 FCK 35
CREEP EC2
RM_EC 250 RH 70
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C30 CONCRETE WITH SHRINKAGE AND CREEP ACCORDING TO EC2
MAT 1 'bton C30
E EC2 MPA FCK 30
SHRINKAGE EC2
CREEP EC2
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C40 CONCRETE WITH HEAT TREATMENTFOR EC2 (PRE-STRESS)
MAT 1 'bton C40
E EC2 MPA FCK 40
SHRINKAGE EC2
CREEP EC2

T_THERM FCMP 30 LAMBDA 0.5 DTP 0.5,1,0.5 THETA 30,60,30
END
3.3.4 - DEFINITION OF AN HPC CONCRETE ACCORDING TO EUROCODE 2

The definition of an HPC material according to Eurocode 2 is achieved according to the following
syntax:
MAT i ('Title matrial')
E <EC2_BHP1, EC2_BHP2> (<MPA,TM2,KNM2>) FCK fck
(NU nu)
(TEMP temp)
(SHRINKAGE <EC2_BHP1, EC2_BHP2> (ER ecs0))
(CREEP <EC2_BHP1, EC2_BHP2> (TRACTION <YES, NOT>)(LIN<YES,NOT>))
(ROS ros)
(T_THERM FCMP fcmp (LAMBDA lambda) DTP lisdt THETA listeta)
END
with:
EC2_BHP1 HPC Law EC2-2 Appendix B - without silica fume (40 MPa fck 90 MPa)
EC2_BHP2 HPC Law EC2-2 Appendix B - with silica fume (40 MPa fck 90 MPa)
nu Poisson's ratio
ro density
ecs0 final value of desiccation shrinkage (if this value is not given, ST1 calculates it
from the values of rh, h and the type of cement: S, N, R)
the term of autogenous shrinkage (occurring during the curing of concrete) is
always calculated by ST1
rh mean ambient humidity in % (in principle EC2-2 Appendix B <80%)
h mean diameter of the part in mm (2AC / u) (CEB90-2.1.69)
fcmp mean fcmp resistance at the end of heat treatment (EC2-1-1 section 10.3)
lambda coefficient of heat losses applied to the cable during curing (normally 0.5) (EC2-1-
1 section 10.5.2) (N.B.: BPEL lambda = 0.1: 1 is used to remove these losses)
listdt list of time intervals (in days) during which the teta temperature list is applied
(EC2-1-1 section 10.3)
listeta list of maximum temperatures (in degrees) for heat treatment (EC2-1-1 section
10.3)
keywords:
S Resistance class CEM 32.5 N (slow setting cements)
N resistance class CEM 32.5 R, CEM 42.5 N (normal cements)
R resistance class CEM 42.5 R, CEM 52.5 N,and CEM 52.5 R (high
resistance fast setting cements)
ros relation of frames adhering to the concrete section (As /B)
requires that
Newtons kilo per square metre (kN / m) keyword KNM2
by the user. If the unit is in TM2, or KNM2 or MPA, the acceleration g is set to 9.81.
During phasing (see.

PHASAGE p163) ST1 reflects the deformations due to shrinkage
Heat treatment, if defined, is considered only for construction phasing in accordance with the
rules described in the appendix (B3.6 specific case of EN1992-1-1). For loads outside
phasing, the user must directly specify the additional losses in the fixed load commands.
Heat treatment is not explicitky completly described by EN1992-2, and espiacly for the
possible adaptations for the creep. The present solution is a free adapation of EC2-1-1, its
relevance to use it has to be appreciated by the user (see annexe B3.7 specific case of BHP
EN1992-2 regulation- behaviour of BHP EN1992-2 concrete)
In the case of heat treatment, if defined, the user should reduce the resistance value fck (no
reduction of resistance is performed by ST1).
The non linear creep is the application of the coefficient given in 3.1.4(4)EN1992-1-1:
exp(1.5(ks-0.45)) and ks=max(0.45,sigma/fcm(t0)). By default, this coefficient is not applied. To
apply it, you must write "LIN NO".
IS 2.10-4
MAT 1 'bton BHP sans fumee silice C60'
E EC2_BHP1 MPA FCK 60
SHRINKAGE EC2_BHP1 ER 2e-4
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A C80 CONCRETE WITHOUT SILICA FUME WITH SHRINKAGE AND CREEP
ACCORDING TO EC2
mean radius of the part 250 mm

normal cement
MAT 1 'bton C80
SHRINKAGE EC2_BHP1
CREEP EC2_BHP1
RM_EC 250 RH 70 CIMENT N ROS 0.05
END
3.3.6 - ADVANCED PARAMETERS ON THE MATERIALS

For existing structures, it may be necessary to adapt the laws to the actual behaviour of the structure.
To change the affinity of calculating the Young's modulus or deformation of autogenous and
desiccation shrinkage or creep for the various materials (BPEL, CEB, EC2), weighting coefficients
have been introduced (see application in the appendices for each behavioural law p299):
MAT i ('Title matrial')

E parameters
SHRINKAGE parameters
CREEP parameters
AVANCE (K_MODULE km)
(K_SHRINKAGE_ENDOGENE kre) (K_SHRINKAGE_DESSICATION krd)...
(K_CREEP_ENDOGENE kfe) (K_CREEP_DESSICATION kfd)
(K_CREEP_KINETIK kfc)
END
with:
km Coefficient applied to the Young's modulus
kre Coefficient applied to the distortion of autogenous shrinkage
krd Coefficient applied to the desiccation shrinkage deformation
kfe Coefficient applied to creep deformation
kfd Coefficient applied to desiccation creep deformation
kfc Coefficient applied to the kinetik of the creep deformation
By default, all coefficients are set to 1.

EXAMPLE:
MAT 1 'BETON MODIFIE'
SHRINKAGE EC2_BHP1
CREEP EC2_BHP1
RM_EC 250 RH 70 CIMENT N ROS 0.05
AVANCE K_MODULE 0.8 K_SHRINKAGE_ENDOGENE 0.5
END
ST1 - List of commands (Prestress) 85
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Prestress) 86
4 DESCRIPTION OF PRE-
STRESSING
4.1 - DEFINITION OF A TYPE OF PRE-STRESSING

The definition of a type of pre-stress enables the description of the features of a tensioning device and
certain cable parameters.
The definition of a type of pre-stressing is achieved using the syntax:
PREC i ('Title prestress')
SECTION Ap
TENSION sigma
E Ep ((<RG fprg, FPK fpk> R1000 ro1000)
(RECUL g) (THRESHOLD threshold)
<(LOSS F f PHI phi),(LOSS MU f KPHI kphi)> (LOSS INST pinst),
(PRETENSION < PARABOL LG_SCEL lg1,
LINEAIRE LG_SCEL lg1,
BILINEAIRE LG_SCEL lg1 lg2 COEF alpha>)
END
with:
i type number of pre-stressing
Ap section of pre-stressing cable
sigma constraint on the tensioning (post-tension: the cylinder; pretension: final value
before bench release)
Ep modulus of pre-stressing steels
fprg, fpk guaranteed shear limits for pre-stressing steels
ro1000 guaranteed value of the relaxation loss at 1000 h in %
threshold Threshold of relaxation in hours. By default, no limit is taken in account. If the
value 0 is specified, the usual value 5.105h is taken in account. Otherwise the
specified value is taken in account.
g Value of the anchoring shrinkage (post-tension) (by default g=0)
f bend friction coefficient (rd-1) (post-tension) (by default f=0)
phi coefficient of tension loss per unit of length (m-1) (post-tension)
(by default j=0) BPEL Notion
kphi coefficient of tension loss per unit of length (m-1) (post-tension)
(by default j=0) Eurocode Notion (NB: kphi*f=phi)
pinst Instant uniform loss (pre-stress) (combs, ...) (by default pinst = 0)
lg1 embedment or transmission length (pre-stress (EC2-1-1: lpt)

lg2 total anchoring length (EC2-1-1: lbpd) (lg2> lg1) (preload)
alpha ratio of the sig1 stress obtained at a distance of lg1 from the end of the threshold
stress sig2 (> sig1) obtained at a distance of lg2 enabling description of the
shape of the bilinear law of entrenching anchors (see EC2-1-1 8.10.2: alpha =
spd/sp0) (alpha is between 0 and 1 and is dimensionless) (pre-stress)
The value Ep g
refers to anchoring shrinkage ( nonzero) in instant deformation losses and
indirectly through pre-stress effects induced by distortions from different cases of stresses
applied (including shrinkage creep effect).
Coefficients fprgand ro1000 are required only if you want ST1 to calculate relaxation
losses.
By default, the pre-stress is calculated in post-tension. In the case of the pretension, the
keyword PRETENSION
is the only one to activate pre-stress calculation When you tighten a
cable allocated to this pre-stressing device, the final effort calculated after pre-stressing of the
element (after bench release) takes into account the instant loss through elastic deformation.
Values of some unit sections of pre-stressed units:
Nature Ap (mm2)
7mm wire 38.5
8 mm wire 50.3
T 13 93
T 13 S 100
T 15 139
T15 S 150
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A 12T13 CLASS 1860 CABLE (MPA UNIT - NO CALCULATION OF

RELAXATION) POST-TENSION
PREC 2 '12T13'
SECTION 1.116e-3 # Ap=12*93e-6
TENSION 1488 # Sigma= 0.8*1860
RECUL 0.006 # Recul d'ancrage 6 mm
LOSS F 0.20 PHI 0.003 # Cble traversant de nombreux joints
E 190000 # Module apparent des torons
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A SECTION CABLE OF 100 MM2 AND EFFECTIVE TENSION OF 1300 MPA
POST-TENSION
PREC 3
SECTION 100e-6
TENSION 1300
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A 19T15 CLASS S 1770 CABLE (UNIT MPA) POST-TENSION
PREC 1 '19T15 S'
SECTION 2.851e-3 # Ap=19*150e-6
RECUL 0.008 # Recul d'ancrage 8 mm
LOSS F 0.18 PHI 0.002 # Cble ne traversant pas de joints
RG 1770 R1000 2.5 # Classe 1770 Armature TBR
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A PRE-TENSIONING CABLE - BPEL
PREC 1 'Pretension BPEL'
SECTION 3.0e-3 # Ap=20*150e-6
TENSION 1400 # Sigma= 1400MPa
PRETENSION PARABOL LG_SCEL 2
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A PRE-TENSIONING CABLE - EC2
PREC 2 'Pretension ELU EC'
SECTION 3.0e-3 # Ap=20*150e-6
TENSION 1400 # Sigma= 1400MPa
PRETENSION BILINEAIRE LG_SCEL 2.5 3 COEF 0.8
END
4.1 - DEFINITION OF A PRE-STRESSING CABLE

The geometric definition of a cable is achieved in the global coordinate system of the structure using
the following syntax:
CABLE i ('Nom du cble')
PREC j ((NOT) SIMUL n)
TENSION <OR,EX,OR EX,EX OR>
(BAR liste)
(STEP_CABLE step)
(LG_GAINE OR lg1 EX lg2)
TRACE (INTERIEUR,EXTERIEUR)

(X) x1 (Y) y1 ((Z) z1) (ALIGNE,SLOPE pt,GIS gi,RAYON ray)

END
with:
i cable number
j pre-stressing unit number (see. PREC command p86)
n number of tensioned units (by default n = 1)
list list of bars used to support the cable (by default all bars)
step discretisation step of the action of the cable on the structure (by default
step=0.25)
x, y, z coordinates of a cable crossing point (general reference)
pt slope of the cable route (radians) (general reference)
gi angle in drawing of the cable route (radians) (general reference)
ray radius of the route of the cable when passing a pole
lg1,lg2 original cladding lengths at the beginning and end of cable, useful in the case of
the pretension
For structures with complex geometry (gantry, cable-stayed bridge, etc.), although the entry of
bar is optional, it is strongly recommended to specify the list of bars serving to support the
cables, to make sure that the studied cables are allocated to the right bars.
A cable defined in ST1, may represent several basic cables with the same geometry (e.g. cables
of a slab bridge modelled in 2D). These basic cables can be stretched simultaneously or not
(see. keywords SIMUL and NOT SIMUL p88).
A post-tension cable can be tensioned using one or two active anchors. The tension mode is
described by the following keywords:
tensioning a cable with a single active anchor
tensioning the start side TENSION OR
Tensioning each end EX TENSION
tensioning a cable with a two active anchors
start side release and then end side EX TENSION OR
end side release and then start side EX TENSION OR
N.B.: In the case of a cable tensioned at both ends, the order of tensioning has no influence
unless the cable is "short", i.e. if released sections are covered by moving the anchoring.
A pre-tensioning cable does not require you to specify the method of tensioning, using active
anchors.
A cable modelled in ST1 uses the nearest bar selected from the list of support bars (keyword
BAR
). The definition of the support bars should be used whenever there may be ambiguity
about the choice of the bar that will receive the effect of the cable (e.g. bridge modelled with its
pillars - the list of support bars should contain only the bars of the deck).
In general, the bar list should include only those bars that can accommodate the effect of the
cable (for example, do not include vertical bars resting on supports).
A post-tensioning cable may be inside ( keywords

TRACE EXTERIEUR
TRACE INTERIEUR
) or outside (keyword
) the concrete. For ST1, an external cable is not connected with the
structure on the straight sections.
A pre-tensioning cable should be inside (keywords TRACE INTERIEUR) the concrete.
The route of a cable is described by the coordinates of its passing points, or by the definition of
control points called "poles".
4.2.1 - DEFINITION BY PASSING POINTS

A passing point is defined by its coordinates in the global coordinate system of the structure. The
description may be supplemented by the definition of a tangent or the imposition of a straight
alignment with the following point:
The tangent at a point is defined by the angle of the cable with the horizontal plane (keyword
SLOPE) and / or the angle of the horizontal alignment of the cable relative to the global OX
axis (Keyword GIS)
a straight alignment between two points may be imposed using the keyword ALIGNE
CABLE 1 or CABLE 1

TRACE TRACE
X 1 Y 3 ALIGNE 1 3 ALIGNE
X 3 Y 2.5 3 2.5
X 5 Y 1 SLOPE 0 5 1 SLOPE 0
X 9 Y 3 9 3
END END
ANOTHER EXAMPLE
CABLE 1 is basically equivalent to: CABLE 1

TRACE TRACE
X 0 Z 0 X 0 Z 0 ALIGNE
X 1 Z 0.5 SLOPE -0.5 X 1 Z 0.5
X 20 Z 4 SLOPE 0 X 20 Z 4 SLOPE 0
X 39 Z 0.5 SLOPE 0.5 X 39 Z 0.5 ALIGNE
X 40 Z 0 X 40 Z 0
END END
4.2.2 - DEFINITION BY POLES

The external cables generally rest on the path of a broken line whose angular points designate diverters
and spacers. The real route of the cable is then constructed by imposing circular connections at the
angular points.
A cable of this type is described in ST1 by the definition of the passing points of the broken line and
connection radii at these points.
CABLE 1 ou CABLE 1

TRACE TRACE
X 1 Y 3 1 3
X 3 Y 2.5 RAYON 2 3 2.5 RAYON 2
X 5 Y 1 RAYON 2 5 1 RAYON 2
X 9 Y 3 9 3
END END
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Selective Activation) 92
5. SELECTIVE ENABLING
(OUTSIDE PHASING)
5.1 - ACTIVATION OF BARS AND SUPPORTS

By default, all the defined bars and supports are activated.
A selective enabling of the bars and supports can be requested. However, in this case, only the items
actually activated by the ACTIVATE command will be considered.
The syntaxes are:
enabling of all that has been defined
ACTIVATE ALL
partial enabling
ACTIVATE (BAR liste) (RESTRAINT liste)
The activated items are added to the items already activated.
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
ACTIVATE BAR 1 to 5 RESTRAINT 2,10
means that the bars1,2,3,4,5 and supports 2.10 will be added to the activated bars and supports.

all the bars and supports already defined.
ALL
Use of the keywords ACTIVATEor DEACTIVATEdeletes any default enabling.
If no explicit enabling (using

command will always disable
ACTIVATE
ALL
) has been performed, the use of the
because there is no default enabling.
DEACTIVATE
ST1 - List of commands (Selective Activation) 93
5.2 - DISABLING BARS AND SUPPORTS

Selective disabling of the bars and supports can be achieved using the syntaxes:
DISABLING ALL THAT HAS BEEN DEFINED
DEACTIVATE ALL
PARTIAL DISABLING
DEACTIVATE (BAR liste) (RESTRAINT liste)
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
DEACTIVATE BAR 1 to 5 RESTRAINT 2,10
means that the bars 1,2,3,4,5 and supports 2.10 will be removed from the list of activated bars and
supports.

all the bars and supports already defined.
ALL
Use of the keywords ACTIVATE or DEACTIVATE deletes any default enabling.
If no explicit enabling (using

command will always disable
ACTIVATE
ALL
) has been performed, the use of the
because there is no default enabling.
DEACTIVATE
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Study Area) 94
6.
6.1 - STUDY SECTIONS
STUDY AREA
By default, all the bars contain a stress study section at each end.
Study sections can be defined in any abscissa of a bar following the syntaxes:
ADDING STUDY SECTIONS TO THE SECTIONS DEFINED BY DEFAULT
STUDY (EFFORT) (DISPLA)
liste1 SE liste2 (STEP lpas) (ABS,REL)
ADDING STUDY SECTIONS TO THE SECTIONS ALREADY DEFINED

STUDY SUP (EFFORT) (DISPLA)
DEFINITION OF STUDY SECTIONS WITHOUT TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE DEFAULT SECTIONS AND
PREVIOUSLY DEFINED SECTIONS
STUDY SEUL (EFFORT) (DISPLA)
with:
liste1 list of bar numbers
liste2 list of study abscissa
lpas not constant cutting along the study point bars (relative or absolute)
In relative steps, the value of

The values ,1/2 1/5 1/10
,
lpas
should be a whole fractional value.
are correct while , 1/3 1/7
are incorrect.
For phasage with creep or prestress, you have to define displacement study sections with a
sufficient small step.
ST1 - List of commands (Study Area) 95
The keyword EFFORT means that RDM stresses and possibly the loads will be studied.
The keyword DEPLA means that travel and the pressures (for beams on elastic ground) will be studied.
The keyword REL means that the abscissa is given in relation to the length of the bar.
The keyword ABS means that the abscissa is given in actual length (default abscissa is length of the
bar).
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
STUDY EFFORT DEPLA
1 to 2 SE 0. to 1. step .1
3 to 7 SE 0. to 1. STEP .1
STUDY SUP DEPLA
9 SE .5 ABS
STUDY SUP EFFORT
5 SE .25 REL
means that we study:
the stresses at the ends of all bars, bar stresses and deformations 1 to 7every 1/10 of the bar
the deformation of the bar 9 to the abscissa 0.5 absolute
stresses of the bar 5 to the abscissa 0.25 relative
In the instructions above, the list liste1 may be replaced by the word ALL. The instruction
will act on all the bars already defined.
6.2 - DEFINING COEFFICIENTS FOR CALCULATING STRESS

The study of normal and tangential stresses at any point (Resal effect, etc.), can generally be reduced
to the study of a linear combination of RDM stresses. Such a combination is called a generalized
load.
The weighting coefficients of a generalized load is defined using the following syntax:
STRESSG i ('Title genralised stress ')

(CTE)
liste (N cfn) (TY cfty) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)

VAR LIN
liste OR (N cfn) (TY cfty) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)
EX (N cfn) (TY cfty) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)

VAR PARA
liste OR (N cfn) (TY cfty) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)
MI (N cfn) (TY cfty) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)
EX (N cfn) (TY cfty) (MZ cfmz) (CST cst)

END
with:
i number of the generalized load
CTE, VAR LIN, keywords indicating the type of variation of coefficients along each bar (by
VAR PARA default coefficients are constant)
liste list of bars where RDM stresses will be weighted by the following
coefficients
cfn weighting coefficient of normal stress
cfty weighting coefficient of shear stress ty
cftz weighting coefficient of shear stress tz
cfmx weighting coefficient at moment of torsion
cfmy weighting coefficient at moment of bending my
cfmz weighting coefficient at moment of bending mz
cst constant applicable only for loads, not applicable to live_loads
The weighting coefficients are:

Option PLANE cfn, cfty, cfmz, cst
Option GRILL cfmx, cftz, cfmy, cst
Option SPATIAL cfn, cfty, cftz, cfmx, cfmy, cfmz, cst
EXAMPLE: USING CONSTANT COEFFICIENTS ALONG EACH BAR

STRESSG 10 'tude de la contrainte au point 1'
1 to 2 N 0.25 MZ 0.33
4 to 5 N 0.22 MZ 0.21 CST 0.5
END
The above statement enables the study of quantities:
0.25*n+0.33*mz for bars 1 and 2
0.25*n+0.21*mz for bars 4 and 5for live_loads
0.25*n+0.21*mz+0.5 for bars 4 and5 for loads
EXAMPLE: USING COEFFICIENTS HAT VARY LINEARLY ALONG THE BARS
STRESSG 11 'tude dune contrainte tangente'
1 to 2 TZ 0.11 MX 0.44
VAR LIN
4 to 5 OR TZ 0.11 MX 0.44
EX TZ 0.15 MX 0.55
CTE
6 to 7 TZ 0.15 MX 0.55
END
0.11*tz+0.44*mx for bars 1 and 2
c1*tz+c2*mx for bars 4 and 5
0.15*tz+0.55*mx for bars 6 and 7
The coefficients c1 and c2 are defined according to the position of each study section (see. STUDY
command p94) using a linear function:
For a study section located at a fractional abscissa xx (xx =xe / xl varies from 0 to 1), the
weighting coefficients are given using the formulas:
c1 = 0.11+(0.15-0.11)*xx
c2 = 0.44+(0.55-0.44)*xx
EXAMPLE: USING INTERPOLATED COEFFICIENTS BY A PARABOLA ALONG THE BARS

STRESSG 12 'contrainte tangente avec effet resal'
1 to 2 N 0.10 TZ 0.11 MY 0.44
VAR PARA
4 to 5 OR N 0.10 TZ 0.11 MY 0.44
MI N 0.16 TZ 0.12 MY 0.50
EX N 0.25 TZ 0.15 MY 0.55
CTE
6 to 7 N 0.25 TZ 0.15 MY 0.55
END
0.10*n+0.11*tz+0.44*my for bars 1 and 2
c1*n+c2*tz+c3*my for bars 4 and 5
0.25*n+0.15*tz+0.55*my for bars 6 and 7
The coefficients c1, c2 and c3 are defined in accordance with the position of each study section (see.
STUDY command p94) by parabolic interpolation:
For a study section located at a fractional abscissa xx (xx =xe / xl varies from 0 to 1), the
weighting coefficients are given using the formulas:
cf = a*xx*xx+b*xx+c
with:
a = 2*(cfor-2*cfmi+cfex)
b = -3*cfor+4*cfmi-cfex
c = cfex
The generalized stresses are integrated into the results of each study section during the
execution of loads and live_loads (see. EXEC LOAD
p117 and EXEC LIVE_LOAD
commands
p162).
The generalised stresses cannot be defined on all the bars and for all loads. In case they are
defined, they are used in combinations and envelopes (see. COMB
p202 and EBV
p167) as well
as other results of the section.
ST1 - List of commands (Fixed Loads) 99
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Fixed Loads) 100
7.
7.1 - DEFINITION OF FIXED LOADS
FIXED LOADS
The syntax for definition of a fixed load:

LOAD (i) ('Title load')
WEIGHT SELF liste
NODE liste (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz)
BAR
liste CON XL xl (REL,ABS) (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz) (GLO,LOC)
liste UNI (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz) (GLO,LOC)
liste LIN XL xl1 xl2 (REL,ABS)
RESTRAINT liste (DX dx) (DY dy) (RZ rz)
TEMP
liste UNI dt
liste (GY dty) (GZ dtz)
DEFOR
liste CON XL xl (REL,ABS) (DX dx) (DY dy) (RZ rz) (GLO,LOC)
liste UNI (DX dx) (DY dy) (RZ rz) (GLO,LOC)
CABLE
liste (TENSION)
(LOSS (INST) (SHRINKAGE er) (UNI dsig) (RELAX (cf)))
END
with:
i number of loading (by default i = 1)
The specific commands for definition of fixed loads are detailed in the rest of this chapter.
Fixed loads include:

the dead weight of the bars
loads on the nodes
concentrated loads on the bars
loads distributed on the bars
movements of rigid supports
thermal expansion
the thermal gradient
deformation concentrated on the bars
deformations spread over bars
EXAMPLE
LOAD 100 'loads permanentes'

WEIGHT SELF 1 to 10

BAR
1 to 5 CON XL .5 FX 10

CABLE
1 to 10 TENSION LOSS INST

END
EXEC LOAD 100
7.2 - DEAD WEIGHT OF THE BARS

The dead weight of the bars is defined using the following syntax:
dead weight in the default direction:
WEIGHT SELF liste
dead weight along a defined axis:
with:
liste numbers of bars
The default direction of dead weight is:
Option PLANE axis Y negative
Option GRILL no dead weight
Option SPATIAL axis Z negative
The axes used are:
Option PLANE x, y
Option GRILL no dead weight
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
WEIGHT SELF 1 to 4,10
means that the dead weight of the bars 1, 2, 3, 4, 10 will be taken in accordance with the default
direction.
The instruction WEIGHT SELF

cannot be used with
the cross members is never defined.
OPTION GRILL as the straight section of
The instruction
keywords LOAD
and
WEIGHT SELF
. END
can only be used in the description of a load, i.e. between the
The dead weight of a bar is generated along the entire length of the bar by multiplying the
density by the section of the bar.
Any eccentricity of bars is not considered when generating dead weight.

all activated bars during the execution of the load.
ALL
7.3 - LOADS AT THE NODES

The loads on the nodes are defined in the general reference of the structure according to the following
syntaxes:
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
NODE liste (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz)
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
NODE
liste (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz)
with:
liste list of node numbers
fx, fy, fz force along the axes OX, OY, OZ
mx, my, mz torque around the axes OX, OY, OZ
The loads used are:
Option PLANE fx, fy, mz
Option GRILL mx, fz, my
Option SPATIAL fx, fy, fz, mx, my, mz
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
NODE 1 to 3 FX 12
Means that nodes 1, 2, 3 are solicited by a force equal to 12 along the axis OX of the general
reference.
The node loading instruction can only be used in the description of a load, i.e. between the
keywords LOAD
and END
.

all activated nodes during the execution of the load.
ALL
7.4 - CONCENTRATED LOADS ON THE BARS

Concentrated loads on the bars are defined using the following syntax:
BAR
liste CON XL xl (REL,ABS) (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz) (GLO,LOC)
with:
liste list of bar numbers
xl loading abscissa on the bar
The keyword REL means that the abscissa is given in relation to the length of the bar and in relation to
the bar reference.
The keyword ABS means that the abscissa is given in actual length (by default the abscissa is the true
length).
The key word GLO means that the loads are given in the global coordinate system of the structure.
The keyword LOC means that the loads are given in the local reference of the bar (by default loads are
given in the global coordinate system of the structure).
The loads used are:
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
BAR 1 to 3 CON XL .5 REL FX 12 FY 15
means that the bars 1, 2, 3 are solicited in the middle by a force equal to 12 along the OX axis and
equal to 15 along the OY axis of the general reference.
The instruction:
BAR 1 to 3 CON XL 1.2 ABS FX 7 LOC
means that the bars 1, 2, 3 are solicited at the abscissa by a force equal to 1.2 in relation to the bar's
originating node by a force equal to 7 along the OX axis of the local reference for each bar.
The definition of a concentrated load can only be used in the description of a load, i.e. between
the keywords LOAD
and END
.

ALL
The abscissas of a bar load must always be between the beginning and end of the bar. A
relative abscissa (( REL 0 1
) must be between (loading at the beginning of the bar) (loading at
the end of the bar). An absolute abscissa ((ABS) is expressed in real coordinates, counted from
the bar's originating node. It should therefore be comprised between 0 (load at start of bar)
and the length of the bar (load at the end of the bar). By default the abscissae are absolute.
7.5 - LOADS UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED ON THE BARS

The distributed loads are defined using the following syntax:
BAR
liste UNI (FX fx) (FY fy) (MZ mz) (GLO,LOC)
with:
The loads used are:
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
BAR 1 to 3 UNI FX 12
means that the bars1, 2, 3 are solicited by a distributed force of 12 along the OX axis of the global
coordinate reference of the structure..
The definition of a distributed load can only be used in the description of a load, i.e. between
the keywords LOAD
and . END

ALL
relative abscissa (( REL 0
) must be between (loading at the beginning of the bar) (loading at 1
7.6 - LOADS VARYING LINEARLY ON THE BARS

The loads are assumed to vary linearly by v1 (located at an abscissa xl1) to v2 (located at an abscissa
xl2).
The loads are defined using the following syntax:
BAR
with:
xl1, xl2 Start and end abscissas for bar loading
fx1, fx2 extreme force values distributed on OX axis
fy1, fy2 extreme force values distributed on OY axis
fz1, fz2 extreme force values distributed on OZ axis
mx1, mx2 extreme force values distributed on OX axis
my1, my2 extreme values of torque distributed around the OY axis
mz1, mz2 extreme values of torque distributed around the OZ axis
The keyword REL means that the abscissae are given in relation to the length of the bar.
The keyword ABS means that the abscissae are given in actual length (by default the abscissae are the
true length).
The loads used are:
Option PLANE fx1, fx2, fy1, fy2, mz1, mz2
Option GRILL mx1, mx2, fz1, fz2, my1, my2
Option SPATIAL fx1, fx2, fy1, fy2, fz1, fz2, mx1, mx2, my1, my2, mz1, mz2
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
BAR 1 to 3 LIN XL .2 .7 FX 12 15
means that the bars 1, 2, 3 are solicited between the abscissa 0.2 and 0.7 by a distributed force that
varies linearly from 12 to 15.
The definition of a linearly distributed load can only be used in the description of a load, i.e.
between the keywords LOAD
and . END

ALL
relative abscissa (( REL 0 1
) must be between (loading at the beginning of the bar) (loading at
7.7 - DISPLACEMENT OF RIGID SUPPORTS

The displacement of rigid supports is defined in the global coordinate system of the structure using to
the following syntaxes:
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
RESTRAINT liste (DX dx) (DY dy) (DZ dz) (RX rx) (RY ry) (RZ rz)
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
RESTRAINT
liste (DX dx) (DY dy) (DZ dz) (RX rx) (RY ry) (RZ rz)
with:
liste list of node numbers rigidly supported
Support displacements used are:
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
RESTRAINT 1 to 3 DX .1 RZ 2.3
means that supports 1, 2, 3 are displaced from 0.1 following the general reference axis OX and
undergo a rotation of 2.3 around the OZ axis of the general reference.
The rotations are expressed in radians.
The definition of a rigid support displacement can only be used in the description of a load, i.e.
and . END

ALL
7.8 - THERMAL EXPANSION

Thermal expansion of the bars is defined by the following syntax:
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
TEMP liste UNI dt
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
TEMP
liste UNI dt
with:
dt temperature difference
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
TEMP 1 to 3 UNI 20.
Means that the bars 1, 2, 3 undergo thermal expansion caused by a temperature difference of 20
degrees.
The definition of thermal expansion can only be used in the description of a load, i.e. between
the keywords LOAD
and . END
The inclusion of a thermal effect can only take place if the expansion coefficient has been
defined (see command CONS
p71).

ALL
7.9 - THERMAL GRADIENT

The effect of a thermal gradient on the bars is defined by the following syntax:
SIMPLE INSTRUCTION
TEMP liste (GY dty) (GZ dtz)
BLOCK INSTRUCTION
TEMP
liste (GY dty) (GZ dtz)
with:
dty temperature difference between upper and lower fibres of the oy axis on the local
reference of bars
dtz temperature difference between upper and lower fibres of the oz axis on the local
reference of bars
A temperature difference is positive if the temperature of the upper fibre is higher than that of
the lower fibre.
The temperature differences used are:
Option PLANE dty
Option GRILL dtz
Option SPATIAL dty, dtz
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
TEMP 1 to 3 GY 15.
means that the bars 1, 2, 3 have a temperature difference between their upper and lower fibres
(depending on the local axes of the bars) of 15 degrees.
The definition of a thermal gradient can only be used in the description of a load, i.e. between
the keywords LOAD
and . END
Taking into account a thermal gradient can take place only if the coefficient of expansion (see
command CONS
p71) and the upper and lower fibres (see command CARA
p57) have been
defined.

7.10 - CONCENTRATED DEFORMATIONS ON THE BARS

Concentrated deformations on the bars are defined using the following syntax:
DEFOR
liste CON XL xl (REL,ABS) (DX dx) (DY dy) (RZ rz) (GLO,LOC)
with:
xl abscissa of the deformation of the bar
dx, dy, dz deformation along the axes OX, OY, OZ
rx, ry, rz rotation around the axes OX, OY, OZ
The keyword REL means that the abscissa is given in relation to the length of the bar.
The keyword ABS means that the abscissa is given in actual length (by default the abscissa is the true
length).
The keyword GLO means that the deformations are given in the global coordinate system of the
structure.
The keyword LOC means that the deformations are given in the local reference of the bar (by default
deformations are given in the local reference of the bar).
The deformations used are:
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
DEFOR 1 to 3 CON XL .5 REL DX 12 DY 15
means that the bars 1, 2, 3 are solicited in the middle by a deformation equal to 12 along the OX axis
and equal to 15 along the oy axis of the local reference for each bar.
The instruction:
DEFOR 1 to 3 CON XL 1.2 ABS DX 7 GLO
means that the bars 1, 2, 3 are solicited at the abscissa 1.2 in relation to the bar's originating node by
a deformation of 7 along the OX axis of the global coordinate reference for the structure.
The definition of a concentrated deformation can only be used in the description of a load, i.e.
and .END

ALL
The application of unit deformations allows calculation of the lines of influence.
The deformations are always relative.

7.11 - DEFORMATIONS UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED OVER THE BARS

The distributed deformations are defined using the following syntax:
DEFOR
liste UNI (DX dx) (DY dy) (RZ rz) (GLO,LOC)
with:
dx, dy, dz deformation distributed along the axes OX, OY, OZ
rx, ry, rz rotation distributed around the axes OX, OY, OZ
structure.
deformations are given in the local reference of the bars).
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
DEFOR 1 to 3 UNI DX 12
means that the bars 1, 2, 3 are uniformly deformed by 12 along the ox axis of the local reference for
each bar.
The definition of a distributed deformation can only be used in the description of a load, i.e.
and END
.

ALL

7.12 - DEFORMATIONS VARYING LINEARLY ON THE BARS

The deformations are assumed to vary linearly by v1 (located at an abscissa xl1) to v2 (located at an
abscissa xl2).
DEFOR
with:
xl1, xl2 abscissa of the beginning and end of the deformation of the bar
dx1, dx2 extreme values of the deformation distributed along the OX axis
dy1, dy2 extreme values of the deformation distributed along the OY axis
dz1, dz2 extreme values of the deformation distributed along the OZ axis
rx1, rx2 extreme values of the rotation distributed along the OX axis
ry1, ry2 extreme values of the rotation distributed along the OY axis
rz1, rz2 extreme values of the rotation distributed around the OZ axis
The keyword REL means that the abscissae are given in relation to the length of the bar.
The keyword ABS means that the abscissae are given in actual length (by default the abscissae are the
true length).
structure.
deformations are given in the local reference of each bar).
Option PLANE dx1, dx2, dy1, dy2, rz1, rz2
Option GRILL rx1, rx2, dz1, dz2, ry1, ry2
Option SPATIAL dx1, dx2, dy1, dy2, dz1, dz2, rx1, rx2, ry1, ry2, rz1, rz2
EXAMPLE
The instruction:
DEFOR 1 to 3 LIN XL .2 .7 DX 12 15
means that the bars 1, 2, 3 are solicited between the abscissa 0.2 and 0.7 by a distributed
deformation that varies linearly from 12 to 15.
The definition of a linearly distributed deformation can only be used in the description of a
load, i.e. between the keywords LOAD
and .END

ALL

7.13 - ACTION OF A PRE STRESSING CABLE

The action of a pre stressing cable is defined using the following syntax:
CABLE
liste (TENSION) (LOSS (INST) (SHRINKAGE er) (UNI dsig) RELAX (cf)))
with:
liste list of cable numbers
er value of shrinkage for the calculation of losses
dsig uniform loss of tension (used to account for creep, dsig>0 for a loss of tension)
see. 2
see weighting coefficient of losses due to relaxation see. 2
The action of a cable is broken down into two effects:
the effect of the cable tension without loss (keyword TENSION)
effect instantaneous and deferred losses (keyword LOSS)
The effect of losses is broken down as follows:
instantaneous losses (friction and anchoring shrinkage) (keyword INST)
deferred losses due to shrinkage (keyword SHRINKAGE er)
deferred losses due to creep (keyword UNI dsig)
deferred losses due to relaxation (keyword RELAX (cf))
Each effect can be taken independently or combined:
EXAMPLE: EFFECT OF CABLES 1 AND 2 WITHOUT INSTANT OR DEFERRED LOSSES
CABLE 1.2 TENSION
EXAMPLE: EFFECT OF CABLES 1 AND 2 ACCEPTING INSTANT OR DEFERRED LOSSES
CABLE 1 TENSION LOSS INST
EXAMPLE: EFFECT OF INSTANT LOSSES ON CABLE 3
CABLE 3 LOSS INST
EXAMPLE: EFFECT OF CABLES 1 TO 10 WITH INSTANT AND DEFERRED LOSSES
CABLE 1 to 10 TENSION LOSS INST SHRINKAGE 2e-4 UNI 120 RELAX 5/6
EXAMPLE: EFFECT OF DEFERRED LOSSES ON CABLES 1 TO 100
CABLE 1 to 100 LOSS SHRINKAGE 2e-4 UNI 125 RELAX 5/6
EXAMPLE: TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE ACTION OF A 12T 13 CLASS 1860 CABLE
### DEFINITION DU TYPE DE PRECONTRAINTE ###
PREC 1 '12T13'
SECTION 1.116e-3 # Ap=12*93e-6
RECUL 0.006 # recul d'ancrage 6 mm
LOSS F 0.20 PHI 0.003 # cble traversant de nombreux joints
EP 190000 # module apparent des torons
RG 1860 R1000 2.5 # classe 1860 Armature TBR
END
### DEFINITION DES CARACTERISTIQUES DU CBLE ###
CABLE 1
PREC 1 # rfrence au type de prcontrainte dfini ci-dessus
TENSION OR EX # mise en tension par 2 ancrages actifs
BAR 1 to 10 # liste des bars support du cble
TRACE
1 3 # coordonnes d'un point de passage
3 2.5
5 1 SLOPE 0
9 3
END
### DEFINITION D'UN CHARGEMENT CONTENANT L'EFFET DU CBLE ###
LOAD 1 'effet du cble 1'
CABLE 1 TENSION LOSS INST
END
### DEFINITION D'UN CHARGEMENT AVEC L'EFFET DES PERTES DIFFEREES DU CBLE ###
LOAD 2 'pertes diffres du cble 1'
CABLE 1 LOSS SHRINKAGE 2e-4 UNI 110 RELAX 5/6
END
1
The inclusion of a pre-stressing reinforcement assumes that you have already defined a type
of pre-stressing (see command
PREC
p86) and a pre-stressing cable (see command CABLE
p88) .
The definition of the action of a cable can only be used in the description of a load, i.e.
between the keywords LOAD and END.
In the instructions above, the list may be replaced by the word ALL. The instruction will act
on all defined cables during the execution of the load.
Deferred losses calculated within a load are only taken into account in a simplified manner.
To incorporate delayed effects more accurately you need to use phasing (see command
PHASAGE p163 only for users of ST1 version 2).
2
Details of the calculations are given in

Annexe B p291.
7.13.1 - LOSSES DUE TO CREEP

Tension loss due to creep can be evaluated by the user using the BPEL formula (section 3.3, 22):
Ep
dsig 2.5 b
Eij
with:
b final average stress in the concrete (usually 6 to 8 MPa)
Ep apparent modulus of the strands (190,000 MPa)
Eij modulus of concrete during tensioning
The table below shows the tension loss due to creep for common concretes placed under load at
different ages:
Age of B25 B30 B35 B40
Concrete
3 days 20b 19b 18b 17b
4 days 19b 18b 17b 16b
7 days 17b 16b 15b 14b
10 days 16b 15b 14b 14b
28 days 15b 14b 13b 13b
EXAMPLE
B35 is a concrete tensioned at the age of 3 days and for which the average final stress is 8 MPa:
Dsig = 18b + 18x8 = 140 MPa
### DEFINITION DU CREEP ###

TENSION UNI 140
7.13.2 - LOSSES DUE TO RELAXATION OF STEEL

In the case of a simultaneous consideration of losses due to shrinkage, creep and relaxation, it is
necessary (see section 3.3,24 BPEL) to weight losses due to relaxation using the coefficient 5 / 6.
This coefficient corresponds to the coefficient cf of the instruction RELAX cf (see p114).
7.14 - RUNNING LOADS

Previously defined loads are run using the following command:
EXEC LOAD (liste)
with:
liste list of previously defined load numbers (by default all defined loads (see.
command LOAD p100) will be run)
The EXEC LOAD

command stores the results in the database.
In the instruction above, the list may be replaced by the word

all defined loads (this is then equivalent to do not place list).
ST1 - List of commands (Operating Loads) 118
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Operating Loads) 119
8.
8.1 - DEFINITION OF TRAFFIC
LIVE LOADS
LOADS
8.1.1 - PRESENTATION
The ST1 live loads refer either to the French regulatory loads set out in Issue 61 of Title II of the
C.P.C. (Book of the common requirements applicable to public works contracts covered by Road
Building services) and the circular on exceptional transport R / EG 3 dated 20 July 1983, being the
loads of the Eurocode EN 1991-2.
ST1 distinguishes three types of live loads:
loads distributed between zeros on the influence line (Al, ..., Pavement)
rolling loads (Bc, Bt, ..., MC120, exceptional, etc.)
Eurocode loads (LM1, LM2, LM3, LM4)
Loads predefined by French regulations (Bc, Al, ...) are expressed in tons. To get results in
kilo-Newtons (kN), the loads must be balanced by a factor of 9.81
(see. option POND
of the
command LIVE_LOAD p129, p135and p154).
Predefined loads of Eurocode (LM1, LM2, etc), are expressed in kilo-Newton (see p151).
Exceptional loads under French regulations are expressed in tons if they are expressed alone.
They are expressed in kilo-Newton when used with the Eurocode LM3.
For each study section (see command STUDY p94), and for each effect (stress, displacement, strain,
etc.), ST1 determines the corresponding line of influence, and positions the live loads so as to obtain
the extremes of the effect studied.
Live loads can be positioned longitudinally and transversely depending on the location of roads and
pavements on the structure studied.
The definition of the profile across ((see. command DECK p122) allows the automatic consideration of
widths of lanes and cross-sectional weighting coefficients as well as the effect of the eccentricities of
lanes for the structures GRILL or SPATIAL (e.g.: checkerboard load of A (l) for the study of the
torsion).
The study of the live expenses required in ST1 :
the definition of an apron (see command DECK p122)
the definition of a live_load ((see command LIVE_LOAD p129, p135 and p154)
the running of the study(see command EXEC LIVE_LOAD p162)
EXAMPLE: STUDY OF EFFECT OF LOAD A (L) (TOME 61 TITLE II) OVER A WIDTH OF 1.00 m CENTRED
ON THE AXIS OF BARS 1 TO 10
DECK
BAR 1 to 10
END
LIVE_LOAD 1 'effet de A(l)'
AL
END
EXEC LIVE_LOAD 1
EXAMPLE: STUDY OF THE EFFECT OF BC AND PAVEMENT LOADS (TOME 61 TITLE II) SOLLICITING
BARS 7 TO 80 FOR A CLASS 1 BRIDGE (TOME 61 TITLE II)
Profile across construction:

pavement to the left of width 1.20m
Verge width 7.00m
pavement to the left of width 2.00m
Axe des barres
5.10 5.10
1.20 7.00 2.00
DECK
CLASSE 1
7 to 80 BAR
ZONE_TRANS
1 WIDTH 1.20
2 WIDTH 7.00
3 WIDTH 2.00
END
LIVE_LOAD 1 'effet de Bc sur la chaussee'
ZONE 2
BC
END
LIVE_LOAD 2 'effet de la load de sidewalk'
ZONE 1,3
SIDEWALK
END
EXEC LIVE_LOAD 1,2
8.1.2 - METHODS USED

The search for extremes in live loads depends on the live_load used (see command LIVE_LOAD
p129p135 and p154) the calculation option (see command OPTION p41) and the definition of the
apron (see command DECK p122).
Two types of studies can be used:
only a longitudinal study
a longitudinal and transverse study
TYPE LOADS: TRUCK CONVOY (BC, MC ...)
LONGITUDINAL STUDY
The longitudinal positioning of convoys is determined by the study of lines of influence. This means
calculating the influence of a convoy of trucks, and positioning as many trucks as necessary to obtain
the extreme of the desired effect.
TRANSVERSAL STUDY
The transversal study is achieved in two steps (in the case of Tome 61 Title II):
independent study of each loadable line and cumulates the effect of each line with a regulatory
transversal digressive weighting.
calculation of the line of influence of n lead trucks taking into account the regulatory
transversal digressive weighting and then operation of this line of influence
The second step is generally only needed for the study of torsion.
LOADS DISTRIBUTED BETWEEN ZEROS ON THE LINE OF INFLUENCE (A(L), ..., PAVEMENT)
LONGITUDINAL STUDY
The loaded areas are determined by studying the zeros of the lines of influence. Positive or negative
areas are loaded so as to obtain the extreme of the required effect.
TRANSVERSAL STUDY
The effect due to several transversal lanes is obtained by accumulating the effect of each lane
independently, weighted by the regulatory transversal digressive coefficients.
8.2 - DEFINITION OF THE DECK

The location of positioning live loads on the structure is defined by the declaration of the deck using
DECK
(CLASSE (TRAFIC) iclass)
(ZONE_TRANS izone WIDTH width (LANE nvoie))
(PAS_LIGNE pasl)
(LDIF ldif)
BAR listeb
(REP_TRANS
KBARRE listekb KTRANS listek

)
END
with:
iclass if TRAFIC command is absent:
Class of the construction Tome 61 Article 3 (by default iclass=1)
if TRAFIC command is present :
Class of the construction Eurocode (by default iclass=2)
izone number of the transversal area
width width of the transversal area
nvoie number of lanes allocated to the transversal area (see Tome 61 Title II Article 2)
(by default : if 0.00<=width< 5.00 nvoie=1
if 5.00<=width<=6.00 nvoie=2
otherwise nvoie=width/3)
pasl minimum distance between two calculated points on the line of influence (by
default pasl=0.50m)
listeb list of bars used to support live loads (the list of bars should represent a
geometrically continuous set of bars)
ldif Width of distribution around the wheel impacts, diffusion occurs in the longitudinal
and transverse directions, the final size of the distributed impact is therefore the size
of impact plus twice its distribution width ldif (by default ldif=0). Diffusion is
restricted to the total width of the defined transversal zones. Diffusion does not apply
to distributed loads (AL, UDL, etc).
listekb list of bars on which are applied the same transversal distribution coefficients (by
default listekb=listeb)
listek list of transversal distribution coefficients defined across the profile (by default
listek=1)
The class of road bridges referred to in Article 3 of Tome. 61 Title II of the C.P.C:
class 1 7.00 m <= rolling width (or specific cases)
class 2 5.50 m < rolling width < 7.00m
class 3 rolling width <=5.50m
For loads A (l), Bc and Bt of Tome. 61 Title II, the transversal weightings are defined from the
class of the construction (keyword CLASSE
).
The class definition has no influence on the loads other than loads A (l), Bc and Bt of Tome 61
Title II
Longitudinal and transversal positioning of live loads is only possible if the location of lanes
(see keyword ZONE_TRANS p122), and the allocation of loads on these lanes are defined ((see
LIVE_LOAD command p129, p135 and p154) In the event that any of these conditions is not
fulfilled, ST1 is limited to a longitudinal positioning of loads without transversal weighting.
In accordance with the philosophy of ST1, a redefinition of the apron does not reset the entire
apron, but only takes the changes made into account.
In particular, if several zones are defined in a first apron, and if a second apron is defined with
a number of areas below the first apron, areas not redefined are retained.
If you want to delete them, just set areas lengths to zero. This may be necessary for
calculations with transversal distribution or when using OPTION SPATIAL.
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A CLASS 1 ROAD BRIDGE APRON WITHOUT DEFINITION OF THE CROSS
PROFILE
DECK
BAR 1 to 15
END
Loads A (l), a (l), etc, are applied to a width of 1.00 m without transversal weighting.
Rolling loads Bc, Bt, etc., are applied to a section without transversal weighting.
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A CLASS 1 ROAD BRIDGE APRON WITH A LOADABLE WIDTH OF 7.00M
DECK
CLASSE 1
ZONE_TRANS
1 WIDTH 7.
BAR 1 to 10
END
Live loads are applied taking into account the positioning and the transversal weighting coefficients
(e.g. for A (l) coefficients a1, a2 and Bc and Bt coefficients bt and bc of Tome. 61 Title II).
Cross section - transversal areas

The cross section of the roadway is described in ST1 by transverse cutting the apron into juxtaposed
areas ((see keyword ZONE_TRANS p122)
The sum of the widths of the zones defined determines the width of the apron. It is always centred on
the axis of the bars that serve as support.
The transverse areas so defined do not have an a priori allocation, and should be loaded using live
loads (see LIVE_LOAD command p129, p135 and p154).
EXAMPLE 1
DECK
CLASSE 1
ZONE_TRANS
1 WIDTH 1.20
2 WIDTH 7.00
3.WIDTH 1.00
END
zone 1 zone 2 zone 3
1.20 7.00 1.00
9.20/ 2 = 4.60
Axe des barres
Areas are presented with

apron is pointing.
area 1 on the left, area n on the right in the direction that the
2 tablier
3
EXAMPLE 2
DECK
CLASSE 1
ZONE_TRANS
1 WIDTH 0.75
2 WIDTH 5.00
3 WIDTH 2.00
4 WIDTH 7.00
5 WIDTH 1.20
END
zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4
0.75 2.00 1.20
5.00 7.00
15.95/ 2 = 7.975
Axe des barres
The list of bars used to support live loads should represent a geometrically continuous set of bars.
This means that if one goes through the bars of the apron in the order defined by the list, you must
move from one bar to another without having to skip any.
EXAMPLE
Structure studied
9 8 7 1 2 3 4
CORRECT DEFINITIONS:
DECK or DECK
CLASSE 2 CLASSE 2
BAR 9,8,7,1 to 4 BAR 4,3,2,1,7,8,9
END END
INCORRECT DEFINITIONS:
DECK or DECK
CLASSE 2 CLASSE 2
BAR 1 to 4,7,8,9 BAR 4,3,2,1,7,9,8
END END
Transversal distribution command

REP_TRANS is only defined in OPTION PLANE and enables acceptance of the transversal
distribution defined by the user (for example Courbon type).
Moving loads are then automatically placed longitudinally and transversely according to the stress
component designed for all points of study.
REP_TRANS cannot be defined without defining ZONE_TRANS. The cross section weighted by
REP_TRANS is defined by all of the areas described by ZONE_TRANS.
Three cases can occur:
if the list of coefficients contains only one value, that value is retained for the entire cross
section, the transversal position of the load has no effect, and the coefficient introduced acts as
a simple weighting factor
If the list of coefficients contains two values, these two values are the coefficients of the point
of study for loads applied to the outer edges of all areas of the cross section defined by
ZONE_TRANS
If the list includes more than two values, the first coefficient and the last coefficient of the list
listek are applied to the outer edges of the cross section defined by ZONE_TRANS, the
other coefficients are then distributed over the cross section at constant intervals depending on
the number of coefficients provided
The values of distribution coefficients are taken equal to

that are not used in listekb
.
1 for the bars on the main list listeb
EXAMPLE 1: OA WITH IDENTICAL BEAMS - COURBON METHOD

OPTION PLANE
...
CARA 1 to 4 SX 1 IZ 1 # caractristiques d'une poutre d'un ouvrage
multi-poutres modlis
...
vlarg1 = 3 # largeurs des voies
vlarg2 = 8
vlarg3 = 1
vlargtablier = vlarg1+vlarg2+vlarg3 # largeur totale deck
# --- formule de Courbon pour 1 poutre pour les bords extrmes du profil en travers
dfini ---
npout = 3 # nombre de poutres

numpout = 1 # numro de la poutre tudie
lambda = 4 # entre-axe des poutres
echarg = -vlargtablier/2 # bord extrme gauche du profil dfini dans
ZONE_TRANS
ct1 = (1-6*(npout+1-2*numpout)/(npout**2-1)*echarg/lambda)/npout
echarg = +vlargtablier/2 # bord extrme droit du profil dfini dans

ZONE_TRANS
ct2 = (1-6*(npout+1-2*numpout)/(npout**2-1)*echarg/lambda)/npout
DECK
CLASSE TRAFIC 2
ZONE_TRANS
1 width vlarg1
2 width vlarg2
3 width vlarg3
BAR 1 to 4
REP_TRANS KBARRE 1,2,3,4 KTRANS ct1,ct2
END
LIVE_LOAD 1 'LM1'
LM1 CARA
ZONE 2
END
...
EXAMPLE 2: SLAB CALCULATION K = F (Y)

OPTION PLANE
...
CARA 1 to 3 SX sectdalle1m IZ inertdalle1m # la section de dalle de 1m de large
est modlise
...
vlarg1 = 3 # largeurs des voies
vlarg2 = 8
vlarg3 = 1
vlargtablier = vlarg1+vlarg2+vlarg3 # largeur totale du deck
listcoeff1 = 1.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.1, 0.8, 0.6

listcoeff2 = 1.2, 1.4, 1.2, 1.0, 0.7, 0.5
DECK
classe trafic 2
zone_trans
1 width vlarg1
2 width vlarg2
3 width vlarg3
bar 1 to 3
REP_TRANS
KBARRE 1,3 KTRANS listcoeff1
KBARRE 2 KTRANS listcoeff2
END
live_load 1 'LM1 cara '

LM1 cara
zone 2
POND 1/vlargtablier # calcul pour un 1m de dalle
END
...
8.3 - DEFINITION OF LOADS: DISTRIBUTED LOAD TYPES
Reminder: Under French regulations loads are expressed in tons.
The study of the effect of live loads of distributed load between zeros on line of influence is defined
using the following syntax:
LIVE_LOAD i ('Title live load')
STRESS <VY,VZ,WY,WZ,VYVZ,VYWZ,WYVZ,WYWZ> >
STRESSG j
PRESS <PX,PY,PZ,MX> )
< AL,AL BRAKE,AL PLANCHER,AL PLANCHER BRAKE,
SIDEWALK,AL PEDESTRIAN,
ALG j >
(ZONE liste)
(POND pond)
(THRESHOLD threshold)
END
with:
i number of live_load
j number of the generalized stress
liste list of transversal areas loaded (see command DECK p122)
pond live_load weighting coefficient (by default pond=1)
threshold threshold taking into account the positive and negative areas
either a line of influence y1, , yn and ymax=MAX(ABS(y1), , ABS(yn))
an ordinate point yi belongs to:
a positive area if yi> ymax*threshold
a negative zone if yi<-ymax*threshold
(by default threshold=0.01 : general recommended value)
The commands EFFORT, DEPLA, STRESS, STRESSG j, PRESS and REAC enable the definition of a
priority component. The study of the live_load is to find the two extremes of this component and the
concomitant values of the other components.
By default there is no concomitance, i.e. the study of the live_load is to establish the extremes of all
components.
The keywords used are:
(EFFORT) DEPLA STRESS PRESS (REAC)
Option PLANE n, ty, mz dx, dy, rz vy, wy px, py fx, fy, mz
Option GRILL mx, tz, my rx, dz, ry vz, wz pz, mx fz, my
Option SPATIAL n, ty, tz, dx, dy, dz, vyvz, vywz, px, py, pz fx, fy, fz
mx, my, mz rx, ry, rz wyvz, wywz mx, my, mz
The keywords used for the definition of live loads are:
for the loads of Tome 61 Title II (description below):
AL, AL BRAKE
AL PLANCHER, AL PLANCHER BRAKE
SIDEWALK, AL PEDESTRIAN
for type A (l) general loads (see command ALG p144):
ALG j
For live loads, the envelope of displacement can only be done as per the study sections defined
on the bars (see command STUDY
p94). The node displacement envelope is never studied.
The inclusion of live loads requires the definition of an apron (see command
definition of a live_load (see command LIVE_LOAD
DECK
p122) the
p129, p135 and p154) and the running of
the live_load (see command EXEC LIVE_LOAD p162).
(see command DECK
p122), and the allocation of loads on these lanes are defined (see keyword
ZONE p129). In the event that any of these conditions is not fulfilled, ST1 is limited to a
longitudinal positioning of loads without transversal weighting.
DESCRIPTION OF THE LIVE LOADS OF TOME. 61 TITLE II)

LOAD A(L) TOME. 61 TITLE II ART. 4 (WITHOUT A (L) FLOOR) - KEYWORD AL
The load A (L) generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force applied in the direction of dead
weight and where the value, dependant on the length loaded L, is provided by the formula:
AL = 0.23+36/(12+L)
This formula corresponds to tons per square metre if the lengths are in metres.
Depending on the class of the bridge (see command DECK p122), the number and width of lanes loaded
(see keyword ZONE p129), the value of AL is multiplied by the coefficients a1 and a2.
Definition of coefficient a1:
Nombre de voies charges 1 2 3 4 >=5
classe 1 1.00 1.00 0.90 0.75 0.70
classe 2 1.00 0.90 0. 0. 0.
classe 3 0.90 0.80 0. 0. 0.
Definition of coefficient a2:
a2 = v0/largeur relle de la lane
with v0 defined by:
classe 1 3.50
classe 2 3.00
classe 3 2.75
BRAKING OF A(L) TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 6 (WITHOUT A(L) FLOOR) - KEYWORD AL BRAKE
The effect of braking A(L) generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force applied along the
local ox axis of the bars and valued according to the loaded length L and loaded surface S is provided
by the formula:
AL BRAKE = (0.23+36/(12+L))/(20+0.0035*S)
Depending on the class of the bridge (see command DECK p122), the number and width of lanes loaded
(see keyword ZONE p129), the value of AL is multiplied by the coefficients a1 and a2 as defined
above.
LOAD A (L) FLOOR TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 4.21 - KEYWORD AL PLANCHER
The load A(L) floor generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force applied in the direction of
dead weight and where the value, dependant on the length loaded L, is provided by the formula:
AL PLANCHER = 0.4-0.0002*L
Depending on the class of the bridge (see command DECK p122), and the width of lanes loaded (see
keyword ZONE p129), the value of AL is multiplied by the coefficient a2 as defined above.
FLOOR BRAKING A(L) TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 6 (KEYWORD AL PLANCHER BRAKE
The effect of braking A (L) floor generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force applied along
the local ox axis of the bars and valued according to the loaded length L and loaded surface S is
provided by the formula:
AL PLANCHER BRAKE = (0.4-0.0002*L)/(20+0.0035*S)
Depending on the class of the bridge (see command DECK p122), and the width of lanes loaded (see
keyword ZONE p129), the value of AL is multiplied by the coefficient a2 as defined above.
PAVEMENT LOAD TOME. 61 TITLE II ART. 13.1 - KEYWORD SIDEWALK
The pavement load generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force applied in the direction of
dead weight and where the value is:
SIDEWALK = 0.150
This value corresponds to tons per square metre.
PEDESTRIAN AND CYCLIST LOAD (L) TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 13.2 - KEYWORD AL PEDESTRIAN
The pedestrian and cyclist load A(L) generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force applied in
the direction of dead weight and where the value, dependant on the length loaded L, is provided by the
formula:
AL PEDESTRIAN = 0.2+15/(50+L)
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE WITHOUT CONCOMITANT UNDER LOAD A (L) (TOME 61 TITLE II) FOR 1.00 m
WIDE WITHOUT WEIGHTING BY COEFFICIENTS A1, A2
LIVE_LOAD 1 'effet de A(l), 1.00 m de largeur, pondration : 7.78'
AL
POND 7.78
END
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE ON MOMENTS, WITH CONCOMITANT EFFORTS AND POSSIBLY OTHER
DISPLACEMENTS, STRAINS, PRESSURES
Envelope on support reactions without concomitance.

Study under load of pavement (Tome 61 Title II) for 1.00m wide.
LIVE_LOAD 2 'load de sidewalk sur 1.00 m de largeur'
EFFORT MZ
SIDEWALK
END
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPEON PY PRESSURE OF CROSS MEMBER OF ELASTIC GROUND (see command

CARA p57), WITH CONCOMITANT PRESSURES AND POSSIBLY OTHER STRAINS, DISPLACEMENTS,
STRESSES
On the OY axis support reaction with concomitance with other reactions.

Braking study of A(I) (Tome 61 Title II) for 1.00 m wide without transversal weighting by
coefficients a1, a2
LIVE_LOAD 3 'freinage de A(l) sur 1.00 m de largeur'
PRESS PY
REAC FY
AL BRAKE
END
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE ON THE UPPER STRESS ON THE OY AXIS, WITH CONCOMITANCE WITH OTHER
STRESSES, STRAINS AND POSSIBLY DISPLACEMENTS, PRESSURES
On the support reaction on the OY axis with concomitance with other reactions.
Study of the load A(I) (Tome 61 Title II) positioned on areas 2,3 (see keyword ZONE_TRANS pg
command DECK p122) transversally weighted by the coefficients a1,a2.
LIVE_LOAD 4 'A(l) sur la chausse - pondration : 1.2 '
STRESS VY
REAC FY
ZONE 2,3
AL
POND 1.2
END
In this example, the areas 2and 3 are considered as separated by a rigid security system.
For example in class 1in the sense of Tome 61::

zone 2 of 5 m => 1 lane
zone 3 of 4 m => 1 lane
zone 2, 3 of 9 m => 2 lanes
zone 4 of 9 m => 3 lanes
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE WITHOUT CONCOMITANCE FOR BAR STUDY SECTIONS
Envelope on the moment of fitting mz the supports with concomitance of other reactions.
Study of generalized distributed load ALG 1 (see command ALG p144) positioned over the area 4 (see
keyword ZONE_TRANS in the DECK command p122 ) with transversal weighting.
LIVE_LOAD 5 'load ALG 1 sur zone transversale numro 4'
REAC MZ
ZONE 4
ALG 1
END
8.4 - DEFINITION OF LIVE_LOADS: ROLLING LOAD TYPES
Reminder: Loads predefined by French regulations are expressed in tons.
The study of the effect of live loads of the rolling loads type is described using the following syntax:
LIVE_LOAD i ('Title live load ')
STRESSG j
< BC,BC BRAKE,BT,
MC80,ME80,MC120,ME120,
CV_C2,CV_D2F1,CV_D3F1,CV_D3F2,CV_E2F1,CV_E3F1,CV_E3F2,
CONV j >
(ZONE liste)
(PAS_CONV pasc) (SENS psens)
(POND pond)
END
with:
i number of the live_load
j number of the generalized stress
liste list of the transversal area loaded (see command DECK p122)
pasc maximum step of displacement of moving loads on the lines of influence
(by default pasc=0.5)
psens direction of displacement of rolling loads on the apron
(psens=1 increasing, psens=2 decreasing, by default psens=3 in both
directions)
pond Weight coefficient on the live_load (by default pond=1)
The commands EFFORT, DEPLA, STRESS, STRESS j, PRESS and REAC are used to define a preferred
component. The study of the live_load is to find the two extremes of this component and the
concomitant values of the other components.
By default there is no concomitance, i.e. the study of the live_load is to establish the extremes of all
components.

Option SPATIAL tx, ty, tz, dx, dy, dz, vyvz, vywz, px, py, pz fx, fy, fz
FOR THE LOADS OF TOME 61 TITLE II:
BC, BC BRAKE, BT
MC80, ME80, MC120, ME120
FOR ABNORMAL LOADS TO THE LETTER - CIRCULAR R/EG.3 OF THE 20 JULY 1983:
CV_C2
CV_D2F1, CV_D3F1, CV_D3F2
CV_E2F1, CV_E3F1, CV_E3F2
FOR GENERALISED FOR CONVOYS (see command CONVp148) :
CONV j
For live loads, the envelope of displacement can only be done as per the study sections defined
on the bars (see command STUDY
p94). The node displacement envelope is never studied.
DECK
p122) the
(see command DECK
p122, and the allocation of loads on these lanes are defined (see keyword
ZONE p129) In the event that any of these conditions is not fulfilled, ST1 is limited to a
longitudinal positioning of a line of trucks without transversal weighting.
Rolling loads travel in two directions on the apron. The results are nevertheless sensitive to
moving loads (see command PAS_CONV
p135).
The rolling loads, assigned to specific areas, are placed across the width of the areas assigned.
This applies to type B loads, which are military and exceptional. It is therefore up to the user
to define the widths of suitable areas
8.4.1 - DESCRIPTION OF THE LIVE LOADS OF TOME 61 TITLE II)

Loads automatically generated by ST1 do not take into account the coefficient of dynamic load
increase for system B (Tome 61 Title II Art. 5.5).
BC LOAD TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 5.2 - KEYWORD BC
The effect of the BC convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to two groups of three forces distributed,
applied along the direction of the dead weight and where the positions and values are consistent with
the diagrams below:
4.50 1.50
0.25x0.25
2.50 2.50
2.00
0.50
2.25 4.50 1.50 2.25 2.25 4.50 1.50 2.25
2.00
0.25 2.00 2.00 0.25
6t 12t 12t 6t 12t 12t
10.50 10.50
0.50
Longitudinally Transversally Plan

Depending on the class of the bridge ((see command DECK p122), the number and width of lanes
loaded (see keyword ZONE p129), the value of BC is multiplied by a coefficient of bc.
Definition of the coefficient bc:
Nombre de voies charges 1 2 3 4 >=5
classe 1 1.20 1.10 0.95 0.80 0.70
classe 2 1.00 1.00 0. 0. 0.
classe 3 1.00 0.80 0. 0. 0.
BC BRAKING TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 6 - KEYWORD BC BRAKE
The effect of BC braking BC generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed group of three forces,
directed along the local ox axis of the bars, and for which the positions and values comply with the
diagram below:
2.50
2.25 4.50 1.50 2.25
6t 12t 12t
0.25 2.00
10.5
Longitudinally Transversally
On the same line, the two BC

trucks are placed independently of each other longitudinally
(excluding overlap) to have the worst possible effects.
BT LOAD TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 5.4 - KEYWORD BT
The effect of the BT convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a group of two forces distributed,
the diagrams below:
1.35
3.00 3.00
0.25x0.6
2.00
1.35
1.00
2.00
0.50 2.00 1.00 2.00 0.50
16t 16t

Depending on the class of the bridge ((see command DECK p122), and the number and width of lanes
loaded (see keyword ZONE p129), the value of BT is multiplied by a coefficient of bc.
Definition of the coefficient bt:
Nombre de voies charges 1 2 >=3
classe 1 1.00 1.00 0.
classe 2 0.90 0.90 0.
classe 3 0. 0. 0.
LOAD MC80 TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 9.21 - KEYWORD MC80
The effect of the MC80 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to ten forces distributed, separated by
a minimum of 30.50m, applied along the direction of the dead weight and where the positions and
values are consistent with the diagrams below:
0.85
72t
3.65
1.95
0.85 1.95 0.85
0.85
4.90
3.65
For MC tanks, it is the same as for BC trucks taking into account the minimum distances
between tanks.
LOAD ME80 TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 9.21 - KEYWORD ME80
The effect of the ME80 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a group of two forces distributed,
applied along the direction of the dead weight and where the positions and values are consistent with the
diagrams below:
0.12 0.12
1.50
3.50
22t 22t 1.50

LOAD MC80 TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 9.21 - KEYWORD MC120
The effect of the MC120 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to ten forces distributed, separated
by a minimum of 30.50m, applied along the direction of the dead weight and where the positions and
values are consistent with the diagrams below:
1.00
110t
2.30
4.30
1.00
1.00 2.30 1.00
6.10
4.30

LOAD ME120 TOME 61 TITLE II ART. 9.21 - KEYWORD ME120
The effect of the ME120 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a group of two forces distributed,
applied along the direction of the dead weight and where the positions and values are consistent with the
diagrams below:
0.15 0.15
1.80
4.00
33t 33t 1.80

8.4.2 - EXCEPTIONAL LOADS FROM CIRCULAR R/REG 3 DATED 20TH JULY 1983
Loads automatically generated by ST1 ignore the coefficient of 1.1 due to unbalanced loads on the
axles (Cir. R/EG.3 Art. 4.4).
CONVOY C2 CIR. R/EG.3 20TH JULY 1983 - KEYWORD CV_C1
The effect of the C1 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a group of four forces distributed,
the diagrams below:
6t 12t 12t
64.0t 0
2
.3
2.75 1.35 4.225 7.75
16.075
CONVOY C2 CIR. R/EG.3 20TH JULY 1983 - KEYWORD CV_C2
Similarly, the effect of the convoy C2 generated by ST1 is equivalent to the diagram below:
7t 12.75t 12.75t
87.5t 0
2
.3
2.75 1.35 2.725 7.75
14.575
CONVOY D2F1 CIR. R/EG.3 20TH JULY 1983 - KEYWORD CV_D2F1
The effect of the D2F1 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force, applied along the
direction of the dead weight and where the features are consistent with the diagram below:
3.20
245t
21.70
The effect of the D3F1 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force, applied along
the direction of the dead weight and where the features are consistent with the diagram below:
5.15
250t
17.05
The effect of the D3F2 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a group of two distributed forces,
applied along the direction of the dead weight and where the features are consistent with the diagram
below:
5.15
125t 125t
9.30 14.70 9.30
33.30
CONVOY E2F1 CIR. R/EG.3 20TH JULY 1983 - KEYWORD CV_E2F1
The effect of the E2F1 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force, applied along the
3.20
350t
31.00
TH
CONVOY E3F1 CIR. R/EG.3 20 JULY 1983 - KEYWORD CV_E3F1
The effect of the E3F1 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a distributed force, applied along the
5.15
400t
26.35
CONVOY E3F2 CIR. R/EG.3 20TH JULY 1983 - KEYWORD CV_E3F2
The effect of the E3F2 convoy generated by ST1 is equivalent to a group of two distributed forces,
applied along the direction of the dead weight and where the features are consistent with the diagram
below:
5.15
188t 188t
12.40 11.60 12.40
36.40
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE WITHOUT CONCOMITANCE UNDER LOAD BC (TOME 61 TITLE II) FOR A LINE
WITHOUT TRANSVERSAL WEIGHTING
LIVE_LOAD 1 'effet dune file Bc'
BC
END
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE ON MOMENTS, WITH CONCOMITANCE OF OTHER STRESSES AND POSSIBLY
OTHER DISPLACEMENTS, STRAINS, PRESSURES.
Envelope on support reactions without concomitance.

Study under load Bt (Tome 61 Title II) for a line without weighting by coefficient bc.
LIVE_LOAD 2 'load dune file Bt'
EFFORT MZ
BT
END
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE ON THE PY PRESSURES OF CROSS MEMBERS ON ELASTIC GROUND (see

command CARA p57), WITH CONCOMITANCE OF OTHER PRESSURES AND POSSIBLY OTHER STRAINS,
DISPLACEMENTS, STRESSES
Envelope on the OY axis support reaction with concomitance with other reactions.
Bc braking study (Tome 61 Title II).
LIVE_LOAD 3 'freinage de Bc'
PRESS PY
REAC FY
BC BRAKE
END
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE ON THE UPPER STRESS ON THE OY AXIS, WITH CONCOMITANCE WITH OTHER
STRESSES, STRAINS AND POSSIBLY DISPLACEMENTS, PRESSURES
Envelope on the support reaction of the OY axis with concomitance with other reactions.
Study of the Bc load (Tome 61 Title II) positioned on areas 2, 3 (see keyword ZONE_TRANSof the
command DECK p122) weighted by the coefficient bc.
LIVE_LOAD 4 'Bc sur la chausse'
STRESS VY
REAC FY
ZONE 2,3
BC
END
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE WITHOUT CONCOMITANCE FOR BAR STUDY SECTIONS
Envelope on the moment of fitting mz the supports with concomitance of other reactions.
Study of generalized rolling load CONV 1 (see command CONV p148) positioned over the area 4 (see
keyword ZONE_TRANS in the DECK command p122 ) with transversal weighting.
LIVE_LOAD 5 'CONV 1 sur zone transversale numro 4'
REAC MZ
ZONE 4
CONV 1
END
8.5 - DEFINITION OF TYPE A (L) GENERALISED LOADS
In addition to the regulatory loads of Tome 61 Title II (see commands AL, etc, SIDEWALK p129), you
can also use ST1 to describe live loads distributed between zeros on the lines of influence, where the
density varies in relation to the loaded length. These loads known as A(l) generalised loads are
described according the following syntax:
ALG i ('Title distributed load ')
DENS
long1 dens1

longi densi

(WIDTH LANE v0)
(COEF TRANS liste)
END
with:
i number of the type A (l) load
fx, fy, fz, multiplying coefficients of the load to obtain the component along the designated
mx, my, mz axis
longi loaded length
densi positive load density (per 1 m wide) corresponding to a loaded length equal to
longi (the load density depends on the loaded length)
Is described step by step using couples (longi, densi)
if the loaded length is outside the explicitly defined interval, the density of the
nearest terminal is applied)
v0 reference width (or nominal) of a lane
this parameter enables calculation of a weighting coefficient (a2) of the surface
load to obtain an identical linear load for each lane, regardless of its actual width
a2=v0 / actual width of the channel
by default v0 is not defined which is equivalent to loading the apron over a width of:
-1.00m if the transversal areas are not defined (see commands DECK
p122 and LIVE_LOAD p129, p135 and p154)
- the width of the transversal areas if defined
liste list of coefficients to take into account depending on the number of lanes loaded
the transversal coefficients are only taken into account if the transversal areas are
defined (see commands DECK p122 and LIVE_LOAD p129, p135 and p154)
if the number of lanes exceeds the number of coefficients defined, the last
coefficient is used
(by default liste=1.00)
The keywords DIR GLO mean a definition in the global coordinate system of the structure.
The keywords DIR LOC mean a definition in the local reference of the bars.
The components used are:
Option GRILL mx, fz, mz
(by default, the direction is according to the direction of dead weight)
DECK
p122) the
(see command DECKp122), and the allocation of loads on these lanes are defined ((see
command LIVE_LOAD p129, p135 and p154) In the event that any of these conditions is not
The notion of class (see command

loads.
DECK p122) has no influence on the type A (l) generalised
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A UNIFORM LOAD OF 0.150 T/M2 DIVIDED BETWEEN THE ZEROS ON THE
LINES OF INFLUENCE AND DIRECTED IN THE DIRECTION OF DEAD WEIGHT
The descriptions below are equivalent:

ALG 1 'load quivalente to load of sidewalk'
DENS
0 .150
100 .150
END
ou
ALG 1 'load quivalente to load of sidewalk'
DENS
0 .150
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A LOAD DEPENDING ON THE LENGTH LOADED IN ACCORDANCE WITH A
DENSITY CURVE
Densit
3.4
2.2
1.4
0.9
0.5
0.0 9.5 19.2 25.0 46.5 Longueur Charge
Moreover, assuming that this is an eccentric vertical load of 1.75 m from the axis of the bars of the
apron we obtain the following breakdown:
1.75 following the local mx axis
1.00 following the OZ global axis
ALG 2 'load repartie excentre'

DIR LOC MX 1.75
DIR GLO FZ -1.00
DENS
0. 3.4
9.5 2.2
19.2 1.4
25.0 0.9
46.5 0.5
END
For example, if the loaded length is 15 m, we obtain a load density of:
2.2+(1.4-2.2)*(15.-9.5)/(19.2-9.5) = 1.7464
The load that is then applied by ST1 is broken down as follows:
a local distributed torque mx = 1.7464*1.75
a global distributed force fz = -1.7464*1.00
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A DISTRIBUTED LOAD EQUAL TO THE LOAD A (L) TOME 61 TITLE II FOR A
CLASS 1 ROAD BRIDGE
AL 3 'load quivalente to Al Fasc. 61 Title II'
DENS
0. 3.23
2. 2.80
4. 2.48
6. 2.23
8. 2.03
10. 1.87
15. 1.56
20. 1.35
25. 1.20
30. 1.08
35. 1.00
50. 0.81
100. 0.55
150. 0.45
200. 0.40
250. 0.37
500. 0.30
WIDTH LANE 3.5
COEF TRANS 1.00,1.00,0.90,0.75,0.70
END
8.6 - DEFINITION OF GENERALISED ROLLING LOADS
In addition to the regulatory loads of Tome 61 Title II (see commands BC, BT, ..., MC120 p135), and
abnormal loads under circular letter R / EG 3 of 20th July 1983 (see commands CV_C2, CV_D2F1, ,
p135), it is possible to describe generalised rolling loads in ST1, using the following syntax:
CONV i ('Title convoy')
ESSIEU
j XL xl WEIGHT weight (YL listeyl) (IMPACT impactl impactt)

(MAX_TRUCK ncam)
(MAX_LANE nfile)
(LENGTH xlong)
(WIDTH xlarg)
(COEF TRANS liste)
END
with:
i number of the convoy
fx, fy, fz, multiplying coefficients of the load to obtain the component along the designated
mx, my, mz axis
j number of the axle
xl axle position relative to the front of the truck
weight axle weight (positive)
listeyl list of transversal positions of wheels making up the axle j in relation to the axle
axis (by default listeyl =0.00)
impactl
longitudinal and transversal dimensions of an impact
and:
(by default impactl=0.00 and impactt=0.00)
impactl
ncam maximum number of trucks per line
(by default ncam=1)
nfile maximum number of lines loaded
(by default nfile=nombre de voies charges)
xlong length taken up by a truck (by default xlong=max(xl+impact/2) )
xlarg Width taken up by a truck is only taken into account if the transversal areas are
defined (see commands DECK p122 and LIVE_LOAD p129, p135 and p154)
liste list of coefficients to take into account depending on the number of lanes loaded.
Be careful, each coefficient is applied to all the lanes laoded (according the
fasicule 61 titre 2: the 1rst coefficient is applied for 1 lane, the 2nd coefficient for
2 lanes, etc..). thus all the lanes are loaded uniformly.
the transversal coefficients are only taken into account if the transversal areas are
defined (see command DECK p122) and are used as support for convoys (see
command LIVE_LOAD p129, p135 and p154).
if the number of lanes exceeds the number of coefficients defined, the last
coefficient is used
by default (liste=1.00)
The keywords DIR GLO mean a definition in the global coordinate system of the structure.
The keywords DIR LOC mean a definition in the local reference of the bars.
The components used are:
Option GRILL mx, fz, mz
(by default the direction is according to the direction of dead weight)
DECK
p122) the
(see command DECKp122), and the allocation of loads on these lanes are defined ((see
command LIVE_LOAD p129, p135 and p154). In the event that any of these conditions is not
The notion of class (see command

loads.
DECK p122) has no influence on the generalised rolling
EXAMPLE: GENERALISED DEFINITION OF A CONVOY EQUIVALENT TO THE BC LOAD OF TOME 61

TITLE II FOR A CLASS 1 ROAD BRIDGE
2.25 6.75 8.25 10.50
6t 12t 12t
Longitudinally Transversally
CONV 1 'convoi quivalent Bc'
MAX_TRUCK 2
WIDTH 2.50
LENGTH 10.50
ESSIEU
1 XL 2.25 WEIGHT 6 IMPACT 0.20 0.20 YL 1.0,1.0
COEF TRANS 1.20,1.10,0.95,0.80,0.70
END
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF A CONVOY EQUIVALENT TO THE MILITARY LOAD MC120 OF TOME 61 TITLE II
CONV 1 'convoi MC120'

MAX_TRUCK 10
MAX_LANE 1
WIDTH 4.30
ESSIEU
LENGTH 36.60
END
8.7 - DEFINITION OF EUROCODE LOADS

ST1 also enables the application of loads in accordance with
Eurocode 1-2 (EN 1991-2).
Reminder: Eurocode loads are expressed in kN.
The load models used in ST1 are:

Model Loads Description
UDL uniformly distributed load of constant density
LM1
TS tandem type rolling load with two axles
LM2 essieu single-axle load (two wheels of 200 kN each)
UDL as LM1
LM3 TS as LM1
VS special type vehicle rolling load
Each model also supports the distributed load on the remaining areas, i.e. the parts of loadable areas
not loaded with a lane.
The TS load consists of two axles, the weight of each axle is in format Q .Qk, where Q are adjustment
factors. The impact surface of each wheel is assumed to be a square of 0.40 m on each side.
The UDL load corresponds to a weight per square metre equal to q .qk, q being an adjustment factor.
The characteristic values of loads UDL and TS are as follows:
Tandem TS UDL
Position
Axle load Q ik (kN) qik (or qrk) (kN/m)
lane 1 300 9
lane 2 200 2.5
lane 3 100 2.5
other lanes 0 2.5
residual areas 0 2.5
For each lane number, the values of adjustment coefficients depend on the traffic class. Eurocode 1-2
defines three classes of traffic according to its average composition:
Traffic classes
1 accumulation of heavy traffic on lane 1 (unusual usage class)
2 for the most common traffic compositions (on the main network and motorway)
3 presence of heavy vehicles likely but in small numbers or occasional
The adjustment factors, according to the traffic class and number i for the lane are:
Traffic class Q1 Qi , i > 1 q1 qi , i > 1 qr QLM2
1 1 1 1 1.2 1.2 0,8
2 0,9 0,8 0,7 1 1 0,8
The various coefficients are defined in the parameters file ST1.par.
Finally the effects of UDL and TS loads are weighted by coefficients where the values depend on the
type of combination:
Combination UDL TS LM2
FREQUENT 0.4 0.75 0.75
STANDARD 1 1 1
The maximum number of loaded lanes and their width are defined in relation to the loadable width; in
accordance with the table below:
Loadable width (L) Number of lanes Width of a lane (metres)
L <5.40 m 1 3.00
5.40 <= L <6.00 2 L/2
6.00 <L Integer (L / 3) 3.00
When the width of the deck is divided into several loadable areas, the loadable width to be considered
for determining the number of lanes is the total loadable width, to which must be added the width of
separators if they are not permanent physical structures.
The numbering of lanes is common to the entire loadable width (for details, see EN 1991-2, 4.2.3 and
4.2.4).
Eurocode loads are used in the exemple4.st1 file p263.

The ST1 command parameters enabling modification of the default Eurocode loads are described
below:
EUROCODE
(PSI FREQ (TS psits) (UDL psiudl))
(WEIGHT (TS list_poidsts) (UDL listpoidsudl))
(CLASSE iclass AJUSTEMENT (TS listcoeff)(UDL listcoeff) (LM2 coeflm2)
)
END
with:
psits,psiudl coefficients of frequent values applied to the characteristic values of TS and
UDL (without scaling)
list_poidsts list of truck axle weights for lanes TS 1.2 and 3 calculation (limited to 3
coefficients, the last coefficient on the list is used for any other lanes) (kN)
list_poidudl list of UDL load densities for lanes TS 1.2 and 3 calculation (limited to 4
coefficients, the last coefficient on the list is used for any other lanes)
(kN/m2)
iclass Eurocode traffic class (maximum 3 classes)
list_coeff lists the alpha adjustment factors for lanes 1 and following according to the
class for TS and UDL loads (limited to two coefficients, the last coefficient
of the list is used for other lanes) (without scaling)
coefflm2 beta adjustment coefficient for LM2 load (without scaling)
EXAMPLE:
EUROCODE
PSI FREQ TS 0.75 UDL 0.4
WEIGHT TS 300,200,100 UDL 9,2.5
CLASSE 1
AJUSTEMENT TS 1,1 UDL 1.0,1.2 LM2 0.8
CLASSE 2
AJUSTEMENT TS 0.9,0.8 UDL 0.7,1 LM2 0.8
END
The ST1 command parameters specific to Eurocode loads are described below:
DECK
CLASSE TRAFIC icltra

END
with:
icltra Traffic class (default icltra = 2)
LIVE_LOAD i ('Title live load')
STRESSG j
< LM1 <(CARA),FREQ> <(CENTRE), FREE)>,
LM2 <CARA, FREQ>,
LM3 <VSJ,nj>
(ZONEVS kvs YVS yvs1 yvs2(REL,ABS))(<EXC exc,DEBORDVOIE debv>) (PONDVS pondvs)
(LM1 <CARA,(FREQ),NUL><(CENTRE),FREE>(LGEXCLU lg) (CORRELATED vj
vk)),
LM4 <CTE,VAR>,
TROT_EC, TROT_LM1,
CH_23M3, CH_34M3,
LMF3, LMF3B
>
(ZONE liste)
(POND pond)
END
with:
CARA, FREQ lLM1 or LM2 is either standard or frequent
LM1 CENTRE the tandem TS is centred on its lane
LM1 FREE the tandem TS is free on its lane
LM4 CTE Crowd loadLM4 (qfk=5 kN/m2)
LM4 VAR pedestrian load LM4 with qfk = 2+120/(L+30) kN/m2
(2.5 kN/m2 <=qfk <= 5 kN/m2)
TROT_EC Eurocode pavement load (qfk=5 kN/m2)
TROT_LM1 load of pavement alongside LM1 (qfk=3 kN/m2)
and for LM3:

nj number of the convoy set by the user using the command CONV (see p148)
In the case of a convoy defined by the user using the command CONV, only one
truck is taken into account in the definition of LM3
the exclusion zone of the truck towards LM1 is defined by the length and width of
a single truck (CONV) defined by the user
the width of the truck VS must be less than the width of two lanes
the command DIR of CONV (multiplying coefficient depending on direction) is not
taken into account
kvs number of the area where the VS exceptional vehicle will roll, in which any
potential width restriction is defined
(by default, this area is the first area defined on the apron)
yvs1, limit positions round the edges of the VS in area k in absolute or relative over the
yvs2 width of area k
(by default the entire area is loaded by VS: yvs1=0 and yvs2=1 REL
please remember that the profile of areas is defined from left to right in the
direction of apron definition)
pondvs weighting on VS truck only
CARA,FREQ The LM1 of LM3 accompanying the VS is either standard, frequent, or nil
,NUL
debv the VS truck is placed in position debv in relation to the edge of the lane 1 of
LM1, left and right permutations on the lane having been done
by default the VS is placed at the edge of lane 1 (debv=0)
exc the VS truck is placed off centre from a position exc in relation to its lane in the
case of a VS less than 3m or with a 2 lane axis in the case of a 2 lane VS
CENTRE the TS truck is centred on its default lane
lg Exclusion length (longitudinally) of VS in relation to the LM1
(by default lg=10m)
vj, vk numbers of LM1 lanes on which the special vehicle travels (by default vj=1 et
vk=2) N.B.: the maximum number of lanes must be less than the maximum
number of lanes in the loaded area and the numbers of lanes must be sequential:
abs (vk-vj) = 1
Just one
By default the
VS
truck is taken into account in the
VS
.LM3
truck less than 3m in width is placed on lane 1 of LM1, the VS truck between
3m and 6m is placed on lanes 1 and 2 of the LM1.
By default, the convoy LM3

, the load
combination. Exceptional loads ,
LM1 accompanying the abnormal load is often taken in
C D, E under the French Regulations used with the LM3
convoy are expressed in kilo-Newton.
VSJ Label of LM3 truck defined in Eurocode 1.
VSJ Scoring models of special vehicles Model width Width Adjustment
for road bridges (M) (m)
(appendix A EN1991-2) AN France
VS1 VS_600_150 3 unchanged
VS10 VS_2400_240 4.5 (2 lanes) unchanged
VS11 VS_2400_200_200 3 unchanged
VS14 VS_3000_200_200 3 unchanged
VS17 VS_3600_240_240 4.5 (2 lanes) unchanged
VS18 LECLERC(=>p.e.b.leclerc) 3,35 (2 lanes) 3 (1 lane)
VS20 CV_C2 3,2 (2 lanes) 3 (1 lane)

VS21 CV_D2F1 3,2 (2 lanes) 3 (1 lane)
VS22 CV_D3F1 5,15 (2 lanes) unchanged
VS23 CV_D3F2 5,15 (2 lanes) unchanged
VS24 CV_E2F1 3,2 (2 lanes) 3 (1 lane)
VS25 CV_E3F1 5,15 (2 lanes) unchanged
VS26 CV_E3F2 5,15 (2 lanes) unchanged
VS27 CV_C1 3,2 (2 lanes) 3 (1 lane)
EXAMPLE: USE OF LM3
DECK
CLASSE TRAFIC 2
bar 1 to 3
ZONE_TRANS
1 WIDTH 2
2 WIDTH 8
3 WIDTH 8
4 WIDTH 1
END
#--------------------- le VS et le LM1 se dplacent sur la zone 2 -----------------
LIVE_LOAD 1 'LM3 vs2'
ZONE 2
LM3 VS_600_150
END
#--------------------- le VS est seul, sans LM1 -----------------------------------
LIVE_LOAD 2 'LM3 VS sans LM1'
ZONE 2
LM3 VS_2400_240 LM1 NUL
END
#--------------------- le VS est un camion 2 essieux 2 roues chacun -----------
#
CONV 10 'VS'
ESSIEU
1 XL 10 WEIGHT 5 YL 1,1 IMPACT 0.25 0.25
2 XL 20 WEIGHT 5 YL 1,1 IMPACT 0.25 0.25
LENGTH 30
WIDTH 3
MAX FILE 1
MAX_CAM 1
END
#--------------------- le LM1 se dplace sur les zones 2,3 ------------------------
#--------------------- et le VS est entre 1m et 7m lintrieur de la zone 2 -----
LIVE_LOAD 3 'LM3 Convoi'
LM3 10
ZONEVS 2 YVS 1 7 ABS PONDVS 1.1
LM1 LGEXCLU 25
ZONE 2,3
POND 1.35
END
MAIN LOADING SYSTEM: LOAD MODEL NO. 1 (IN PLAN)
2.00
0.40
0.50
>=
0.40
2.00
1.20
X
The X axis is longitudinal.
The diagram shows two TS type vehicles, placed side by side; the longitudinal position of each one is
independent, and results from the shape of the surface of influence.
Each TS has two axles.
In ST1, each TS moves on an axis centred on its lane.
The model No.1 also includes a distributed load (UDL) of constant density. It is applied only on the
adverse parts of loadable areas, longitudinally and transversely.
For each surface element and load, weighting is applied depending on the lane number that contains
the item. It can be located on a loadable part of the apron, away from lanes (residual areas).
SINGLE-AXLE MODEL: LOAD MODEL NO. 2 (IN PLAN)
2.00
X
0.60
0.35
The movement of this load is completely free longitudinally and transversely.

The diagram shows a single-axle load placed at the edge of the loadable area.
Model No.2 does not have any distributed load.
SPECIAL VEHICLE MODEL: LOAD MODEL NO. 3 (PLAN) - EXAMPLE: VS4 1200/200
X
0.15
1.50
1.20
1.50
Eurocode 1 defines a large number of special vehicles (VS).

The VS load is added to those of model No.1 (UDL + TS) at frequent value.
The VS load over six axles moves longitudinally along the line. The presence of distributed load ( UDL)
or (TS) vehicle is excluded in the area occupied by the VS and extended over a length of 10 m in front
and behind the vehicle (e.g. for VS4 six axle load, a total length of 27.65 m).
MODELS OF FATIGUE VEHICLE: LMF3 AND LMF3B
Eurocode 1-2 defines a device for calculating fatigue.
Model of LMF3 fatigue load (120kN/axle)
The LMF3 fatigue convoy is centred on its lane.
The LMF3B fatigue convoy consists of two LMF3 vehicles placed on the same line, except that
the 2nd vehicle has 36kN axles instead of 120 kN.
MODELS OF CONSTRUCTION VEHICLES: CH_23M3 AND CH_34M3
National Appendix to Eurocode 1-2 defines two devices for calculating the construction phases.
Load model for an earthmoving machine of 23 m3
23m3
3
Load model for an earthmoving machine of 34m
8.8 - RUNNING LIVE LOADS

The study of the previously described live loads (see command LIVE_LOAD p129, p135 and p154) is
run using the following command:
EXEC LIVE_LOAD (liste)
with:
liste list of numbers of previously defined live_loads (by default all live_loads
specified will be studied)
The EXEC LIVE_LOAD command stores the results in the database.
In the instruction above, the list may be replaced by the word ALL
all defined live_loads (this is then equivalent to do not place list).
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (commands ST1 version 2) 163
9 PHASE OF CONSTRUCTION
(ST1 V2 ONLY)
The commands detailed in this chapter apply only to users of ST1 version 2 (version with
renewable annual agreement) and will not be available with ST1 version 1 (retail
version).
9.1 - DEFINITION OF PHASING
Phasing contains a chronological description of activations and stresses on a structure. It accurately
records the phasing of construction and deferred behaviour of materials.
The definition of phasing is achieved according to the following syntax:
PHASAGE (i) ('Title phasage')
(SUITE PHASAGE liste)
ENV v ( < EFFORT <N,TY,TZ,MX,MY,MZ>,
STRESS <VY,VZ,WY,WZ,VYVZ,VYWZ,WYWZ>,
STRESSG c
(ACTIVATE,DEACTIVATE) ENV liste
DATE d
ACTIVATE RESTRAINT liste
JACK RESTRAINT liste
ACTIVATE BAR liste (AGE a) (MODE <ABS,REL>)
DEACTIVATE (BAR liste,RESTRAINT liste)
LOAD
...
END
TENDRE CABLE liste (NOT) (INJECTE)
DETENDRE CABLE liste
STATE e
MODIFIER RESTRAINT liste
END PHASAGE
with:
i phasing number (by default i=1)
ST1 - List of commands (commands ST1 version 2) 164
Phasing-specific commands are described later in this chapter.
EXAMPLE
PHASAGE 1 'Exemple phasage'

DATE 125
ACTIVATE BAR 12 AGE 3

TENDRE CABLE 8

DATE 150
MODIFIER RESTRAINT 12 DY

TENDRE CABLE 11

END PHASAGE
EXEC PHASAGE 1
KEYWORD AND:
Some actions should be described using several commands. To prevent an intermediate calculation
being made, these commands can be sequenced using by the keyword AND.
EXAMPLE: ENABLE A BAR WITH ITS OWN DEAD WEIGHT
PHASAGE 1

ACTIVATE BAR 2
LOAD WEIGHT SELF 1
AND LOAD WEIGHT SELF 2

END PHASAGE
EXAMPLE: MOVE A LIST OF SUPPORTS
PHASAGE 1 'Exemple phasage' or PHASAGE 1 'Exemple phasage'

MODIFIER RESTRAINT 1 NODE 2 MODIFIER RESTRAINT 1 to 3 NODE 2 to 4
AND MODIFIER RESTRAINT 2 NODE 3 AND JACK RESTRAINT 1 to 3
AND MODIFIER RESTRAINT 3 NODE 4
AND JACK RESTRAINT 1 to 3 END PHASAGE
END PHASAGE
In the phasing of construction, where the date does not change, but new fixed loads are applied
to a structure already pre-stressed (e.g. a load, enabling or disabling of supports or bars, cable
tensioning) and the keyword AND is omitted, the cables already under tension undergo
additional losses of tension through elastic deformation.
Ep
p K b
Eij
with K = 0. the tensioning and K = 1 loading
As a result of new loads applied, there is a redistribution of the effects of pre-stress in the
structure. A calculation is made with just one iteration. For example, a pre-stressed beam
already under its own dead weight, to which we apply a new superstructure load, is deformed
under the effect of this new load. The pre-stressing cable undergoes additional deformation
related to the new load and therefore has an additional live_load that changes the concrete
stress diagram yet again.
The description of phasing does not generate results, it is limited to storage of the definition in
the database. The command EXEC PHASAGE generates the results.
Phasing should include the enabling of all elements of the structure (not enabled by default) in
a logical order of construction. For example, you must activate the supports before the bars
are inter-connected.
The enabling of a group of bars simultaneously in phasing must respect the order of
construction, i.e. starting with the supported bars before enabling the bars that are not
supported.
EXAMPLE : ACTIVATING A GROUP OF BARS
1 1 2 3 2
PHASAGE 1 'Activation correcte' PHASAGE 1 'Activation incorrecte'

ACTIVATE RESTRAINT 1,2 ACTIVATE RESTRAINT 2
ACTIVATE BAR 1,2 ACTIVATE BAR 2,1 ### ERREUR ###
ACTIVATE BAR 3 ACTIVATE BAR 3
END PHASAGE END PHASAGE
9.2 - PHASING SEQUENCE

Phasing can be declared as a sequence of one or more phasings using the following syntax:
SUITE PHASAGE liste
with:
liste phasing list already run
One phasing may contain an unlimited sequence of instructions. In theory this means you can
describe in a single phasing all the phases of a project. However, when a site has several workstations
simultaneously, it is more convenient to describe the tasks for each station in a separate phasing.
EXAMPLE
PHASAGE 1 'construction du fleau 1'

END PHASAGE

END PHASAGE
PHASAGE 3 'clavage des fleaux 1 et 2'
SUITE PHASAGE 1,2

END PHASAGE
1
In the example above an element cannot be activated in both the phasing and in phasing as
this would lead to ambiguity about the status of the item during phasing . 3
2
The definition of a phasing sequence cannot be used other than in the description of phasing,
i.e. between the keywords PHASAGE
and END PHASAGE .
9.3 - DEFINITION OF ENVELOPES IN PHASING

It is possible to define envelopes within phasing in order to take into account extremes of effort, stress
or displacements that occur during running phasing. The definition of an envelope is achieved using
ENV i ('Title enveloppe')
STRESSG c
with:
i number of envelopes to create
The commands EFFORT, DEPLA, STRESS and REAC are used to define a preferred component. The
envelope consists of finding the two extremes of this component and the concomitant values of the
other components.
EXAMPLE
ENV 1 # enveloppe sans concomitance
ENV 2 EFFORT MZ # enveloppe sur les efforts mz

END PHASAGE
A concomitance may be made requested on both the support reactions and the study sections
ENV i ('Title')
.
The definition of a phasing envelope cannot be used other than in the description of phasing,
i.e. between the keywords PHASAGE
and END PHASAGE
.
Consideration of the extremes in phasing may be interrupted for a list of envelopes using the
command:
DEACTIVATE ENV liste
Disabled envelopes can be reactivated using the command:
ACTIVATE ENV liste
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF AN ENVELOPE CONTAINING THE EXTREMES OF ALL PHASES OF PHASING
1 WITH THE EXCEPTION OF PHASES BETWEEN THE DATES 180 AND 200 DAYS
ENV 1

DATE 180
DEACTIVATE ENV 1

DATE 200

ACTIVATE ENV 1

END
The envelopes take account the essential steps in the calculation (STATE, DATE), they do not
take into account intermediate stages: for example, applying two loads in a row in the same
phase, without intermediate STATE, only the effect of the accumulated two loads is taken into
account.
EXAMPLE: PHASING WITH INTERMEDIARY ENVELOPE
PHASAGE 1 phasage sans intermdiaire' PHASAGE 2 'phasage avec intermdiaire'

ENV 1 ENV 2

LOAD LOAD BAR 1 UNI FY 1
BAR 1 UNI FY 1 STATE 5
BAR 1 UNI FY 1 LOAD BAR 1 UNI FY -1
END STATE 10
STATE 10
END
END
Dans cet exemple, dans le phasage 1, leffet de la load est nul sur lenveloppe 1
alors que dans le phasage 2, leffet de la load apparat sur lenveloppe 2.
9.4 - DEFINITION OF A DATE
In the event that you wish to take into account the effect of long-term behaviour of materials (creep,
relaxation) it is necessary to define the dates of the various construction phases.
The definition of a date is achieved using the following syntax:
DATE date
with:
date new current phasing date expressed in days
EXAMPLE: DEFINITION OF PHASING WITH TEMPORAL DEFINITION OF PHASES
ACTIVATE RESTRAINT 1
DATE 12 # nouvelle date courante
ACTIVATE BAR 10,11 AGE 12 MODE ABS
LOAD WEIGHT SELF 10,11
TENDRE CABLE 101,201
ACTIVATE BAR 9,12 AGE 3 MODE ABS
LOAD WEIGHT SELF 9,12
TENDRE CABLE 102,202

END
At the beginning of phasing the current date is days.0
During phasing the chronology should be ongoing. Any new date must be higher than the old
current date.
In the case of a project with multiple simultaneous sites, it may be useful to describe each
position in an independent phasing. These phasings are then recalled into a final phasing,
corresponding to the splicing of the sections already constructed (see command SUITE
PHASAGE p166).
The definition of a current date cannot be used other than in the description of phasing, i.e.
between the commands PHASAGEand END PHASAGE (see p163).
By default, AGE
is 0 (i.e. the initial age of the concrete) on enabling of the bar.
The starting age is therefore independent of the enabling date of the bars.
For long-term effects, or if you wish to study developments only in the light of the laws of
concrete behaviour, you should use a progressive sequence of dates and not directly give a start
and end date with too wide a gap.
Indeed, the behavioural law being non-linear between two dates, for a realistic progression of
the law, we suggest a division like this:
date 300
date 1000
date 3000
date 10000
date 30000
rather than writing:
date 300
date 30000
9.5 - ENABLING OF SUPPORTS AND JACKING
Enabling support during phasing is achieved using the syntax:
ACTIVATE RESTRAINT liste
Jacking the supports is achieved using the syntax:
JACK RESTRAINT liste
with:
liste list of supports
In general the enabling of elements of a structure should be conducted according to the logic imposed
by the actual construction of this structure. More specifically, the supports must be enabled before the
bars they are to support.
If the node supporting the support structure is already enabled, the support is positioned on the
deformed structure using the command ACTIVATE RESTRAINT liste.
To impose a zero displacement at the new support you should complement enabling by the command
JACK RESTRAINT (the movement of active degrees of freedom are reduced to 0).
EXAMPLE
Take a structure whose state of deformation is shown schematically below:
1 2 3
The command ACTIVATE RESTRAINT 3 places a support on node 3 in its deformed state.
1 2 3
The command JACK RESTRAINT 3 should be added to reduce the node 3 displacement to zero.
1 2 3
In phasing, there is no default enabling. At the beginning of phasing, the structure is empty.
The enabling or disabling of an element within a phasing only has an effect during the
execution of these phases. The enabling status of the current structure that is taken into account
by the command EXEC LOAD (see p117) is not changed.
9.6 - BAR ENABLING
Enabling bars during phasing is achieved using the syntax:
ACTIVATE BAR liste (AGE age) (MODE<REL,ABS>)
with:
liste list of bars to be activated
age age of the material of the bar (this command is used only in the case of older
material)
By default, AGE
as the value 0 (initial age of concrete) at the activation of the bar.
If the user studies a phasage without time evolution, if AGE is not defined (or if age is set to 0)
the Young Modulus E of material of the bar will be the instantaned modulus.
In a phasage with time evolution, if the bar is affected with a material for wich the modulus E is
not given directly by the user, but calculated by ST1, the usermust defined an age strictly
positive in the general case. The modulus E calculated will be the modulus of the given age.
If the user wants a reduce participation of concrete for a bar, the user must define a very small
value of age for this bar, but the value must be strictly positive. Obviously this bars must not be
loaded immedialtly, otherwise there will be a risk of numerical instability because the bar will
not have no rigidity, and won't be inversible.
The only case where age 0 is usefull in case of phasage with a time evolution is when the
concerned bars are affected with pretension cables: indeed the hardening of concrete of bar
and its interraction with presstress before the release of the prestress bench are taken in
account by ST1.Thus the modulus E will vary form 0 to the value of modulus got the time
where the bench is released.
The enabling of a bar can be achieved using several methods depending on the state of deformation
nodes at the ends of the bar.
The type of enabling is determined by the keywords MODE REL (default mode) and MODE ABS :
relative mode (MODE REL) corresponds to an enabling according to the extension of the
structural part already activated. This mode is usually used for the activation of precast
segments of a brige built using corbels.
Absolute mode (MODE ABS) is an enabling that catches up on the un-deformed geometry. This
mode is generally used when activating cast in place segments of a bridge built using corbels
because it provides direct construction cambers
The command JACK RESTRAINT can be useful in complement of this command, depending of the
real evolution of the contruction.
EXAMPLE
Take the structure in the state of deformation as follows:

1 2 3
The command ACTIVATE BAR 3 MODE REL activates the bar 3 in the following configuration:
1 2 3
The command ACTIVATE BAR 3 MODE ABS has the effect of activating the bar 3 in the following
configuration:
1 2 3
EXAMPLE
In case that the two ends of the bar are already distorted, relative and absolute modes are equivalent.
Take the structure in the following state of deformation:
1 2 3 4 5
The commands ACTIVATE BAR 3 MODE REL ou ACTIVATE BAR 3 MODE ABS have the effect of
activating the bar 3 in the following configuration:
1 2 3 4 5
In phasing, there is no default enabling. At the beginning of the phasing structure is empty.
The enabling of a bar does not automatically generate its dead weight. This must be generated
by a load command (see command LOAD
p100).
EXAMPLE: ENABLING OF BAR 2 TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE DEAD WEIGHT
PHASAGE 1

ACTIVATE BAR 2
LOAD WEIGHT SELF 2

END PHASAGE
The enabling or disabling of an element within a phasing only has an effect when this phasing
is run. The current enabling status of the structure which is taken into account using the
command EXEC LOAD (cf. p117) is not changed.
9.7 - DISABLING BARS AND SUPPORTS
Supports are disabled using the syntax:
DEACTIVATE RESTRAINT liste
with:
liste list of supports to be disabled
Bar disabling is achieved using the syntax:
DEACTIVATE BAR liste
with:
liste list of bars to be disabled
Disabling an element (bar or support) is equivalent to deleting it on the real structure.
EXAMPLE
Take a structure whose state of deformation is shown schematically below:
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
The command DEACTIVATE RESTRAINT 2 has the effect of removing the support 2. The current
structure becomes:
1122 334 45
The command DEACTIVATE BAR 3,4 has the effect of removing the bars 3 and 4. The current
structure becomes:
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
The enabling or disabling of an element within a phasing is effective only when these phases
are run. The current enabling status of the structure that is taken into account by the command
EXEC LOAD (cf. p117) is not changed.
9.8 - DEFINITION OF STRESSES ON THE STRUCTURE
The definition of stress within a phasing is achieved using the syntax:
LOAD
dfinition des sollicitations
END
or
LOAD (dfinition d'une sollicitation)
Instructions for defining the stress of the structure during phasing are identical to the loading
instructions. Refer to Chapter LOADING for the full list of these instructions.
EXAMPLE
PHASAGE 1

LOAD WEIGHT SELF 2

LOAD
BAR 5 CON XL 0.2 REL FX 12.
NODE 3 FY 0.2

END

END PHASAGE
9.9 - TENSIONING CABLES
Tensioning a list of cables within a phasing is achieved using the syntax:
TENDRE CABLE liste ((NOT) INJECTE)
with:
Liste list of cables to be tensioned
By default the cables are tensioned injected and in post-tension.
Once a cable is stretched, the deformation of a section in a bar containing the cable induces a tension
change of the cable. This change takes place locally if the cable is injected, and over a length
depending on the coefficient of friction of the cable in its sheath if the cable is not injected.
EXAMPLE
PHASAGE 1

LOAD WEIGHT SELF 2

TENDRE CABLE 1

END PHASAGE
The details on consideration of pre-stress are given in Chapters

LA PRECONTRAINTE p291 and
EFFETS INSTANTANES DE
EFFETS DIFFERES CAS D'UN PHASAGE p296.
In the case of post-tension, the act of tensioning a cable on a bar immediately gives the
situation after the cable on the bar is released ((the bar contracts under the action of the cable,
but the cable retains its tension (tensioning value controlled by the action of the jack)).
However, instant losses (anchoring withdrawal and friction) are applied immediately.
9.10 - RELAXATION OF CABLES
The relaxation a list of cables within a phasing is achieved using the command:
DETENDRE CABLE liste
with:
liste list of cables to be relaxed
To be relaxed, a cable should already be under tension (see command TENDRE CABLE p177).
LA PRECONTRAINTE
p291 and
EFFETS INSTANTANES DE
The details of consideration of pre-stress is given in the Chapters
EFFETS DIFFERES CAS D'UN PHASAGE p296.
9.11 - TENSIONING PRE-STRESS CABLES ON THE BENCH

Placing a list of pre-stress cables on the bench during phasing is achieved using the syntax:
TENSION_BENCH CABLE liste
with:
Liste list of cables to be tensioned
Placing on the bench creates tension in the cable, but no stress is applied to the list of bars to
which the cable is allocated. Instant losses due to the bench anchoring device (losses due to the
comb for example) should be calculated by the user and integrated either into the bench
stresses, or into instant losses in the pre-stressing system.
9.12 - PRE-STRESSING BARS BY RELAXING THE BENCH
The tensioning of cross members by pre-stressing from a list of cables in a phasing is achieved using
the command:
RELEASE_BENCH CABLE liste
with:
liste list of cables to be released from the bench in order to pre-stress cross members
To be released, a cable should already be tensioned on the bench (see command

TENSION_BENCH
)..
When you release the bench, the pre-stressing cables shall apply pre-tensioning on the bars
concerned. These bars deform, which induces a drop in pre-stressing tension. Ideally, users
should use the net section of the bars to get a result closer to the theoretical result for final
deformation (the gap is usually relatively small, however, with the usual calculation in gross
section).
EXAMPLE
PHASAGE 1

DATE 1
TENSION_BENCH CABLE 1,2,3
DATE 10
RELEASE_BENCH CABLE 1,2,3

END PHASAGE
It is imperative to enable the bar where the pre-stressing cable applies, before tensioning the
cable on the bench
EXAMPLE
PHASAGE 2

DATE 0
ACTIVATE BAR 2 AGE -2
TENSION_BENCH CABLE 1
DATE 5
RELEASE_BENCH CABLE 1

END PHASAGE
If we impose a negative age applies to the bar where the pre-stressing cable will apply, the
cross member has near zero mechanical properties before reaching the age 0 and non-zero
near the age of 0 (which means that the cross member concrete is cast upon reaching the age of
0). The relaxation of the cables is taken into account before pouring the concrete and does not
affect the cross member in question as it has not reached the age of 0 for pouring concrete. So
finally the tension applied to the beam is the initial tension minus the effect of relaxation before
pouring concrete. In the previous example, for 2 days, the cable expands by relaxation and the
cross member is not stressed, and on date 5, the concrete reaches the age of 3 days, so the
beam undergoes withdrawal creep corresponding to 3 days while the effort put into pre-
stressing the beam to bench release will be reduced by the effect of 5 days of relaxation.
In the case of heat treatment, it is assumed that curing begins at age 0 of the concrete. The
resistance value of the end of curing fcp will be obtained at the specified curing end date in the
materials laws, tensioning should only be done after that date. Moreover, heat loss on the pre-
stressing cable are considered in bench relaxation..
9.13 - STATE OF THE STRUCTURE
The state of stresses and deformations within a phasing can be saved by:
STATE i ('Title state')
with:
i number of the state
Saving the state of stress and deformation during a phasing enables the use of the results saved for
editing, a combination or an envelope.
EXAMPLE

DATE 125
ACTIVATE BAR 2 AGE 3 MODE ABS
LOAD WEIGHT SELF 2
STATE 1 'Etat 1'
DATE 130
ACTIVATE BAR 3 AGE 3 MODE ABS
LOAD WEIGHT SELF 3
STATE 2 'Etat 2'

END PHASAGE
### EXECUTION DU PHASAGE ###
EXEC PHASAGE 1
### CREATION D'UNE ENVELOPPE CONTENANT LES ETATS 1 AND 2 ###
ENV 1 'enveloppe des tats aux dates 125 et 130 jours'
STATE 1,2
END
### EDITION DES RESULTATS ###
RESU
NODE BAR RESTRAINT STATE 1,2
ENV 1
END
In general the results in a status are in harmony with loading results.

9.14 - MODIFICATION OF SUPPORTS
The modification of a list of supports within a phasing is achieved using the syntax:
MODIFIER RESTRAINT liste (nouvelle dfinition)
with:
liste list of supports to modify
The new definition is made according to the syntax used for the definition of supports (see command
RESTRAINT p45). The new support definition applies to the deformed structure. To return to an initial
deformation of zero, you must complete the instruction using the command JACK RESTRAINT.
EXAMPLE
Take the structure where the state of deformation is shown schematically below:
1 2 3
The command MODIFIER RESTRAINT 3 NODE 2 displaces support 3 on node 2 whilst preserving
the deformation on node 2 :
1 2 3
The command JACK RESTRAINT 3 has the effect of reducing the displacement of the support to 0:
1 2 3
The command MODIFIER RESTRAINT 1 DX DY has the effect of removing embedding of support1:
1 2 3
9.15 - RUNNING PHASINGS
The previously defined phasings are run using the following command:
EXEC PHASAGE (liste)
with:
liste list of numbers of previously defined phasings
By default, all defined phasings (see. command PHASAGE p163) will be run.
A phasing defined as the result of another phasing (see command

must be run before the originator.
SUITE PHASAGE p166)
The command EXEC PHASAGE triggers call-up of the runnable module containing the
procedures for solving the problem, and stores the results in a database.
In the instruction above, the list may be replaced by the word ALL
all defined phasings (this is then equivalent to do not place list).
Chapitre ST1 - Lists of commands (Dynamic) 183
10 DYNAMIC
10.1 - INTRODUCTION TO CALCULTATION OF EIGEN MODES

The definition of eigen mass is define 2.11 - eigen mass (dynamic).
The calculation of eigen modes are avalaible only from the masses attached to the nodes of the
structure, therefore the user must discretize the structure with a sufficient amount of nodes in
order to be representative of the modes of vibrations needed. The command STUDY(cf. Study
Area) has no effect on the calculation of eigen modes, but only on the output for the post-processing.
The eigen masses can be appplied directly to the nodes, in this case, the masses must be directly
calculated by the user. The eigen masses can also be calculated automatically to each ends of bars,
either with a diagonal matrix (option by default), or with a consistent matrix (presence of terms ouside
of the diagonal, see formulation in Annexe). NB: the excentricity of bars is taken in account for the
excentricty of eigen masses. The excentricty in torsion is not taken in account.
For instance, an isostatic deck must not be modelised in 2D by only one bar, but must be cut in a
sucession of bars (ten bars for instance) to get a repartition of mass uniform and not only 2 masses at
the both ends of the deck, because it would not be a good representation of the behavior of the flexion
of the span. The same rule has to be applied for a pier or an abutment, the element of support and its
fondations must be enough discretrized to take in account correctly the distribution of mass of this
support.
The masses must have been declared with mass unity, and thus a factor "g_dyn" is to introduce in the
definition of materials for the convertion of the weight of the bars in unit of mass for the automatic
calculation of eigen masses.
The eigen modes are normalised with the matrix of mass, therefore the generalised mass of an eigen
mode is set to 1.
ST1 - Lists of commands (Dynamic) 184
10.2 - FULFILLING EIGEN MODES

The calculation of eigen modes is fulfilled by the following command :
EXEC MODE (nb) ( METHOD <1,2> )
or
EXEC MODE ( METHOD <1,2> ) (<FREQUENCY fq, RATIO rt >)(ADVANCE nm)
with :
nb Number of eigen modes to calculate (by default a maximum of 100 modes is to be
calculated).
fq Cut Eigen Frequence (maximum frequence to reach for the last mode to calculate)
rt Ratio of modal participation to reach in percentage
j Number of spectrum for spectral analysis
nm Number of eigen modes for increment to reach the target for the modal ratio or the cut
frequency (by default a step of 10 modes is used).
The command EXEC MODE

allow to stock the results in database.
The method 1 is the method by inverse iteration. This method calculate each eigen mode
successivly. This method is automatically chosen if the user asks for a cut eigen frequence or
for a ratio of modal participation.
The method 2 is the method by iteration of sub space of the eigen vectors. This method is the
fastest method, because the all nb eigen modes are calculated together. This method is chosen
by default.
If the user asks for a cut eigen frequency or for a minimum ratio of modal participation,
combined with the 2nd method, "nm" eigen modes are calculated together each time, and only
mode with the first method .
EXAMPLE 1: CALCULATION OF THE 5 FIRST MODES
MASS EIGEN
BAR all
FIN
...
EXEC MODE 5
EXAMPLE 2: CALCULATION OF MODES IN ORDER TO REACH 70% OF THE TOTAL EIGEN MASS
EXEC MODE RATIO 70
EXAMPLE 3: CALCULATION OF MODES IN ORDER TO REACH THE FREQUENCY OF 10HZ
EXEC MODE FREQUENCY 10
The number of iteration for the method 2 is fixed in the parameter file st1.par (10 by default)
In general it is not necessary to study 100 modes, the firts 10 to 30 modes are often sufficients
to reach 70-80% of the total modal mass. The others eigen modes are very often for local eigen
modes (>20Hz).
To improve the accuracy of the results (if a possible warning appear in the file of error), the
number of iteration can be modified in the file st1.par (100 for instance); obvioulsy it will have
an impact on the time of calculation. Then the number of eigen modes to calculate can be
modified or the number of modes "nm" in the case of calculation with modal ratio.
Some problems of numerical convergences can appear on higher modes : in gnral, it comes
from some small structural elements modelised by the user are too stiff in comparison to the
global structural. For instance, you have to use stiff elements with appropriate caracteristics
(K=E*I/L3), you must modify only one parameter (E, I or L) and not all parameters together,
otherwise you will probably get a too high stiffness not allowed for numerical calculations.
Other example, you should not define shear sections (SY, SZ) if you do not want any shear
deformation rather than define shear sections with high values.
EXAMPLE OF OUTPUT FOR EIGEN MODES

--- RESULTATS DU MODE PROPRE : 1 ---
Periode 1.0003 sec Frequence : 0.99972 Hz

Facteur Participation Mod 54.276 Masse Modale : 2945.9
Masse Modale Generalisee 1.0000
Taux Participation Modale 84.168 % Cumul : 84.168 %
---> Direction 1
---> Direction 2

---> Direction 1
---> Direction 2
The "modal participation factor" is defined as:

. M .R
t
j
j
and {R} is the unity vector
j . M . j
t
The generalised mass is normalised to 1:

M j j . M . j =1
t
The eigen modal mass is defined by:

M j 2j
The total eigen mass is:
M tot R . M .R M j
t
j
The rate of modal participation is :
Mj
j
M tot
The cumulation of rate of participation is:
n
Tn j
j 1
10.3 - DYNAMIC DAMPING

The damping is usefull for spectral analysis and time history. Three kinds of viscous damping can be
defined : the damping of Rayleigh (the matrix of damping is defined proportionally to the matrix of
mass and to the matrix of the stiffness), the modal damping (a coefficient of viscous damping is
defined for each mode), the coefficient of damping used for the calculation of the average modal
damping (fonction of the deformation's energy under the effect of each mode - EN 1998-2 4.1.3).
The damping is defined by the following command :
DAMPING i
<
AUTO MASS alpha STIFFNESS beta,
MODE j KSI ksij

...,
ENERGY KSI ksij

>
(POND pond)
END
with :
i Number of the dynamic damping
alpha, beta Ponderation for the definition of the damping matrix according to the
rayleigh method (alpha is for the mass matrix M and beta for the stiffness
matrix K)
j Number of the eigen mode
ksij Fraction of damping for the eigen mode j (By default, ksij=0)
pond Ponderation applied on coefficients ksij or alpha, beta
The DAMPING
p73).
is linked to the bars with the commands CONS and MAT (voir p71,p72 et
The command
HISTORY
.
DAMPING
must be located before the command EXEC SPECTRE or EXEC
In the case of rayleigh damping, the damping matrix is given as:

[C]=pond*(alpha*[M]+beta* [K])
Fraction of damping for the eigen mode n with the frequency wn=2/Tn :
ksin= pond*(alpha/(2*wn)+beta*wn/2)
For the calculatation of a damping with energy of deformation, the coefficient of an average
modal damping for the mode j is written as :
.E k
k
dj
eff , j k
, k is for the substructures where the elements have a damping k
E k
k
dj
Ed k,j the energie of deformation get in the mode j for the substructure "k"
Ed j the energie of deformation get in the mode j for the all structure
For the spectral analysis and for the time history analysis, if the damping calculated with
energetic method is not chosen, only one damping must be defined for all bars of model.
EXAMPLE : RAYLEIGH DAMPING

DAMPING 1
AUTOMATIC MASS 0.1 STIFFNESS 0.01
END
EXAMPLE : MODAL DAMPING

DAMPING 2
MODE ALL KSI 5
MODE 2 to 5 KSI 2
POND 0.01
END
EXAMPLE : DAMPING FOR ENERGY CALCULATION
DAMPING 3
ENERGY KSI 2
POND 0.01
END
10.4 - ACCELERATION SPECTRUM

The acceleration spectra are defined by the following command :
SPECTRUM i
(POND pond)
(BETA beta)
<ACCELERATION
PERIOD tj AX axj AY ayj (AZ azj)
...
,
EUROCODE
<HORIZONTAL(<X,Y>), VERTICAL> AX ax (S s) (ST st) (ALPHA alpha)
(ETA eta) PERIOD tb tc td te
...
,
EUROCODE REDUCE
<HORIZONTAL(<X,Y>), VERTICAL> AX ax (S s) (ST st) (ALPHA alpha)
(GAMMA gamma) (Q q) (BETA beta0) PERIOD tb tc td te
...
>
END
with :
i Number of the spectrum
beta Angle (rad) in the horizontal plan of the local axe Ox with the direction Ox
of the global axes (only in spatial option) By default beta = 0
tj Time period in sec
axj, ayj, azj Accelerations associated with the time period tj in the directions of the local
axes (By default ax=ay=az = 0)
ax Acceleration Ag in the given direction (by default, ax=0)
s Parameter of soil S, (by default, s = 1 )
st Coefficient of topological amplification (by default, st=1)
alpha Coefficient (by default alpha =2.5 in horizontal and 3 in vertical for the
Eurocode spectrum Se; alpha =2.5 for the reduce Eurocode spectrum SD )
EN1998-1
eta Coefficient of correction for damping (by default eta=1.00)
tb,tc,td, te Periods from eurocode spectrum EN1998-2 (sec) (0<tb<tc<td<te)
pond Ponderation to apply to accelerations ax, ay et az
beta0 Coefficient of the low limit for the reduce Eurocode spectrum SD. By
default beta0 = 0,2
gamma Coefficient. By default gamma = 2/3
q Coefficient of behaviour. By default q = 1,0
The spectrum interpolates the values of acceleration between the time period defined by the
user and is set to the limit value for all other time periodes.
EXAMPLE :
SPECTRUM 1
BETA 0.1
POND 9.81
ACCELERATION
PERIOD 0 AX 0.1 AY 0.1 AZ 0.01
PERIOD 0.5 AX 0.5 AY 0.5 AZ 0.2
END
EXAMPLE : EUROCODE SPECTRUM SE
SPECTRUM 1
BETA 0.0
POND 9.81
EUROCODE
HORIZONTAL X AX 0.5 S 1 ST 1.2 PERIOD 0.03 0.2 2.5 4
HORIZONTAL Y AX 0.5 S 1 ST 1.2 PERIOD 0.03 0.2 2.5 4
VERTICAL AX 0.25 ST 1.1 PERIOD 0.03 0.2 2.5 4
END
For the Eurocode spectrum (EN 1998-13.2.2.2 et EN 1998-13.2.2.3), the accelerations "Se" on the
ground are function of the period T, and they are given by the following equations :
Horizontal Spectrum:
T
0 T TB : Se T ax .S .St . 1 . 1
TB
TB T Tc : Se T ax .S .St . .
Tc
Tc T TD : Se T ax .S .St . ..
T
Tc .TD
TD T TE : Se T ax .S .St . ..
T2
Vertical spectrum:
T
0 T TB : Se T ax .St . 1 . 1
TB
TB T Tc : Se T ax .St . .
Tc
Tc T TD : Se T ax .St . ..
T
Tc .TD
TD T TE : Se T ax .St . ..
T2
The spectrum Se is modified in fonction of the damping for each mode:
max 0.55; 10 / 5

Therefore the spectrum Se is assumed to be defined with 5% of damping.
NB: the ponderation (pond) is also applied on Se
EXAMPLE : SPECTRUM EUROCODE REDUCE SD

SPECTRUM 2
BETA 0.0
POND 9.81
EUROCODE REDUCE
HORIZONTAL X AX 0.5 S 1 ST 1.2 Q 1.0 BETA 0.2 PERIOD 0.03 0.2 2.5 4
HORIZONTAL Y AX 0.5 S 1 ST 1.2 Q 1.0 BETA 0.2 PERIOD 0.03 0.2 2.5 4
VERTICAL AX 0.25 ST 1.1 Q 1.0 BETA 0.2 PERIOD 0.03 0.2 2.5 4
END
For the reduce Eurocode spectrum Sd (EN 1998-13.2.2.5), the accelerations "Sd" on the ground in
fonction of the period T are given by the following equations:
horizontal spectrum :
T
0 T TB : Sd T ax .S .ST .
TB q

TB T Tc : Sd T ax .S .ST .
q
T
Tc T TD : Sd T max ax .S .ST . . c ; .ax
q T
T .T
TD T TE : Sd T max ax .S .ST . . c 2D ; .ax
q T
vertical spectrum :
T
0 T TB : Sd T ax .ST .
TB q

TB T Tc : Sd T ax .ST .
q
T
Tc T TD : Sd T max ax .ST . . c ; .ax
q T
T .T
TD T TE : Sd T max ax .ST . . c 2D ; .ax
q T
NB: The ponderation (pond) is also applied on Sd..
If the value Sd between Tb and Tc need to be extended for the period 0, you must set Tb=0
10.5 - RESPONSE OF SPECTRUM

The spectra of ground acceleration can be combined for each eigen mode either linearly, either by a
quadratic combination so called SRSS, or by the combination so called CQC, or finally linearly (LIN).
The y are defined by the following command :
SPECTRUM ic RESPONSE
SPECTRUM isp
<LIN, SRSS, CQC>
(POND X pondx Y pondy (Z pondz))
END
with :
Ic Number of combined spectrum
Isp Number of non combined spectrum
pondx, pondy, Ponderations on the local componants x and y of spectrum in plane option
pondz andt x, y and z in spatial option (By default , ponderations are set to 0)
The command CQC need to have define a damping for each bar.
EXAMPLE : SPECTRAL RESPONSE WITH THE CQC METHOD IN EACH DIRECTION

SPECTRUM 10 RESPONSE SPECTRUM 20 RESPONSE SPECTRUM 30 RESPONSE
SPECTRUM 1 SPECTRUM 1 SPECTRUM 1
CQC CQC CQC
POND X 1 POND Y 1 POND Z 1
END END END
ENV 1 COMB
SPECTRE 10 +1 1
SPECTRE 20 +1 1
SPECTRE 30 +1 1
END
In this example, the 3 directions are combined linearly, but each direction has a quadratic combination
with modes:
E Ex E y Ez
EXAMPLE : SPECTRAL RESPONSE SRSS WITH THE 3 DIRECTIONS

SPECTRUM 100 RESPONSE
SPECTRUM 1
SRSS
POND X 1 Y 1 Z 1
END
In this example, the 3 directions are combined quadratiqualy with SRSS method:
E Ex2 E y2 Ez2
The effects E and Ei are defined as loads, and not as envelopes.(see example p272)
ST1 - List of commands 192
10.6 - FULFILLING A SPECTRUM RESPONSE

The calculation of spectrum is fulfilled by the following command :
EXEC SPECTRUM RESPONSE (list)
with :
List List of numbers of spectrum for spectral analysis
The command
command
EXEC RESPONSE SPECTRUM allow to stock the results in database. The
EXEC MODE must have been used before and the definition of a spectrum response
must be already done and eventually a damping.
EXAMPLE 1: CALCULATION OF THE SPECTRUM RESPONSES 10 AND 20
EXEC SPECTRUM RESPONSE 10,20
The spectral response is a dynamic load, not an envelope. To get an envelope of the spectral
response, you must create an envelope with ponderations +/-1.
10.7 - ACCELEROGRAM (ONLY ST1 V2)

A time history analysis is possible only if a ground motion history is given.
The ground motions (the acceleration time history) are defined by the following comand:
ACCELEROGRAM j
STRESSG ic
(TIME_STEP time_step)
(POND pond)
(BETA beta)
(ACCELERATION
AX axj AY ayj (AZ azj)
...
)
END
avec :
j Number of the ground motion
Time_step Time step of the acclrogram in secund
pond Ponderation to apply to the accelerations ax, ay, az (By default, pond=1).
beta Angle (rad) in the horizontal plan of the local axe Ox with the direction Ox
of the global axes (only in spatial option) By default beta = 0
alpha Coefficient only for the method 3 so called HHT-alpha. Its value is included
between 0 and -0.3.(By default alpha= 0).
axj, ayj, azj Accelerations in the directions of the axes Ox, Oy, Oz
EXAMPLE : ACCELEROGRAM
ACCELEROGRAM
TIME_STEP 0.01
POND 9.81
ACCELERATION
AX 0.1 AY 0.1 AZ 0.01
AX 0.5 AY 0.5 AZ 0.2
AX 0.1 AY 0.1 AZ 0.01
END
Three methods of time history analysis are available by time integration of the equations of
motion:
The method 1 is the method of integration by Newmark with average acceleration (this method
is used by default, and generaly recommanded)
The method 2 is the method of integration by Newmark with linear acceleration
The method 3 is the method of integration so called HHT Alpha described by P Paultre to take
in account a numerical damping. A coefficient alpha is needed with a value given beetween 0
and -0.3. For the value 0, this method is the method of Newmark with average acceleration.
The time step must have a value short enough for the time history analysis in order to get
acceptable results (In general, a time step must have a duration lower to the third of the
shortest eigen period to take in account for the studied model).
A concomitance can be defined for a time histrory. It will be used in the enveloppe calculation
10.8 - EXECUTION FOR A LINEAR ELASTIC ANALYSIS OF A TIME HISTORY (ONLY

ST1 V2)
A time history analysis is available for the study of displacement of nodes, only if some dynamic
masses have been defined to nodes and a time history of the ground motion (acceleration) is given. It
can be also described a damping by bars. There is no analysis for the study sections. Nethertheless
the study of effort and displacement is needed for all bars at the beginning and the end of each
bar for the graphic view.
A time hitory analysis is fulfilled by the following comand :

EXEC HISTORY (lstj)
with :
lstj List of the accelerogram's numbers to take in account for the time history analysis (by
default all the accelerograms already defined before the comand are calculated)
The comand EXEC HISTORY allow to stock the results in database.
EXAMPLE : TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS

...
EXEC HISTORY 10
10.9 HISTORY WITH ROLLING LOAD (ONLY ST1 V2)

A time history analysis is possible if the parameter for a dynamic anaysis with truck is given.
The ground motions (the acceleration time history) are defined by the following comand:
DYNAMIC CONV j
STRESSG ic
CONV numc
TIME_STEP time_step
TIME time
SPEED speed
(POND pond)
END
avec :
j Number of the rolling load analysis
numc Number of the rolling load
alpha Coefficient only for the method 3 so called HHT-alpha . its value is inluded
between 0 and -0.3.(By default alpha= 0).
Time_step Time step for the dynamic analysis in secund
Time Time of studty for the dynamic analysis n secund
speed Vitesse of displacement of the rolling load in the unit of length in the
project / secund
pond Ponderation to apply to the accelerations ax, ay, az (By default, pond=1).
EXAMPLE :
DYNAMIC CONV 10
CONV 5
TIME_STEP 0.05
SPEED 1
TIME 30
END
motion:
The rolling load must have been defined previously, but with the following restrictions: only the
following parameters are taken in account: 1 only truck aligned on the bars of the deck (the
transversal zones of the deck and transversal positions of the wheels are not taken in account.
The length of the longitudinal impacts and the coefficients of direction in the rolling load
"conv" are taken in account).
10.10 - EXECUTION FOR A LINEAR ELASTIC ANALYSIS OF A ROLLING LOAD

(ONLY ST1 V2)
A time history analysis is available for the study of displacement of nodes, only if some dynamic
masses have been defined to nodes and the parameters for a time history of a rolling load is given. It
can be also described a damping by bars. There is no analysis for the study sections. Nethertheless
the study of effort and displacement is needed for all bars at the biginning and the end of each
bar for the graphic view
A time hitory analysis is fulfilled by the following comand :

EXEC HISTORY CONV(lstj)
with :
lstj List of the rolling load's numbers to take in account for the time history analysis (by
default all the rolling loads already defined before the comand are calculated)
The comand EXEC HISTORY allow to stock the results in database.
EXAMPLE : HISTORY FOR THE ROLLING LOAD

...
...
DECK
bar 101 a 119
END
CONV 12 'convoi 12'

DIR GLO FX 1 FZ 1
essieu
1 xl 0.00 yl 0 weight 100.00 impact 0.2 0.1
2 xl 10.00 yl 0 weight 100.00 impact 2.0 0.1
END
DYNAMIC CONV 100

conv 12
method 1
time_step 0.05
speed 5
time 400
pond 1
END
EXEC HISTORY CONV 100

10.11 HISTORY UNDER IMPOSED LOAD (ST1 V2 ONLY)

A time history linear elastic with imposed load is possible if the command described in this part is
defined. It is use for instance for the dynamic study of footbridges: the structure must undergo a load
of uniform weight defined by the user. The weight is multiplied by the sign of the shape of the eigen
mode chosen in the imposed direction (direction of the action). The load is also multiplied by an
harmonic excitation varying with time: sin(w0*t).
If no frequency f0 is specified by the user, the pulsation w0 on time is the pulsation of the chosen
eigen mode.
If a frequency f0 is specified, the pulsation on time is w0=2.f0
The parameters of time history under imposed load are defined by the following command :
DYNAMIC LOAD j
CONTR <VY,VZ,WY,WZ,VYVZ,VYWZ,WYVZ,WYWZ>,
CONTRG ic
(METHOD < (1), 2, 3 (ALPHA alpha)>)
TIME_STEP time_step
TIME time
MODE nm
(FREQUENCY f0)
BAR lstb (FX fx)(FY fy)(FZ fz)(MX mx)(MY my)(MZ mz) (GLO,LOC)

END
avec :
j Number of imposed load
alpha Coefficient for the method 3 called HHT-alpha. The value is included
between 0 and 0.3.(by default the value is set to 0).
Time_step Time step of dynamic analysis in seconds
time Time of analysis in seconds
f0 Frequency of imposed pulsation (Hz), optional
nm Number of the imposed eigen mode
lstb List of bars where are applied the actions
fx, fy, fz, Linear density of weight (force or couple) by direction applied on a list of
mx, my, mz bar lstb in the global coordinate by default
The density of weight is defined in weight units = mass * g /ml. The weight is applied on nodes
of the bars in the dynamic calculation.
motion:
EXAMPLE STRUCTURE 2 SPANS : IMPOSED LOADED FOR THE EIGEN MODE 1
DYNAMIC LOAD 100

TIME_STEP 0.05
TIME 500
MODE 1
BAR 1 to 5 FY +10
BAR 6 to 10 FY +10
END
FY = -10 Mode 1
6 a 10
1a5
FY = +10
On the previous example, the load is multiplied by the sign of the shape of the eigen mode 1.
10.12 - EXECUTION OF TIME HISTORY FOR AN IMPOSED LOAD (ST1 V2 ONLY)

A linear elastic time history is possible for the study of displacement of nodes, only if dynamic masses
have been already defined, if a calculation of eigen mode has been done with a sufficient number of
eigen modes (that means with the number of the eigen mode used for the imposed load) and the
dynamic parameters for a time history with imposed load. A damping of the structure must be
defined, otherwise without numerical damping the structures geopardise to be in resonance. There is
no time history of study sections. Nethertheless the study of effort and displacement is needed for
all bars at the biginning and the end of each bar for the graphic view.
The time history is fulfilled by the following comand:

EXEC HISTORY LOAD(lstj)
with :
lstj List of numbers of imposed loads to take in account for the time history analysis (by
default all time histories of imposed loads already defined before the command are
calculated)
The comand EXEC HISTORIQUE CHARGE allow to stock the results in database.
EXAMPLE : TIME HISTORY FOR AN IMPOSED LOAD

...
EXEC HISTORY LOAD 100

Chapitre ST1 - Lists of commands (Critical Loads) 200
11
11.1 CRITICAL LOADS FOR
CRITICAL MODE FOR LINEAR
ELASTIC BUCKLING
LINEAR ELASTIC BUCKLING
The results (value and shape mode) of critical loads for linear elastic buckling (Euler buckling) come
from the geometrical stiffness of the structure : the resolution of this bucking loads is based on the
same method as the resolution used to get the eigen modes by substituting the matrix of masses by the
geometrical stiffness matrix, thus the solutions of this problem is given in addition to the calculation of
eigen masses in dynamic (see dynamic bibliography in annex: Paultre).
The critical modes come from the iterative resolution of critical eigen modes :
[K - KG(Nfix)] = c *[KG(Nvar)]
No more specific data is needed , only the data already used to described the classical stiffness matrix.
The comand STUDY(cf. Study Area) has no effect on the calculation of crical loads. As for the
dynamic part, the discretisation of the structure has a big influence on the accuracy of the results.
11.2 FULFILLING OF CRITICAL LOADS FOR LINEAR ELASTIC BUCKLING

The calculation of linear elastic buckling loads is given by the following comand :
EXEC BUCKLING (nb) (METHOD<1,2>)>)>) (CTE <LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE i>) (VAR

<LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE j>)
avec :
nb Number of critical loads for a linear elastic buckling to calculate (by default 2
modes are calculated)
The comand EXEC BUCKLINGallow to calculate and stock the results in database.
The method 1 is the method by inverse iteration. The method 2 is the method by iteration of sub
space of the critical vectors. This method is chosen by default.
The load, combination, state or phase "i" choosen by the user defines the sollicitations of the
structures and to take in account its normal effort participation in the bars (so called the static
component) (For instance the dead loads).
The load, combination, state or phase "j" choosen by the user defines the sollicitations of the
structures and to take in account its normal effort participation in the bars (so called the
variable component) (For instance a moving load modelised bay a static load).
ST1 - Lists of commands (Critical Loads) 201
The static or variable loads must have been calculated beffore the calculation of the bukling
modes.
Instead of studying [K] x = Nc* [KG(N=1)]x, ST1 study [K - KG(Ni)]x = c *[KG(Nj)]x
If the user doesn't want to preload the structure, it can be applied a load number 0 for the static
component. If a load 0 is used for the variable component, ST1 takes the decision to have a
uniform normal effort in the bars.
It is possible to take in account the effect of traction stiffening under the applied loads(Ni,Nj)
(be carefull because it can give an execessive stiffness to the structure in the tension members
and thus can induce numerical difficulties to get the critical loads). You need to modifie the
corresponding value in the parameter file st1.par. By default the traction effect is not used.
EXAMPLE: CALCULATION OF THE FIRST CRITICAL MODE OF BUCKLING
EXEC BUCKLING 1 VAR LOAD 1
In this example, the variable component to amplify to get the critical load is based on the load 1.
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Envelopes and combinations) 202
12. ENVELOPES AND

COMBINATIONS
12.1 - COMBINATION OF THE RESULTS OF UNIT LOADS OR COMBINATIONS

The combinations of loads are defined using the following syntax:
COMB i ('Title combination')

LOAD liste1 (coef1)

COMB liste2 (coef2)




END
with:
i number of the combination to create
liste1 list of loads where the results are in a database
liste5
coef1 Multiplier coefficients (by default coef=1.)
coef5
The use of the

in a database.
COMB
command creates a combination that is immediately calculated and stored
You cannot directly combine envelopes or live_loads. You must use the ENV COMB
command.
ST1 - List of commands (Envelopes and combinations) 203
12.2 - ENVELOPE OF RESULTS OF UNIT LOADS, LIVE_LOADS, COMBINATIONS OR

ENVELOPES
The load envelopes are defined using the following syntax:

ENV i ('Title enveloppe')
STRESSG ic

LOAD liste1 (coef1)

LIVE_LOAD liste2 (coef2)

COMB liste3 (coef3)




HISTORY liste7 (coef7)

ENV liste8 (coef8)

END
with:
i number of envelope to create
ic number of the generalized stress
liste1 list of loads, etc., envelopes with results in the database
coef1 Multiplier coefficients (by default coef=1.)
The commands EFFORT DEPLA STRESS

, , and REAC
are used to define a preferred component.
The envelope consists of finding the two extremes of this component and the concomitant values
of the other components. An envelope contains two times more results than a load case.
The envelope of an history is the envelope of the effects got for all the time steps of an
acceleorogram.

A concomitance may be made requested on both the support reactions and the study sections.
12.3 - CONCOMITANCES MANAGEMENT
12.3.1 - WHERE A CONCOMITANT COMPONENT IS DECLARED

For each support and each study section of a bar, the envelope is run on the designated component.
Other results are then concomitant.
EXAMPLES: ENVELOPE OF CONCOMITANT LOADS
ENV 1 'concomitance des extremes de mz'
EFFORT MZ
LOAD 10 1.35
ENV 2 2.5
LOAD 9
COMB 3 2.77

END
ENV 3 'concomitance des extremes de mz et ractions fy'
EFFORT MZ
REAC FY
LOAD 10 1.35
ENV 2 2.5
LOAD 9
LIVE_LOAD 2 1.2
COMB 3 2.77

END
12.3.2 - IF NO COMPONENT IS DECLARED

The type of concomitance of the envelope is the same as for the envelopes and live_loads it contains.
If the envelope does not contain live_loads or envelopes, or even an envelope without concomitance,
the study will be without concomitance.
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE CONTAINING NO ENVELOPE OR LIVE_LOAD
ENV 4 'enveloppe sans concomitance'
LOAD 2
COMB 3 1.2

END
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE CONTAINING ANOTHER ENVELOPE
Let us suppose the envelope 10 studies DY displacements. The following commands are then
equivalent:
ENV 11 or ENV 11
DEPLA DY
LOAD 12 2. LOAD 12 2.
ENV 10 1.2 ENV 10 1.2
END END
Envelope 11 works on the DY displacements, as it contains envelope 10 which was already on DY
displacements.
Envelopes or live_loads contained in the same envelope must all have the same kind of
concomitance.
The use of the command ENV

(cf. p167) creates an envelope that is stored in a database.
The type of envelope calculated is indicated by a message when writing the results:
EXAMPLE
The envelope on Mz bending moments is indicated by the message:
==> Rsultats concomitants des extrmes de l'effort Mz
A test is performed on the consistency of the calculations required:
EXAMPLE
An envelope containing:
an envelope on mz moments
an envelope on vy stresses
is indicated by a message when you run the calculation and when writing the results:
==> ATTENTION : Rsultats comportant des incohrences sur les
concomitances
12.4 - ENVELOPE COMBINATIONS

Envelope combinations are the results of unit loads, live_loads, combinations or envelopes.
They are defined using the following syntax:
ENV i COMB ('Title combinaison of enveloppe')
STRESSG ic

LOAD liste1 (cfmin1) (cfmax1)

LIVE_LOAD liste2 (cfmin2) (cfmax2)

COMB liste3 (cfmin3) (cfmax3)

STATE liste4 (cfmin4) (cfmax4)

PHASAGE liste5 (cfmin5) (cfmax5)

SPECTRUM liste6 (cfmin6) (cfmax6)

HISTORY liste7 (cfmin7) (cfmax7)

ENV liste8 (cfmin8) (cfmax8)

END
with:
i number of envelope to create
ic number of the generalized stress
liste1 number list of loads, live_loads, etc., envelopes with results in the database
cfmin1 Minimum multiplier coefficients (by default cfmin = 1.)
cfmax1 maximum multiplier coefficients (by default = cfmax=cfmin)

The notion of concomitance is the same as before (see. command ENV p167).
EXAMPLE: ENVELOPE LOADS WITHOUT CONCOMITANCE

ENV 1 COMB 'pas de concomitance'
LOAD 10 1.35
LOAD 9
COMB 3 2.77

END
EXAMPLE: COMBINED ENVELOPE ON MOMENTS, WITH OTHER CONCURRENT STRAINS AND

POSSIBLE DISPLACEMENT AND STRESS; ENVELOPE ON SUPPORT REACTIONS WITHOUT
CONCOMITANCE
ENV 2 COMB 'enveloppe sur les moments'
EFFORT MZ
LOAD 1 1.35 1.0
COMB 2 2.55

END
EXAMPLE: COMBINATION OF ENVELOPES
ENV 10 COMB 'enveloppe sur les flches oy'
LOAD 3
ENV 2 2.55

END
Envelope 10 which is a combination of load 3 and envelope 2 will have the same type of
concomitance as envelope 2 (see concomitance management on previous pages).
Use of the ENV

command (see p 167) creates an envelope that is stored in a database.
The type of envelope calculated is indicated by a message when writing of the results:
EXAMPLE
The envelope on MZ bending moments is indicated by the message:
Concomitant results of extreme MZ strains
A test is performed on the consistency of calculations required:
EXAMPLE
An envelope containing:
an envelope on mz moments
an envelope on vy strains
is indicated by a message when you run the calculation and when writing the results:
==> ATTENTION : Rsultats comportant des incohrences sur les
concomitances
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Data recap) 208
13.
13.1 - GEOMETRY RECAP
DATA RECAP
Already read geometric features can be listed using the following commands:
EDITING ENTIRE GEOMETRY
LIST GEOM
The editing of the geometry is defined below:
numbers and coordinates of nodes
numbers and features of supports
numbers of bars, connecting nodes, lengths, eccentricities, joints
numbers and R.D.M. features of the bars
list of enabled supports
list of enabled bars
EDITING OF NODE COORDINATES
LIST NODE (liste)
EDITING OF THE GEOMETRICAL FEATURES OF THE BARS
LIST BAR (liste)
EDITING OF THE BARS' R.D.M. FEATURES
LIST CARA (liste)
EDITING MATERIAL PROPERTIES
LIST MAT (liste)
EDITING OF SUPPORT FEATURES
LIST RESTRAINT (liste)
EDITING OF GENERALIZED CONSTRAINTS
LIST STRESSG (liste)
EDITING ALL THE SUPPORT AND ALL THE BARS ACTIVATED
LIST ACTIVATION
EDITING ENABLED SUPPORTS
LIST ACTIVATION RESTRAINT
EDITING ENABLED BARS
LIST ACTIVATION BAR
with the above commands:
liste list of node or bar numbers
(by default the editing will be on all elements defined)
ST1 - List of commands (Data recap) 209
EXAMPLE
LIST NODE 1 a 10 BAR 2

all defined elements (this is then equivalent to do not place list).
13.2 - RECAP ON DEFINITION OF PRE-STRESSING

The elements of description of the previously defined pre-stress can be listed using the following
commands:
Pre-stress systems recap:
LIST PREC (liste)
Reminder of the geometry and main parameters of the cables (length, transmission coefficients,
cumulated angular deviations):
LIST CABLE (liste)
LIST CARA CABLE (liste)
with:
liste list of item numbers previously defined
(by default all defined elements will be printed out)

all defined items (this is then equivalent to do not place list).
13.3 - LOADS RECAP

Loads previously defined can be listed using the following comand:
LIST LOAD (liste)
with:
liste number list of loads previously defined
(by default all defined loads (see command LOAD p100) will be printed out)

13.4 - LIVE LOADS RECAP

The data required for the definition of live loads can be listed using the following commands:
EDITING OF APRON:
LIST DECK
EDITING TYPE A (L) GENERALISED LOADS:
LIST ALG (liste)
EDITING GENERALISED ROLLING LOADS:
LIST CONV (liste)
EDITING LIVE_LOADS:
LIST LIVE_LOAD (liste)
with:
liste list of load numbers previously defined
By default all defined loads (see command LOAD p100) will be printed out
In the instructions above, the lists may be replaced by the word

The phasings previously defined can be listed using the following command:
LIST PHASAGE (liste)
with:
liste list of phasing numbers previously defined
By default all defined phasings (see command PHASAGE p163) will be printed out
The phasing recap does not include of all the details of each instruction. It merely gives a summary of
each action.

all defined phasings (this is then equivalent to do not place list).
13.5 - DYNAMIC DATA RECAP

The data required for the definition of dynamic masses can be listed using the following commands:
EDITING DYNAMIC MASSES:
LIST MASS
In the instructions above, the masses are given under matrix formulation either to nodes, or to
the extremities of bars where they are defined.
The data required for the definition of damping properties can be listed using the following
commands:
EDITING DAMPING:
LIST DAMPING
The data required for the definition of spectrum of accelerations can be listed using the following
commands:
EDITING SPECTRUM:
LIST SPECTRUM
The data required for the definition of accelerograms can be listed using the following commands:
EDITING ACCELEROGRAMS:
LIST HISTORY
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Editing of results) 212
14. RESULTS EDITING
Publishing the results is achieved using the following syntax:

RESU
(LOAD (list)) (COMB (list)) (ENV (list)) (LIVE_LOAD (list))
(STATE (list)) (PHASAGE (list))
(CABLE (list) (XS (<REL,ABS>) listxs))
(NODE (list))
(RESTRAINT (LOC)(list))
(BAR (list)) (EFFORT) (DISPLA) (STRESS) (STRESSG(list)) (PRESS)
(MODE (listm)) (FREQUENCY) (DISPLA)
(SPECTRUM (list) (MODE (listem)) (RESTRAINT )
(BAR (listb) (EFFORT) (DISPLA)(SPEED)(ACCELERATION)
(STRESS)(PRESS) (STRESSG(list)) )
(HISTORY (listh) (NODE(listen))
(<DISPLA , SPEED, ACCELERATION >))(RESTRAINT (LOC))
(BAR (listb) (EFFORT)(STRESS)(PRESS) (STRESSG(list)))
(BUCKLING (listm)(MODE) (DISPLA) )

END
with:
list list of results numbers or loading items, where the results are stored in a database
(by default all results in database)
effort Keyword to editing strains, strain study sections (see command STUDY p94)
displa keyword to editing deformed sections on study sections (see command STUDY
p94)
stress keyword to editing normal stresses, strain study sections (see command STUDY
p94), for bars that the fibres VY, ..., WZ have been defined (see command CARA
p57).
(By default the strains on bars will be printed out)
listxs list of curvilinear abscissa along the cable (note the cable length is usually longer
than the length of the cross member)
listm list of modes numbers where the results are stored in a database
listh list of numbers of time history analysis where the results are stored in a database.
If the command is not with the command NODE, the time history of
displacements is given for the all structure for each time step
listn list of numbers of nodes for the time history (the time history of displacements is
shown by nodes)
listb list of members numbers for spectrum data
EXAMPLE: EDITING OF STRAIN ON BARS 1 TO 10 FOR ALL LOADS WHERE THE RESULT IS STORED IN
A DATABASE
RESU
LOAD
BAR 1 to 10
END
All the above commands can be written on one line.

ST1 - List of commands (Editing of results) 213
The description of results editing is achieved between the key words RESUand END
.
The NODE
command is used only with
It then provides displacements
LOAD and not with LIVE_LOAD .
The command RESTRAINT provides the strains to the supports. The command
get the results in the local direction of the support
LOC provides to
The command
LIVE_LOAD.
BARprovides the displacements of all the study sections for both LOAD
and
The command
PHASAGE and
CABLE
LOAD
provides the tensile stresses and loss in the study sections for ETATS,
to the default calculation sections and the curvilinear abscissa specified
by the user in absolute or relative depending on the length of the cable.
The command MODE FREQUENCE provides eigen frequencies for the already calculated modes,
the factor of modal participation and the eigen mass.
The command MODE DISPLA

calculated and specified.
provides displacements of bars for the eigen modes already
The command SPECTRUM provides the complete squarre combinations of bars and for all eigen
modes already calculated. This command needs to have complete the command SPECTRUM
10.4 - acceleration spectrum. If the damping is equal to zero (command damping not defined
for instance), the combination CQC becomes the SRSS combination (squarre root of the
squarre sum). If necessary, the modes to be used must be specified by the command MODE.
The command BUCKLING MODE provides the critical amplification factors of the normal
sollicitation for the calculated buckling modes.
The command BUCKLING DISPLA

calculated and specified.
provides displacements of bars for the buckling modes
EXAMPLE : EDITION OF MODES

RESU
MODE FREQUENCE
END
EXAMPLE : EDITION OF DISPLACEMENTS FOR MODE 1 FOR ALL BARS

RESU
MODE 1 DISPLA
END
EXAMPLE : EDITION OF COMBINATIONS CQC

RESU
SPECTRUM BAR ALL EFFORT DISPLA
END
EXAMPLE : EDITION OF BUCKLING MODE
RESU
BUCKLING MODE
END
EXAMPLE : EDITION OF TIME HISTORY
RESU
HISTORY 1 NODE 2 DISPLA
HISTORY 1 RESTRAINT
HISTORY 1 BAR EFFORT STRESS PRESS
END
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Graphics commands) 214
15. GRAPHICS COMMANDS
15.1 - INITIALIZATION OF GRAPHICS MODE

When the user is under the prompt > in console mode, the switchover to interactive design achieved
using the following syntax:
DESS
The user is presented in graphical input mode and can use all the commands in the graphics module
and the commands TITLE and READ in console mode.
The command READ (see p34) can run a file containing ready prepared drawing instructions.
Entering one or more commands can be achieved in the text line at the bottom of the graphics window.
At the end of input, you can run by hitting the <ENTREE> key on the keyboard.
To enter several commands on this line, they should be separated by a semicolon.
To the right of the input line is a button that displays a list of previously written commands. Selecting
one of these copies the command on the line. It can be run again by pressing <ENTREE> on the
keyboard.
The selection of one of the buttons in the top left of the graphic display (Print, Save, Cls, etc.) gives
the same result as typing the appropriate command, followed by the <ENTREE>key.
15.2 - EXITING GRAPHICS MODE

Exiting from graphics mode is achieved using the following command:
RETURN
or by selecting the "Back to calculation mode" in the "File" menu.
Selecting the close button to the left of the "File" menu is equivalent to entering the command QUIT
(see p38) in the text line, ST1 asks for a project name in the text line for a possible backup.
Hitting the <ENTREE> key without entering a name causes exit from ST1 without backup.
ST1 - List of commands (Graphics commands) 215
15.3 - GRAPHIC SCREEN DRIVER CHANGE

The driver for the graphic screen can be changed using the command:
ECRAN nom
with:
nom name of the graphics driver
The drivers used are:
ega
vga
The type of graphic display is initialised in the parameters file (see. p288) which enables a
default initialization. It can, however, be redefined in the data file.
15.4 - PLOTTER CHANGE

The plotter can be changed by running the following command:
TRA nom (COULEUR,MONOCHROME)
with:
nom plotter driver name
The drivers used are:
post Postscript format A4 landscape
postp Postscript format A4 portrait
post3 Postscript format A3 landscape
post3p Postscript format A3 portrait
dxf DXF standard compliant data exchange
calc Calcomp electrostatic plotter
The drivers above are monochrome by default.
EXAMPLE: POSTSCRIPT PLOTTER A3 COLOUR

TRA post3 COULEUR
The paper drawing is obtained from the backup of a drawing on screen (see command
p216).
SAUV
The type of plotter is initialised in the parameters file (see 288P) which enables default
initialisation. It can, however, be redefined in the data file.
15.5 - PRINTING THE DRAWING DISPLAYED ON THE SCREEN

The drawing on the screen can be sent to any printer on the list of Windows printers installed by using
the Fichier menu, Impression..... The command thus generated in the graphics input box is:
PRINT 'boite'
15.6 - PRINT PREVIEW ON TRACER

The preview of the design obtained from the current plot can be obtained using the command:
TRA
To return to full-screen viewing use the command:
ECRAN
15.7 -SAVING THE DRAWING ON THE SCREEN

The drawing on the screen can be saved on file for use outside ST1. A buffer file is generated using
the command:
SAUV
The content and the file name generated depends on the type of current plotter (see command TRA
p215).
File generated:
pos.st1 Printer using the POSTSCRIPT standard
dxf.st1 Data exchange using DXF standard
During a single session, using multiple graphics drivers results in the generation of a buffer file
per plotter type.
EXAMPLES:
Using a postscript A4 driver and a postscript A3 driver will only generate one file
pos.st1
Using a postscript driver and a dxf driver generates two files, pos.st1 and
dxf.st1
SEQUENCE OF COMMANDS TO BE PERFORMED TO SAVE A DRAWING FILE ON SCREEN INTO A FILE
Choose a file format (menu Fichier, command Langage pour sauvegarde dessin
sur file)
Choose the type of drawing to be created on screen (Geom, Effort, ...)
Enter the name of the backup file, as ST1 does not add a default extension, it is imperative to
fill in the extension for the file format defined previously ( .DXF or .PS) in the filename
(menu Fichier, command Nom du file de sauvegarde des ecrans :...:..., the
command TRA 'nomfichier.ext' is generated in the graphics input zone at the bottom of
the screen)
type SAUV in the text box and confirm
Type RET in the entry box to exit graphics mode
It is possible to string multiple backups in a row.

As long as the file format is not redefined, ST1 uses the current one.
15.8 - CLEAR THE SCREEN

Clearing the screen in graphics mode is achieved using the command:
CLS
15.9 - ANGLE (SPATIAL AND GRILL OPTIONS)

Changing the angle of the drawing on the screen is achieved using the following syntaxes:
VUE (X ux) (Y uy) (Z uz)
or
VUE ux uy uz
with:
ux, uy, uz directing coefficients along the axes X, Y, Z of the view direction
(by default ux= uy = uz = 1)
EXAMPLE: VIEW ALONG THE Z DIRECTION
or
VUE 0 0 1 VUE Z 1

This command is not active for the PLANE

option (see command OPTION
p41).
ux uy
The coefficients , , and
will automatically take
uz
must represent a non-zero vector. Given
ux=uy=uz=1
.
ux=uy=uz=0, ST1
15.10 - ZOOM
Enlargement of a drawing is achieved using the following syntax:
ZOOM cf (xc yc)
with:
see directing coefficients along the axes X, Y, Z of the view direction
xc, yc directing coefficients along the axes X, Y, Z of the view direction
EXAMPLE: ENLARGEMENT
ZOOM 2
Means that the drawing on the screen is enlarged deux times in relation to the screen.
EXAMPLE: REDUCTION
ZOOM .5 .2 .3
Means the drawing is reduced by a factor 0.5 in relation to the coordinate point 0.2, 0.3 on the
screen.
15.11 - SELECTION OF A PORTION OF THE STRUCTURE DEFINED

The selection of a part of the structure for running graphics commands is achieved using the following
syntaxes:
15.11.1 - SELECTION OF BAR NUMBERS

SELEC BAR liste
15.11.1 - SELECTION OF NODE NUMBERS

SELEC NODE liste
15.11.3 - SELECTION OF THE WHOLE STRUCTURE

SELEC ALL
EXAMPLES
SELEC BAR 1 to 10 or SELEC 1 to 10

Means that after this command, the graphic commands will only take bars 1 to 10 into account.
SELEC ALL
Means that the graphic commands will affect the entire structure. This command is only useful if you
want to go back to the whole structure after studying a part of it.
By default the entire structure is selected.

15.12 - CENTRING THE DRAWING SHOWN ON THE SCREEN

Centring of the drawing on the screen is achieved using to the following syntaxes:
15.12.1 - CENTRING THE WHOLE DRAWING

CENTR
15.12.2 - CENTRING THE STRUCTURE SELECTED BY THE LAST USE OF THE SELEC
command
CENTR GEOM
This centring allows you to draw the selected structure so that it fills the entire screen.
15.12.3 - CENTRING STRAINS, DISPLACEMENTS OR STRESSES

CENTR < EFFORT <N,TY MZ>,
DEPLA (DX,DY,DZ,RX,RY,RZ),
STRESS <VY WZ>,
STRESSG
PRESS <PX,PY,PZ,MX> >
(MAX xmax)
This centring enables you to re-draw strains, displacements or stresses in such a way that the
maximum size of the drawing does not exceed xmax cm on the screen. The scale of strains,
displacements or stresses will be reset to the value thus defined. By default, the maximum is equal to
what it was before.
On the first use, the value is set in the parameters file (see p288).
EXAMPLE: RE-CENTRING A DRAWING

ZOOM 2

CENTR

The drawing shown is undergoing an enlargement and is then re-centred on the screen.
EXAMPLE: CENTRING ON A PART OF THE DRAWN STRUCTURE

### dessin de la structure, efforts, etc ###

SELEC BAR 20
CENTR GEOM
The structure was drawn on the screen, the bar 20 has been selected, the drawing was centred on the
selected geometry (this amounts to zoom in on the bar 20 of the drawing on the screen. )
On the first drawing, centring is on the geometry of the structure by default.

15.13 - DRAWING THE STRUCTURE

The drawing of the structure is obtained using the following command:
GEOM
EXAMPLE: DRAWING OF THE WHOLE STRUCTURE
GEOM
EXAMPLE: DRAWING OF PART OF THE STRUCTURE

SELEC BAR 1 to 10
GEOM

The command GEOM runs the drawing of bars r1to10.
15.14 - NUMBERING OF NODES AND BARS

The numbering of nodes and bars of the structure is achieved using the following command:
15.14.1 - NUMBERING OF NODES AND BARS

NUM
15.14.2 - NUMBERING OF NODES AND/OR BARS

NUM (NODE) (BAR)
EXAMPLE: NUMBERING OF NODES AND BARS
NUM or NUM NODE BAR

EXAMPLE: NUMBERING OF NODES
NUM NODE
EXAMPLE: NUMBERING OF BARS
NUM BAR
15.15 - CHANGING THE DEFAULT COLOURS

Changing the default colour of strains, displacements, stresses and pressures:
COUL <EFFORT,DEPLA,STRESS,STRESSG,PRESS> (couleur)
with:
colour keyword of the chosen colour: <NOIR, INDIGO, VERT, CYAN, ROUGE, MAGENTA,
MARRON, NEUTRE, GRIS, BLEU, PISTACHE, CIEL, CORAIL, MAUVE, JAUNE,
BLANC>
EXAMPLE: CHANGING THE COLOUR OF DISTORTIONS

COUL DEPLA JAUNE
The deformations will be drawn in yellow.
Each screen colour defined above corresponds with a thickness and type of line for drawing in
black and white on a laser printer. The colour / line thickness correspondence is defined in the
parameters file (see. p288).
15.16 - DRAWING DISPLACEMENTS OF THE STRUCTURE

The drawing of deformation of a structure is achieved using the following command:
DEPLA <LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste (couleur)
The drawing of displacements of a structure following a direction in the global directory is achieved
using the following command:
DEPLA <(DX RZ)> <LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste (couleur)
with:
liste list of loads, combinations, envelopes or live_loads to draw, the results of which
are already in database
couleur keyword of the chosen colour: <NOIR, INDIGO, VERT, CYAN, ROUGE, MAGENTA,
BLANC>
EXAMPLE: DRAWING OF THE DEFORMATION OF THE LOAD 2
DEPLA LOAD 2
EXAMPLE: SUPERIMPOSITION OF THE GEOMETRY OF THE WHOLE STRUCTURE AND DEFORMED
BARS 1-10 FOR LOADING 11

GEOM

SELEC BAR 1 to 10
DEPLA LOAD 11

The drawing of the distorted structure can be requested only if the results to be drawn are
already in the database (see commands EXEC LOAD
p117, p202, COMB ENV
p167 and EXEC
LIVE_LOAD p162).
Drawing of the deformed structure consists of displaying the displacement of nodes and study
sections defined on the bars (see command STUDY
p94). Thus, the deformation of a bar can
only be displayed if you have identified a sufficient number of sections on this bar.
The drawing of an envelope contains two curves:

curve of maximum effects
curve of minimum effects
15.17 - DRAWING R.D.M STRAINS

The drawing of the strains on a structure is achieved using the following command:
EFFORT <N,TY,TZ,MX,MY,MZ>
<LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste (couleur)
with:
BLANC>
Option PLANE n, ty, mz
Option GRILL mx, tz, my
Option SPATIAL n, ty, tz, mx, my, mz
EXEMPLE : DRAWING OF THE NORMAL STRAIN FOR THE COMBINATION 3
EFFORT N COMB 3
EXAMPLE: DRAWING THE TY SHEAR AND BENDING MOMENT MZ FOR ENVELOPE 5
EFFORT TY ENV 5 ROUGE
EFFORT MZ ENV 5 VERT
The drawing of the R.D.M. strains on the structure can be requested only if the results to be
drawn are already in the database (see commands EXEC LOAD
p117, COMB
p202, p167 ENV
and EXEC LIVE_LOAD p162).
Drawing strains consists of displaying the results obtained in study sections defined on the bars
(see command STUDY
p94). Thus, the R.D.M. strain curve of a bar can only be displayed if you
have identified a sufficient number of sections on this bar.
The drawing of an envelope contains two curves: one curve for maximum effects and one for
minimum effects.
15.18 - DRAWING NORMAL STRESSES

The drawing of the normal stresses on a structure is achieved using the following command:
STRESS <VY,WY,VZ,WZ,VYVZ,VYWZ,WYVZ,WYWZ>
<LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste (couleur)
with:
BLANC>
Option PLANE vy, wy
Option GRILL vz, wz
Option SPATIAL vyvz, vywz, wyvz, wywz
EXAMPLE: FLAT STRUCTURES
Drawing of the stress at the upper fibre for the combination number 3:
STRESS VY COMB 3
EXAMPLE: SPATIAL STRUCTURES
Drawing stresses in VY VZ for the envelope 5:

STRESS VYVZ ENV 5
The drawing of the stresses on the structure can be requested only if the results to be drawn are
p117, COMB
p202, ENV
p167 and EXEC
LIVE_LOAD p162).
Drawing stresses consists of displaying the results obtained in study sections defined on the
bars (see command STUDY
p94). Thus, the stress curve of a bar can only be displayed if you
minimum effects.
15.19 - DRAWING GENERALIZED STRESSES

The drawing of the generalised stresses on a structure is achieved using the following command:
STRESSG i <LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste (couleur)
with:
i number of the generalized stress to be drawn
BLANC>
EXAMPLE: DRAWING OF THE GENERALISED CONSTRAINT 2 FOR THE COMBINATION NUMBER 3
STRESSG 2 COMB 3
The drawing of the stresses on the structure can be requested only if the results to be drawn are
p117, COMB
p202, ENV
p167 and EXEC
LIVE_LOAD p162).
Drawing stresses consists of displaying the results obtained in study sections defined on the
bars (see command STUDY
p94). Thus, the stress curve of a bar can only be displayed if you
minimum effects.
15.20 - DRAWING PRESSURES

Drawing the pressure of the bars on elastic ground (see command CARA p57) is achieved using the
following command:
PRESS <PX,PY,PZ,MX> <LOAD,COMB,ENV,LIVE_LOAD> liste (couleur)
with:
BLANC>
Option PLANE px, py
GRID OPTION mx, pz
spatial option px, py, pz, mx
EXAMPLE: DRAWING OF THE TRANSVERSAL PRESSURE FOR COMBINATION NUMBER 3
PRESS PY COMB 3
EXAMPLE: DRAWING TANGENT PRESSURE FOR ENVELOPE 5
PRESS PX ENV 5 ROUGE
The drawing of the stresses on cross members on elastic ground can be requested only if the
results to be drawn are already in the database (see commands EXEC LOAD
p117, p202,COMB
ENV p167 and EXEC LIVE_LOAD p162).
Drawing pressures consists of displaying the results obtained in displacement study sections
defined on the bars (see command STUDY
p94). Thus, the stress curve of a bar can only be
displayed if you have identified a sufficient number of sections on this bar.
minimum effects.
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (graphic displays) 226
16 GRAPHIC SCREENS
The parameter file (see p288) includes screen resolution for graphics mode (line ECRAN
w1024_768 by default). This resolution can be customised by choosing from the four
available configurations (w640_480, w800_600,w1024_768 , w1280_1024).
16.1 - USABLE SCREEN AREA WITH THE MOUSE OUTSIDE THE DRAWING AREA
Areas used by the left mouse button:
1 System button to exit the software. If calculations were made, ST1 will offer a backup before
leaving the graphics module.
2 Choose a colour before you draw a curve.
3 To draw a strain curve, click on the Effort button and on the type of strain (N, TY,MZ , ...),
choose a load and loading number.
4 Area allowing side-scrolling with the screen size as displacement step.
5. Keyboard entry box, activated with the mouse.
6. Button provides access to the list of recent commands typed.

ST1 - List of commands (graphic displays) 227
16.2 - DRAWING AREA ACTIVE WITH THE LEFT BUTTON

To move the marker or the edge of the key, hold the left mouse button pressed.
1 A curve can be activated by clicking with the mouse; the study sections appear represented by
points that can be selected with the mouse to display the corresponding value.
2 Key outline line can be activated with the mouse to change its size.
3 Drawing reference that can be moved with the mouse.
4 Key of the curves drawn.

16.3 - ACTIVE DRAWING AREA WITH DRAG AND DROP

A defined area may allow the display of numbers in the bar area, deselection of the bars of the area or
any other action available in the menu.
1 In normal mouse input, we can define an area by dragging and dropping, an intelligent menu
appears on dropping offering actions on the items in the area.
16.4 - ACTIVE DRAWING AREA ACTIVE WITH THE RIGHT BUTTON

The right button can be used on the bars, nodes and cables.
1 The right mouse button displays a menu associated with the designated object.
16.5 - SELECTION AND DESELECTION OF BARS

All operations are possible once the bars are visible. To reverse the selection state of a bar, click on it
or create a box and click selec boite ajout
1 When the M_sel button is pressed, the deselected bars are shown in red
When the M_sel button is released, red bars disappear. The curves are shown only on
the visible bars.
16.6 -RECENTRING CURVES ON SCREEN WITH THE MOUSE

The C_cbr button allows you to reposition the curves in an interactive manner. Once the button is
pressed, an arrow can grips the curve enabling drag and drop handling.
1 To recentre a curve on the screen, press the C cbr button.

Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Examples) 230
17. PSEUDO-PROGRAMMING
17.1 - PRESENTATION
The basic structural calculator instructions can be supplemented by PSEUDO-PROGRAMMATION
instructions in order to generate certain groups of actions in an automatic manner, or to retrieve a
parameterised file that might be reused.
The numerical values of the data file can then be replaced by variables or arithmetic expressions, the
result of which will be used as a numeric value.
EXAMPLE:
NODE 1 -0.416147 1.909297 is equivalent to NODE 1 cos(2) 1+sin(2)

The instructions can be repeated automatically using a repeat loop.
EXAMPLE:
ACTIVATE RESTRAINT 1 to 10 is equivalent to FOR i=1 to 10 <<ACTIVATE RESTRAINT i>>

ST1 - List of commands (Examples) 231
17.2 - LEXICAL TYPES-SPECIFIC TO PSEUDO-PROGRAMMING
17.2.1 - VARIABLES
The numerical values can be stored in memory in the form of variables. Assigning a numerical value
to a variable is done using the sign =.
EXAMPLE:
x1=12. ; i=11 ;
The variable x1 is set to 12., and variable i is set to 11.
Once initialized, the variables can be used in place of numerical values.
EXAMPLE:
NODE 1 12 3 is equivalent to x1=12 ; NODE 1 x1 3
The initialisation of a variable sets its type. This cannot be changed later (in particular, the
variable x1
of the above example can no longer be used for a list name).
The name of a variable should not match a keyword or a list previously defined.
17.2.2 - NAMED LISTS

The numerical lists can be stored in memory in the form of named lists. Assigning a name to a list is
achieved using the sign =.
EXAMPLE:
ls1=1,2,5 to 8 ; ls2=1 to 3,x1,4,i
Once initialized, the named lists can be used in place of explicit lists.
EXAMPLE:
NODE 1 to 3 12 3 is equivalent to ls1=1 to 3 ; NODE ls1 12 3

The lists can contain other named lists in their definition. The list will thus contain the defined values
of the inserted list, at the time of assignment.
EXAMPLES
ls1=1 to 3 ; ls2=ls1,4,6 is equivalent to ls1=1 to 3 ; ls2=1 to 3,4,6

ls1=1 to 3 ; ls1=ls1,4,6 is equivalent to ls1=1 to 3,4,6
ls1=1 to 3 ; ls2=ls1,4,6 ; ls1=2 is equivalent to ls1=2 ; ls2=1 to 3,4,6
Initializing an empty list is achieved by assigning the empty list vide to this list (vide is a specific
list initialised by ST1).
EXAMPLE:
ls1=vide ; for j=1 to 5 << ls1=ls1,j >> is equivalent to ls1=1 to 5
The initialisation of a named list sets its type. This cannot be changed later (in particular, the
list 1s1 of the above example can no longer be used for a variable).
EXAMPLE:
ls1=1 to 5 impossible to write afterwards ls1=10
The name of a variable should not match a keyword or a variable previously defined.
17.2.3 - INDEXED TABLES OF VARIABLES

The numerical values can be stored in memory in the form of indexed tables of variables. The creation
of an indexed table is achieved using the command:
DIM nom(n)
with:
nom name of indexed table
n dimension of the table
EXAMPLE:
The instruction:
DIM tx1(100)
creates an indexed table of variables txt1 containing 100 variables.
The initialisation and use of indexed variables is carried out in the same way as for non-indexed
variables (see above).
EXAMPLE:
DIM tx1(10)
NODE 1 12 3 is equivalent to tx1(1)=12 ; NODE 1 tx1(1) 3
The name of a variable table should not correspond to the name of a mathematical function.
Writing an indexed variable should not contain blank spaces.

17.3 - MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS

Throughout the data file, the numerical values can be replaced by mathematical expressions.
17.3.1 - ARITHMETIC OPERATORS

The following usual arithmetic operations can be used in the data file:
addition +
soustraction -
multiplication *
division /
puissance **
EXAMPLE:
NODE 1 2+4*1 10 is equivalent to NODE 1 6 10
17.3.2 - MATHEMATICAL FUNCTIONS

The following usual mathematical functions can be used in the data file:
valeur absolue abs(x1)
partie entire int(x1)
racine carre sqrt(x1)
fonction sinus sin(x1)
fonction cosinus cos(x1)
fonction tangente tan(x1)
fonction arcsinus asin(x1)
fonction arccosinus acos(x1)
fonction arctangente atan(x1)
fonction exponentielle exp(x1)
fonction logarithme nprien log(x1)
fonction sinus hyperbolique sinh(x1)
fonction cosinus hyperbolique cosh(x1)
fonction tangente hyperbolique tanh(x1)
17.3.3 - SYNTAX
The mathematical expressions are written according to the usual syntax of programming languages.
EXAMPLE:
All these expressions are equivalent:

1+2+3
1+2*(2-1)+3
1+(2*(2-1))+3
1+2*3**2-13
1+2*(3**2)-13
cos(0)+2+3
A mathematical formula does not contain blank spaces.
EXAMPLE:
The expression:
1+2 +3
represents two numerical values.
17.4 - INSTRUCTION REPEAT COMMAND

One or more instructions in the data file can be automatically repeated using the following command:
FOR i=liste << instructions >>
or
FOR i=liste
<<

instructions

>>
Repeat commands can be nested inside each other.
The maximum number of nestings is given in the parameters file (see p288).
EXAMPLE:
k=0
FOR i=1 to 1O
<<
FOR j=1 to 5
<<
k=k+1 ; NODE k i j
>>
>>
Output the loop, the loop index is equal to the last value in the loop control list.
If the value of a loop index is changed inside the loop, it will be reset at the next iteration, and
the running of the loop will not be affected.
The running of a loop FOR

can be modified using the instruction
two instructions are described below).
PASSER or BRISER (these
17.5 - CONDITIONAL DISCONNECTIONS

One or more instructions in the data file can be included or ignored depending on the result of a
logical expression:
IF(expression logique) instruction simple
IFNOT instruction simple
or
IF(expression logique)
<<

instructions

>>
IFNOT
<<

instructions

>>
Conditional disconnections can be nested into each other.
The maximum number of nestings is given in the parameters file (see p288).
EXEMPLE
IF(i<=12)
<<
IF(j==2) NODE 12 5 6
IFNOT
<<
k=k+1
NODE k i j
>>
>>
17.5.1 - LOGICAL EXPRESSIONS

Logical expressions include operators for comparing numeric values and possibly logical operators.
OPERATORS TO COMPARE NUMERIC VALUES
The following operators can be used in the data file:

gal == ou =
diffrent /=
strictement suprieur >
strictement infrieur <
suprieur ou gal >=
infrieur ou gal <=
EXAMPLE:
IF(i==1) is equivalent to IF(i=1)
LOGICAL OPERATORS
The following operators can be used in the data file:

NOT
AND
OR_ELSE
The logical expressions are written following the syntax of programming language GENFOR.
EXAMPLES
All these logical expressions are equivalent:

IF(a1==2 AND a1>2 OR_ELSE a2<3)
IF((a1==2 AND a1>2) OR_ELSE a2<3)
IF(a1>=2 OR_ELSE a2<3)
IF(NOT a1<2 OR_ELSE a2<3)
IF(NOT (a1<2 AND a2>=3))
Logical expressions can only be used in the instruction IF().

17.5.2 - DISCONNECTION ON A SIMPLE INSTRUCTION

In the event where conditional disconnection only concerns an instruction, the user has the option to
put quotes <<>> or not.
EXAMPLE:
The following instructions are equivalent:

IF(i==j) NODE i 12. 11.
IF(i==j) << NODE i 12. 11. >>
Simple instructions are those instructions that do not have an end of line (or separator ).
:
EXAMPLE
;

IF(i==j) IF(k==11) NODE i 12 11 ; IFNOT READ 'fichier1'
IF(i==j) << IF(k==11) NODE i 12 11 >> ; IFNOT READ 'fichier1'
The instruction
:
EXAMPLE
FOR is seen as a simple instruction if it is written on one line.

IF(i==j) FOR k=1 to 10 << jj=jj+1 ; NODE jj k+1 k*4 >>
IF(i==j) << FOR k=1 to 10 << jj=jj+1 ; NODE jj k+1 k*4 >> >>
17.5.3 - DISCONNECTION OF A BLOCK OF INSTRUCTIONS

If conditional disconnection involves several instructions it is mandatory to put quotes <<>>.
EXAMPLE:
The following instructions:

IF(i==j) << READ 'fichier1' ; FOR i=1 to 10 << NODE i xx(i) yy(i) >> >>
IFNOT << jj = jj+1 ; FOR i=1 to 3 << NODE jj xx(i)**2 yy(i)**2 >> >>
are equivalent to:
IF(i==j)
<<
READ 'fichier1'
FOR i=1 to 10
<<
NODE i xx(i) yy(i)
>>
>>
IFNOT
<<
jj = jj+1
FOR i=1 to 3
<<
NODE jj xx(i)**2 yy(i)**2
>>
>>
17.6 - CHANGES IN THE PERFORMANCE OF FOR LOOPS

17.6.1 - PASS INSTRUCTION
The final instructions contained in a FOR can be ignored using the instruction:
PASSER
EXAMPLE:
The instructions are equivalent to

FOR i=1 to 10 FOR i=1 to 10
<< <<

instructions instructions

IF(i==7) PASSER IF(i/=7)
<<
instructions
instructions
>>
>>
>>
17.6.2 - BREAK INSTRUCTION
The running of a FOR loop can be interrupted using the instruction:
BRISER
EXAMPLE:
The instructions are equivalent to

FOR i=1 to 10 FOR i=1 to 5
<< <<

instructions instructions

IF(i==5) BRISER IF(i<5)
<<
instructions
instructions
>>
>>
>>
The loop index retains its value at the moment of BRISER.

17.7 - RECOVERY OF CALCULATION RESULTS IN A VARIABLE

The calculation results can be retrieved into variables so that they can be directly exploited in the
remainder of the data file.
This recovery is achieved using the GET instruction (see details below) in a specific type variables
buffer prefixed with the character $.
EXAMPLE: DISABLING SUPPORT 2 IF THE FY REACTION OF COMBINATION 10 IS NEGATIVE (FLAT
OPTION)

GET REAC RESTRAINT 2 COMB 10
IF($fy<0) DEACTIVATE RESTRAINT 2

The GET instruction above assigns the values of the reaction of the support 2 in the variables $FX,
$FY, $MZ.
EXAMPLE: WEIGHTING IN COMBINATION 122 OF LOADING RESULTS 12, SO THAT THE STRESS VYVZ
IN SECTION 1 OF BAR 13 IS EQUAL TO 35 MPA (SPATIAL OPTION)

GET STRESS BAR 13 SEC 1 LOAD 12
COMB 122 ' efforts ponderes du chargement 12'
LOAD 12 35/$vyvz
END
The GET instruction above assigns the values of the constraints of section 1 of bar 13 in the variables
$VYVZ, $WYVZ, $VYWZ, $WYWZ.
An error occurring when using the

modifies the variable $ ERR
GET
instruction triggers display of an error message and
(in case of error $ERR=1otherwise $ERR=0).).
Use of the GET

instruction overwrites the contents of the variables buffer in use. In case the
user wishes to retain certain values, they should be stored in other variables.
EXAMPLE:
GET DEPLA NODE 1 LOAD 2
toto=$dx
GET DEPLA NODE 2 LOAD 2
17.7.1 - RECOVERY OF NODE DISPLACEMENTS

The recovery of node displacements due to a load, a combination, a state or phasing is achieved using
the syntax:
GET DEPLA NODE i <LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE> j
The recovery of node displacements from an envelope is achieved using the syntax:
GET DEPLA <MAX,MIN> NODE i ENV j
with:
i node number
j Number of loading, combination, envelope
The above commands affect the displacements of node i in the following variables:
Option PLANE $dx, $dy, $rz
Option GRILL $rx, $dz, $rz
Option SPATIAL $dx, $dy, $dz, $rx, $ry, $rz
EXAMPLE: RECOVERY OF MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT OF NODE 3 ENVELOPE 10

GET DEPLA MAX NODE 3 ENV 10
v1 = $dx ; v2 = $dy ; v3 = $rz

GETinstruction triggers display of an error message and
(in case of error $ERR=1 otherwise $ERR=0 ).).
Use of the GET

17.7.2 - RECOVERY OF SUPPORT REACTIONS

The recovery of support reactions due to a load, a combination, a state or phasing is achieved using the
syntax:
GET REAC RESTRAINT i <LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE > j
The recovery of support reactions from an envelope is achieved using the syntax:
GET REAC <MAX,MIN> RESTRAINT i <ENV,LIVE_LOAD> j
with:
i support number
j number of loading, combination, envelope or live_load
The above commands affect the reactions of the support i in the following variables:
Option PLANE $fx, $fy, $mz
Option GRILL $fz, $mx, $my
Option SPATIAL $fx, $fy, $fz, $mx, $my, $mz
EXAMPLE: RECOVERY OF MINIMUM REACTIONS OF SUPPORT 4 OF ENVELOPE 11. USING A TEST ON
THE FY COMPONENT TO REDEFINE THIS SUPPORT
GET REAC MIN RESTRAINT 4 ENV 11
IF($fy<0) RESTRAINT 4 dx

GET
(in case of error $ERR=1
otherwise $ERR=0
).).
Use of the GET

17.7.3 - RECOVERY OF RESULTS ON A BAR

The recovery results of a study section on a bar from a load, a combination, a state or phasing is
achieved using the syntax:
GET <EFFORT,DEPLA,STRESS,PRESS,STRESSG k>
BAR i SEC n <LOAD,COMB,STATE,PHASAGE > j
The recovery of results from a study section on a bar from a load, a combination, a state or phasing is
GET <EFFORT,DEPLA,STRESS,PRESS,STRESSG k> <MAX,MIN> BAR i SEC n
<ENV,LIVE_LOAD>j
with:
i number of the bar
n number of the study section(see command STUDY p94)
j number of loading, combination, envelope or live_load
k number of STRESSG (see command STRESSG p96)
The above commands affect the results of the study section n of the bar i in the following variables:
Strains recovery: GET EFFORT BAR (case of a strain study section)
Option PLANE $n, $ty, $mz
Option GRILL $mx, $tz, $mz
Option SPATIAL $n, $ty, $tz, $mx, $my, $mz
Recovery of displacements: GET DEPLA BAR (case of a displacement study section)
Recovery of stresses: GET STRESS BAR (case of a stresses study section on a bar where
the fibres have been defined)
Option PLANE $vy, $wy
Option GRILL $vz, $wz
Option SPATIAL $vyvz, $wyvz, $vywz, $wywz
Recovery of pressures: GET PRESS BAR (case of a displacement study section and a bar
on elastic ground)
Option PLANE $px, $py
Option GRILL $mx, $pz
Option SPATIAL $px, $py, $pz, $mx
Recovery of a generalized stress: GET STRESSG k BAR (case of a stresses study section
and a bar for which the generalised stress k has been defined)
Option PLANE $stressg
Option GRILL $stressg
Option SPATIAL $stressg
All types of results requests for a study section on a bar update 2 additional buffer variables:
$XL abscissa of the study section of the bar
$NSEC number of study sections on the bar
EXAMPLE: RECOVERY OF THE NORMAL STRESS IN A SECTION1 OF BAR 2 FOR LOAD 3
GET EFFORT BAR 2 SEC 1 LOAD 3
EXAMPLE: RECOVERY IN THE VARIABLE V1, THE MAXIMUM BENDING MOMENT OF BAR 4 FOR
ENVELOPE 11 AND IN THE LOCAL V2 ABSCISSA OF THIS MAXIMUM
GET EFFORT MAX BAR 4 SEC 1 ENV 11
v1 = $mz ; v2 = $xl
for i=2 to $nsec
<<
GET EFFORT MAX BAR 4 SEC i ENV 11
IF(v1<$mz) << v1=$mz ; v2=$xl >>
>>

GET
(in case of error $ERR=1
otherwise $ERR=0
).).
Use of the GET

17.7.4 - RECOVERY OF RESULTS FROM AN HISTORY ON A BAR

The recovery of results from a study section on a bar specificaly from an history is achieved using the
syntax:
GET <ACCELERATION, SPEED> <MAX,MIN> BAR i SEC n HISTORY j
with:
i number of the bar
n number of the study section(see command STUDY p94)
j number of history
The above commands affect the results of the study section n of the bar i in the following variables:
Recovery of accelerations: GET ACCELERATION BAR
Recovery of speed: GET SPEED BAR
All types of results requests for a study section on a bar update 2 additional buffer variables:
$XL abscissa of the study section of the bar
$NSEC number of study sections on the bar
17.7.5 - RECOVERY OF RESULTS ON A CABLE

The recovery results of a cable section on a bar from a load, a combination, a state or phasing is
GET TENSION CABLE i SEC n <LOAD,STATE,PHASAGE > j
with:
i cable number
n cable section number
j state, the phasing or loading number
All types of results requests for a study section on a cable update 2 additional buffer variables:
$nsec number of cable sections
$xl curved line abscissa in the section of cable studied
$sigp total stress at the section of cable studied
$dsigp total loss at the section of cable studied
$x X abscissa of the cable section studied in the global directory
$y Y ordinate of the cable section studied in the global directory
$z side Z of the cable section studied in the global directory
EXAMPLE: RECOVERY OF CABLE TENSION IN SECTION 2 OF THE CABLE 101 FOR PHASING 31
GET TENSION CABLE 101 SEC 2 PHASAGE 31
write 'nb section' $nsec
write 'abs curviligne' $xl
write 'Contrainte' $sigp
write 'Perte' $dsigp
write 'X :' $x
write 'Y :' $y
write 'Z :' $z
17.8 - WRITE COMMAND

To write a comment or a value, use the WRITE command. By default, the writing appears on the
console unless the OUTPUT command has been used previously, when the result is shown in the output
specified by that command.
EXAMPLE:
icas = 1
WRITE ICAS : icas
17.9 - PAUSE COMMAND

Use this command to pause the interpretation of a command file while running in order to facilitate
debugging for the user. Attention, it should not be placed inside of a command (for example, it should
not be in the description of a load, but after the end of the description).
To continue running commands, simply validate by using the <ENTER> key.
EXAMPLE:
EXEC load 1
PAUSE
EXEC load 2
In the example, when load1 has been run, the prompt appears.
Load 2 will only be run after confirmation using the <ENTER>
key by the user.
17.10 - EXAMPLE OF A PSEUDO-PROGRAMMING: PUSHING A BRIDGE
17.10.1 - DATA FILE

#====================== PSEUDO.ST1 =============================================
#
# Exemple de file de donnes pour le poussage d'un pont
# Les longueurs des traves et de la longueur EA doivent tre un multiple

# du pas de poussage
#
# avb tr1 tr2 tr3 tr4 ea aire
# ===x---x---x---x---x xxxxxx
# 1 2 3 4 5
#
#===============================================================================
title 'Pushing of a bridge'
#---------------------- dfinition du pas de poussage --------------------------
pasp = 3.39
#---------------------- aire de prfabrication ---------------------------------
npea = 6 # longueur entre l'aire de prfabrication et l'restraint de rive
#---------------------- dfinition du deck ----------------------------------
ntrav = 4 # nombre de traves
dim nptr(ntrav) # longueurs des traves (nombre de pas de poussage)
nptr(1) = 15
nptr(2) = 15
nptr(3) = 15
nptr(4) = 14
# caractristiques du deck
sxtbl = 10.851 # section
sytbl = 2.843 # section rduite d'effort tranchant
iztbl = 16.850 # inertie
vytbl = 1.345 # fibre suprieure
wytbl = 1.855 # fibre infrieure
etbl = 3912000. # module de Young
nutbl = .2 # coefficient de Poisson
rotbl = 2.50 # weight volumique
dim petr(ntrav+1) # weight des entretoises sur restraint
petr(1) = 90
petr(2) = 65
petr(3) = 90
petr(4) = 65
petr(5) = 90
#---------------------- dfinition de l'avant bec ------------------------------

npbec = 10 # longueur de l'avant bec (nombre de pas de poussage)
cara # caractristiques des bars de l'avant bec
1 sx 0.160 sy 0.048 iz 0.0461 vy 0.55 wy 0.55
2 sx 0.168 sy 0.056 iz 0.0640 vy 0.65 wy 0.65
3 sx 0.176 sy 0.064 iz 0.0853 vy 0.75 wy 0.75
4 sx 0.184 sy 0.072 iz 0.1102 vy 0.85 wy 0.85
5 sx 0.192 sy 0.080 iz 0.1387 vy 0.95 wy 0.95
6 sx 0.248 sy 0.088 iz 0.2291 vy 1.05 wy 1.05
7 sx 0.256 sy 0.096 iz 0.2765 vy 1.15 wy 1.15
8 sx 0.264 sy 0.104 iz 0.3290 vy 1.25 wy 1.25
9 sx 0.272 sy 0.112 iz 0.3868 vy 1.35 wy 1.35
10 sx 0.280 sy 0.120 iz 0.4500 vy 1.45 wy 1.45
# caractristiques des matriaux de l'avant bec
ebec = 20000000. # module de Young
nubec = .3 # coefficient de Poisson
robec = 10. # weight volumique (quivalent)
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# lancement des calculs
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
#---------------------- dfinition du chargement -------------------------------
load 1 'weight self : avant bec + deck + entretoises'
weight self all
j = npbec+1 ; node j fy -petr(1)
for i=1 to ntrav << j=j+nptr(i) ; node j fy -petr(i+1) >>
end
#---------------------- calcul du nombre de bars du deck ------------------
nbtbl = 0
for i=1 to ntrav << nbtbl = nbtbl+nptr(i) >>
#---------------------- calcul du nombre de bars total (avant bec+deck) ---
nttx = nbtbl+npbec
#---------------------- gnration des nodes-bars de l'avant bec et du deck
gener nttx+1 node id 1 x 0. pasp y 0. 0.
gener nttx bar id 1 de 1 1 to 2 1
#---------------------- dfinition des listes des bars -----------------------
bec = 1 to npbec; tbl = npbec+1 to nttx
#---------------------- dfinition des restraint ----------------------------------
restraint
1 to nttx+1 dx dy
#---------------------- dfinition des caractristiques du deck -------------
cara
tbl sx sxtbl sy sytbl iz iztbl vy vytbl wy wytbl
cons
tbl e etbl ro rotbl nu nutbl
#---------------------- dfinition des caractristiques de l'avant bec ---------

cons
bec e ebec ro robec nu nubec
activate bar all
#---------------------- dfinition d'un tableau de calcul contenant les traves
#---------------------- et la distance aire de prfabrication - restraint ----------
dim nptrc(ntrav+1)
for i=1 to ntrav << nptrc(ntrav-i+1) = nptr(i) >>
nptrc(ntrav+1) = npbec
#---------------------- la phase 1 correspond l'avant bec sur le premier restraint
for i=1 to ntrav+1 # boucle sur les traves
<< # numro de la premiere phase : dbut de l'avant bec sur restraint i
# dfinition d'un tableau de calcul contenant les traves
# et la distance aire de prfabrication - restraint (suite)
for j=1 to nptrc(i)+1# boucle sur les phases correspondant l'avant bec
<< # sur la trave i (restraint i et i+1) sur l'restraint
deactivate restraint all
idec = j
for jj=i-1 to 1 step -1
<< # activation des restraint
activate restraint idec
idec = idec+nptrc(jj)
>>
activate restraint idec
for jj=idec+npea to nttx+1 << activate restraint jj >>
list activation
exec load 1
env 1 'enveloppe des phases de poussage'
env 1
load 1
end
>>
>>
#---------------------- dmontage de l'avant bec -------------------------------
deactivate bar bec
list activation
exec load 1
env 1 'enveloppe des phases de poussage'
env 1
load 1
end
#---------------------- output des rsultats -----------------------------------
output 'pseudo.txt'
resu
bar effort stress env 1
end
17.10.2 -VIEWING CALCULATION RESULTS

The drawing of the envelope of bending moments over all phases during pushing is achieved using the
following commands:
geom
effort mz env 1
The drawing of the envelope of shear stresses over all phases during pushing is achieved using the
following commands:
cls
geom
effort ty env 1
Exit ST1 using the command QUIT or QUIT (see p38).
17.10.3 - RESULT FILE

The result file for this example is in the exemples directory of ST1 (pseudo.txt).
Chapter ST1 - List of commands (Examples) 253
18 EXAMPLES OF DATA FILES
All the examples provided with ST1 are not detailed in the documentation.
The ST1 Examples directory contains
18.1 -
FLAT STRUCTURE - CALCULATION OF A CLOSED FRAME ON ELASTIC
GROUND
In this example we are studying the structure under permanent loads. The study of the same structure
under live loads is presented in the following example.
18.1.1 - DATA FILE

#===============================================================================
#
# Exemple de file de donnes pour le calcul d'un cadre ferm
#
# Charges permanentes
#
#===============================================================================
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# description des donnes
#-----------------------------------------------------------
#---------------------- dfinition des nodes ----------------------------------
node
1 0. 0.
2 0. 5.
3 6. 5.
4 6. 0.
#---------------------- dfinition des liaisons des bars ---------------------
bar
1 1 2
2 2 3
3 3 4
4 4 1
#---------------------- dfinition des caractristiques des bars -------------
cara
1,2,3 sx .35 iz 3.57e-3
cara pse
4 sx .37 iz 4.22e-3 zone 1 kfx 10. kfy 2000.
#---------------------- dfinition des constantes des matriaux ----------------

cons
all e 1.e6 ro 2.5
#---------------------- dfinition des chargements -----------------------------
load 1 'weight self du cadre et effet d''une load rpartie'
weight self all
bar
2 uni fy -.300
end
load 2 'pousse des terres unitaire k=1'
bar
1 lin xl 0. 1. rel fx 10. 0.
3 lin xl 0. 1. rel fx 0. -10.
end
#---------------------- dfinition des sections d'tude intrieures aux bars -
etude effort
all se 0. to 1 step 0.1
end
exec load
env 1 'enveloppe de la pousse des terres : coef. : 0.25 et 0.50'
load
2 .25
2 .50
end
env 2 comb 'combinaison ELS des loads permanentes'
load 1
env 1
end
env 3 comb 'combinaison ELU des loads permanentes'
load 1 1.00 1.35
env 1 1.00 1.35
end
#---------------------- dfinition du file de output ------------------------
output 'exemple1.txt'
#---------------------- rappel de la gometrie ---------------------------------
list geom
#---------------------- effort R.D.M. pour toutes les bars -------------------
resu
load 1 env 1,2,3
bar
end

The result file for this example is in the exemples directory of ST1 (exemple1.txt).

The calculations have been made; it is possible to view the results.
At the end of reading the data file, ST1 returns control to the user this is indicated by the writing
prompt > on the screen.
Switching to graphics mode is achieved using the command DESS(cf. P226). The screen will toggle to
graphics mode.
The drawing of bending moments of the ELS envelope is achieved using the following sequence of
commands:
geom
effort mz env 2
centr
The superimposition of the ELU envelope on the drawing above is achieved using the following
commands:
geom
effort mz env 2
centr
Exit ST1 using the command QUIT (see p38).

18.2 - FLAT STRUCTURE - CALCULATION OF A CLOSED FRAME UNDER LIVE

LOADS
In this example we are studying a closed frame solicited by Road A (l), Bc and Bt live loads
The structure is modelled over a width of 1.00 m. Operating expenses are weighted by
coefficients to enable the passage of the real structure to the calculation mock-up (the
calculation of these coefficients is not done by ST1 - see M. Guyon's theory).
The study of live loads involves the calculation of a line of influence for each section, and every
stress studied. This can lead to a relatively long calculation time.
18.2.1 - DATA FILE

#====================== EXEMPLE2.ST1 ===========================================
#
# Exemple de file de donnes pour le calcul d'un cadre ferm
#
# loads permanentes + loads d'exploitation
#
#===============================================================================
title 'Calculation of a closed cadre bridge dead loads + live loads '
#---------------------- dfinition des nodes ----------------------------------
node
1 0. 0.
2 0. 5.
3 6. 5.
4 6. 0.
#---------------------- dfinition des liaisons des bars ---------------------
bar
1 1 2
2 2 3
3 3 4
4 4 1
#---------------------- dfinition des caractristiques des bars -------------
cara
1,2,3 sx .35 iz 3.57e-3
cara pse
4 sx .37 iz 4.22e-3 zone 1 kfx 10. kfy 2000.
cons
all e 1.e6 ro 2.5

load 1 'weight self du cadre et effet d''une load rpartie'
weight self all
bar
2 uni fy -.300
end
load 2 'pousse des terres unitaire k=1'
bar
1 lin xl 0. 1. rel fx 10. 0.
3 lin xl 0. 1. rel fx 0. -10.
end
#---------------------- dfinition des sections d'tude intrieures aux bars -
etude effort
all se 0. to 1 step 0.1
end
exec load
env 1 'enveloppe de la pousse des terres : coef. : 0.25 et 0.50'
load
2 .25
2 .50
end
env 2 comb 'combinaison ELS des loads permanentes'
load 1
env 1
end
env 3 comb 'combinaison ELU des loads permanentes'
load 1 1.00 1.35
env 1 1.00 1.35
end
deck
bar 2
end
live_load 1 'tude de A(l)'
al
pond .720 # pondration (a1*a2*width_lane*coef_gyon)/width_ouvrage
end
live_load 2 'tude de BC'
bc
pond .250 # pondration del_bc*(bc*n_lane*coef_gyon)/width_ouvrage
end
live_load 3 'tude de BC'
bt
pond .220 # pondration del_bt*(bt*n_lane*coef_gyon)/width_ouvrage
end
#---------------------- excution des loads d'exploitation -------------------

exec live_load
env 4 'enveloppe des loads d''exploitation'
live_load 1 to 3
end
env 5 comb 'combinaison ELS loads permanentes + loads d''exploitation'
env 2
env 4 1.2
end
env 6 comb 'combinaison ELU loads permanentes + loads d''exploitation'
env 3
env 4 1.6
end
#---------------------- dfinition du file de output ------------------------
#---------------------- effort R.D.M. dans la traverse suprieure --------------
resu
live_load 1 env 5,6
bar 2
end

18.3 - SPATIAL STRUCTURE - CALCULATION OF A CABLE-STAYED BRIDGE

In this example we are studying a cable-stayed bridge solicited by A (i) and Bc road and pavement
loads (in this example the cable stays have not been adjusted).
The study of the live loads involves the calculation of a line of influence for each section, and
every stress studied, which can lead to relatively long calculation time.
18.3.1 - DATA FILE

#====================== EXEMPLE3.ST1 ===========================================
#
# Exemple de file de donnes pour le calcul d'un pont haubans
#
#===============================================================================
option spatial
title 'Simplify Cable-stayed bridge'
#---------------------- dfinition des pylnes ---------------------------------
node
1 -18.359 -12.405 -6.74
3 -18.359 12.405 -6.74
2 19.095 -12.593 -6.1
4 19.095 12.593 -6.1
5 -0.57 0. 19.
bar
5 de 1 to 3
6 de 2 to 4
gener 4 bar id 1 1 de 1 1 to 5 0
exc
1 or y -0.195
3 or y 0.195
2 or y -0.250
4 or y 0.250
#---------------------- dfinition des abouts ----------------------------------
node
6 -29.506 -3.8 -0.885
20 -30.306 0. -0.909
21 -29.506 0. -0.885
7 -29.506 3.8 -0.885
8 29.494 -3.8 0.885
40 30.294 0. 0.909
39 29.494 0. 0.885
9 29.494 3.8 0.885
bar
10 de 6 to 21
11 de 21 to 7
12 de 8 to 39
13 de 39 to 9

node
22 -26.9802 0. -0.8094
23 -24.4604 0. -0.7338
24 -20.9741 0. -0.6292
25 -17.4877 0. -0.5246
26 -13.9931 0. -0.4198
27 -10.4984 0. -0.31495
28 -6.9905 0. -0.2100
29 -3.4995 0. -0.1050
30 0. 0. 0.
38 26.9802 0. 0.8094
37 24.4604 0. 0.7338
36 20.9741 0. 0.6292
35 17.4877 0. 0.5246
34 13.9931 0. 0.4198
33 10.4984 0. 0.31495
32 6.9905 0. 0.2100
31 3.4995 0. 0.1050
gener 20 bar id 20 1 de 20 1 to 21 1
#---------------------- dfinition des haubans ---------------------------------
gener 8 bar id 40 1 de 23 2 to 5
exc
40 or x -0.1901 z -0.1598 ex x -0.820 z -0.3407
41 or x -0.1371 z -0.1582 ex x -0.803 z -0.9267
42 or x -0.0813 z -0.1565 ex x -0.637 z -1.4372
43 or x -0.0240 z -0.1548 ex x -0.204 z -1.5524
44 or x 0.0333 z -0.1531 ex x 0.296 z -1.5342
45 or x 0.0906 z -0.1514 ex x 0.722 z -1.3964
46 or x 0.1463 z -0.1497 ex x 0.857 z -0.8768
47 or x 0.1993 z -0.1481 ex x 0.839 z -0.2910
#---------------------- dfinition des restraint ----------------------------------
restraint 1,3 el 26924.
0. 5521.
27855. 0. 66523.
0. 707. 0. 8862.
-6512.5 0. -12962. 0. 21025.
0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 10.
restraint 2,4 el
30690.
0. 5521.
-30.425 0. 63493.
0. 707. 0. 8862.
-10435. 0. 19215. 0. 23626.
0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 10.
restraint 6 to 9 el di 240. 240. 46000. 240. 240. 1.
cons
5,6,10 to 13,20 to 39 e 1.2e+06 nu 0.2 ro 2.5 temp 1.e-05
1 to 4 e 20.e+06 nu 0.3 ro 0. temp 1.e-05
40 to 47 e 19.37e+06 nu 0.3 ro 8.5 temp 1.1e-05
#---------------------- dfinition des caractristiques mcaniques -------------
cara
20 to 39 sx 5.922 sy 4. sz 1.5 ix 0.66 iy 0.571 iz 55.74
vy 6.75 wy 6.75 vz 0.99 wz 0.36
40 to 47 sx 0.0033 ix 1.e-06 iy 1.e-06 iz 1.e-06
vy 0.1 wy 0.1 vz 0.1 wz 0.1
1 to 4 sx 0.0828 ix 0.01533 iy 0.00766 iz 0.00766
vy 0.5 wy 0.5 vz 0.5 wz 0.5
5,6 sx 0.96 ix 0.03 iy 0.0153 iz 10.
vy 0.5 wy 0.5 vz 0.5 wz 0.5
10 to 13 sx 2.55 sz 1.7 ix 0.651 iy 0.3692 iz 10.
vy 0.4 wy 0.4 vz 0.5828 wz 0.7172

load 1 'effet du weight self'
weight self all
end
load 2 'gradient thermique 1 degres'
temp 20 to 29 gz 1.
end
#---------------------- excution des chargements ------------------------------
exec load
deck
classe 1
bar 20 to 39
zone_trans
1 width 1.20 # sidewalk de gauche
2 width 7.00 # largeur chargeable
3 width 1.20 # sidewalk de droite
end
#---------------------- dfinition des loads d'exploitation ------------------
live_load 1 'effet de A(l)'
al
zone 2
end
live_load 2 'effet de BC'
bc
zone 2
pond 1.1 # coefficient de majoration dynamique
end
live_load 3 'effet des loads de sidewalk'
trot
zone 1,3
end
#---------------------- excution des loads d'exploitation -------------------
exec live_load 1,2,3
#---------------------- dfinition d'une enveloppe rglementaire ---------------
env 1 'loads de chausse'
live_load 1,2
end
env 2 comb 'combinaison ELS rare'
load 1 # weight self
load 2 0. 6. # gradient thermique 0 ou 6 degrs
env 1 1.2 # loads de chausse
live_load 3 # load de sidewalk
end
#---------------------- output des rsultats -----------------------------------
resu
env 2
restraint bar
end


Once the calculations have been made, it is possible to view the results.
Switching to graphics mode is achieved using the command DESS (see P226). The screen will toggle
to graphics mode.
The drawing of the geometry of the structure is achieved using the following command:
geom
The ELS rare envelope of strains to the upper fibre of the apron is achieved using the following
commands:
vue 0 -1 0
selec bar 20 to 39
stress vyvz env 2

18.4 - FLAT STRUCTURE - EUROCODE 1.2 LOAD

In this example we compare the results of a load model 1 of Eurocode 1.2 with the loads Bc and
Mc120 of F61-II
The Eurocode load calculation time is much longer than other load cases.
18.4.1 - DATA FILE

#====================== EXEMPLE4.ST1 ===========================================
#
# Exemple de file de donnes pour le chargement Eurocode 1.2
#
# Comparaison EC1.2 (LM1) / F61,II (Bc, Mc120)
# Toutes les loads sont exprimes en kN.
#
#===============================================================================
option plane
title 'PSIDP 3 spans EC2'
#---------------------- mthode forfaitaire ------------------------------------
gnewton=9.81 # si 1 calcul en t - si 9.81 calcul en kN
# units t et m sauf spcifications contraires
# longueur de traves 1 et 2
lgtr1=17.5 # m
lgtr2=27 # m
# caractristiques dalle
hdalle1=0.90 # m paisseur
sectiondalle=8.007 # m2 section brute
inertiedalle=0.535 # m4 inertie brute
# fibre suprieure et infrieure de la dalle
fibsup=0.386 # m
fibinf=0.514 # m
# primtre de la dalle sans l'extrados en m
# longrine supposant proteger la dalle
perimetredalle=0*12.3+0.24*2+6.2+2.1*2+2*(0.95**2+0.55**2)**0.5
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
lgt1=lgtr1
lgt2=lgtr1+lgtr2
lgt3=lgtr1+lgtr2+lgtr1
node
1 0.0 0.0
2 lgt1 0.0
3 lgt2 0.0
4 lgt3 0.0
restraint
1 node 1 dy
2 node 2 dx dy
3 node 3 dy
4 node 4 dy
bar
1 1 2
2 2 3
3 3 4
cara
all sx sectiondalle iz inertiedalle vy fibsup wy fibinf # section deck brut
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
etude effort depla
1 se 0.0 to 1 step 0.1 rel
end
#---------------------- bton -------------------------------------------------
# rsistance du beton la compression 28jours
fckk=35 # MPa
fcm=fckk+8
# module bton instantan
Ei28=22*(fcm/10)**0.3*1000 # MPa
#---------------------- bton prcontraint-------------------------------------
hygrom=70 # %
modulinst=Ei28*1000/9.81*gnewton # t/m2*gnewton
mat 1 'EC2 inst'
si (gnewton=1) << E EC2 TM2 FCK fckk >> sinon << E EC2 KNM2 FCK fckk >>
# E modulinst
nu 0.2 # bton non fissur
ro 2.5*gnewton # t/m3*gnewton
temp 1e-5
shrinkage EC2
creep EC2
# H=2*Aire section trans. dalle/primetre dalle
# en contact l'air (sans extrados) en mm
rh hygrom h 2*sectiondalle/perimetredalle*1000
ciment N
end
cons all mat 1 # caractristique instantane
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# nombre de traves necessitant des coefficients de Guyon diffrents
ntrav_etud=1
# coefficient de rpartition trave 1 1m du bord
listcoefrep1=1.9,-0.5
# coefficient de rpartition trave 2 1m du bord
listcoefrep2=2,-0.6
deck
classe 1
classe trafic 2
zone_trans
1 width 0.5
2 width 11
3 width 0.8
bar 1 to 3
ldif 1*(0.08+0.45) # diffusion des impacts
# ep chausse min + 1/2 ep hourdis
# ldif ne s'applique quaux impacts des camions
# et step aux loads reparties (AL,UDL,...)
rep_trans
kbarre 1,3 ktrans listcoefrep1
kbarre 2 ktrans listcoefrep2
end
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
live_load 1 'LM1 cara'
zone 2
lm1 cara
pond gnewton/9.81 # pond t/kN
end
live_load 2 'LM1 freq'
zone 2
lm1 freq
end
live_load 10 'Mc120'
mc120
zone 2
pond 1.12*gnewton # coef. dyn.
end
live_load 11 'AL'
al
zone 2
pond gnewton*1.2
end
live_load 12 'Bc'
bc
zone 2
pond 1.1*gnewton*1.2 # coeff dyn *pond t/t
end
live_load 13 'Bt'
bt
zone 2
pond 1.1*gnewton*1.2 # coeffdyn*pond t/t
end
exec live_load 1,2,10 to 13
live_load 3 'LM3'
zone 2
lm3 vs_1800_200
zonevs 2 yvs 1 7 abs pondvs 1.1
lm1 lgexclu 25
end
exec live_load 3
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
env 31 'LM1 cara'
live_load 1 1.0
end
env 32 'LM1 freq'
live_load 2 1.0
end
env 35 'A B Mc120'
live_load 10,11,12,13
end
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
resu
list live_load 1 to 3
end

The results file for this example can be found in the ST1 examples directory (example 4.txt)

Once the calculations have been made, it is possible to view the results.
Switching to graphics mode is achieved using the command DESS (see P226). The screen will toggle
to graphics mode.
The drawing of displacements along the Y axis is achieved using the following commands:
depla DY live_load 1
depla DY live_load 11
.
18.5 - FLAT STRUCTURE - PRE-TENSION

Here we present an example of a pre-tensioned calculation with heat treatment.
18.5.1 - DATA FILE

#====================== EXEMPLE5.ST1 ===========================================
#
# Exemple de file de donnes pour la prtension
#
#
#===============================================================================
OPTION SPATIAL
TITLE 'traitement_thermique_ec2'
output 'traitement_thermique_ec2.txt' non pagine
#-----------------------------------------------
NODE
1 X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0
2 X 10 Y 0.000 Z 0
3 X 20 Y 0.000 Z 0
#-----------------------------------------------
BAR
GENER 2 BAR ID 11 1 DE 1 1 TO 2 1
END
#-----------------------------------------------
RESTRAINT
11 NODE 1 DY DZ
12 NODE 2 RX
13 NODE 3 DY DZ
22 NODE 2 DX RX
END
#-----------------------------------------------
STUDY EFFORT DEPLA

TOUTES SE 0. TO 1. step 0.1
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATERIAU 1 'Beton'
E EC2 TM2 FCK 30

NU 0.2 RO 2.5
TEMP 1e-05
SHRINKAGE EC2
CREEP EC2
RH 55 H 1250 CIMENT N
t_therm fcmp 35 lambda 0.2 dtp 1,1,1 theta 40,60,40
END
#-----------------------------------------------
CARA 11,12 SX 10 IX 0.1 IY 10 IZ 10 VY 1 WY 1 VZ 1 WZ 1
CONS 11,12 MAT 1

#-----------------------------------------------
PREC 11 '1 cable 19 T15 S'

section 1e-3
tension 1000*100
pretension lineaire lg_scel 2
e 2e7
rg 2000*100 r1000 2.5
END
section 1e-3
tension 1000*100
pretension bilineaire lg_scel 1 2 coef 0.6
e 2e7
rg 2000*100 r1000 2.5
END
section 1e-3
tension 1000*100
pretension parabol lg_scel 3
e 2e7
rg 2000*100 r1000 2.5
END
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CABLE 101
PREC 11
BAR 11,12
TRACE INTERIEUR
X 0 Y 0 Z 0
X 10 Y 0 Z 0
X 20 Y 0 Z 0
END
CABLE 102
PREC 12
LG_GAINE OR 2 EX 2
BAR 11,12
TRACE INTERIEUR
X 0 Y 0 Z 0
X 10 Y 0 Z 0
X 20 Y 0 Z 0
END
CABLE 103
PREC 13
STEP_CABLE 0.5
LG_GAINE OR 2
BAR 11,12
TRACE INTERIEUR
X 0 Y 0 Z 0
X 10 Y 0 Z 0
X 20 Y 0 Z 0
END
#-----------------------------------------------
PHASAGE 101 'Mise tension pretension cab 101 lin'
ACTIVATE RESTRAINT 11,12,13

ACTIVATE RESTRAINT 22
DATE 0
ACTIVATE BAR 11 TO 12 AGE 0
TENSION_BENCH CABLES 101
DATE 5 # date superieure a la date de end de cure
RELEASE_BENCH CABLES 101
state 21 'mise tension'
DATE 100
LOAD
BAR 11,12 UNI FZ -100
END
END PHASAGE
EXEC PHASAGE
#-----------------------------------------------
load 101 'cable 101'
cable 101 tension
end
load 104 'cable ret'

cable 101 loss shrinkage 0.0001
end
load 105 'cable relax'
cable 101 loss relax 0.5
end
load 106 'cable uni'
cable 101 loss uni 100
end
load 107 'cable 100 loss inst'
cable 101 loss inst
end
load 110 'cable 101 '
cable 101 tension loss shrinkage 0.0001 relax 0.5 uni 100
end
EXEC LOAD
#-----------------------------------------------
list cara cable

list prec
list cable
resu
state bar 11,12
state cable
phasage cable
load 110 bar 11,12
load 110 cable
end

--- CARACTERISTIQUES DES CABLES DE PRECONTRAINTE ---
Cable Title Precontrainte Tension Longueur Deviation Cf.Trans. Allong.

101 11 Or Ex 20.000 0.000 1.000 0.100
102 12 Or Ex 20.000 0.000 1.000 0.100
103 13 Or Ex 20.000 0.000 1.000 0.100
--- DISPOSITIF DE PRECONTRAINTE : 11 -- 1 cable 19 T15 S ---
. Section du cable : 0.10000E-02

. Coefficient de frottement par unite d'angle : 0.0000
. Coefficient de frottement par unite de longueur : 0.0000
. Rentree du cone d'ancrage : 0.0000
. Tension : 0.10000E+06
. Module d'Young : 0.20000E+08
. Limite de rupture des aciers : 0.20000E+06
. Perte par relaxation a 1000 heures : 2.5000
. Cable avec Pretension - scellement lineaire
. Longueur de scellement pretension : 2.0000

. Tension : 0.10000E+06
. Cable avec Pretension - scellement bilineaire
. Longueurs de scellement pretension : 1.0000 2.0000
. Coefficient sur contrainte maxi loi bilineaire scellement : 0.60000

. Tension : 0.10000E+06
. Cable avec Pretension - scellement parabolique
. Longueur de scellement pretension : 3.0000
--- CABLE : 101 ---
. Dispositif de precontrainte : 11
. Type de mise en tension : Or Ex
. Pas de decoupage : 0.25000
. Longueur : 20.000
. Deviation angulaire totale : 0.0000
. Coefficient de transmission : 1.0000
. Allongement a la mise en tension : 0.10000
. Liste des bars support : 11 12
-- trace interieur --
X Y Z
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
10.000 0.0000 0.0000
20.000 0.0000 0.0000
--- CABLE : 102 ---
ST1 - Liste des commandes (Examples) 271

. Longueur de gainage pretension : OR: 2.0000 EX: 2.0000
. Longueur : 20.000
X Y Z
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
10.000 0.0000 0.0000
20.000 0.0000 0.0000
--- CABLE : 103 ---
. Longueur de gainage pretension : OR: 2.0000 EX: 0.0000
. Longueur : 20.000
X Y Z
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
10.000 0.0000 0.0000
20.000 0.0000 0.0000
etc
18.6 - FLAT STRUCTURE EIGEN MODES AND SPECTRUM

Here we present an example of calculation of eigen modes and effect of spectrum.
18.6.1 - DATA FILE

#===============================================================================
option plane
TITRE 'nrj Eurocode plan'
lg = 1/(2**0.5)
node
21 0.0 0.0
22 1.0*lg 1.0*lg
23 2.0*lg 2.0*lg
24 3.0*lg 3.0*lg
# generation barre
bar 20 21 22
bar 21 22 23
bar 22 23 24
#cons tout e 1
cara 20 sx 264000 iz 264000*3
cara 21 sx 176000 iz 176000*3
cara 22 sx 88000 iz 88000*3
damping 10
pond 0.01
energy ksi 5
end
damping 11
pond 0.01
energy ksi 2
end
cons 20 e 1 ro 1400/264000*10 g_dyn 10 damping 10

mass eigen
bar 20,21,22
end
restraint 1 node 21 dx dy rz
restraint 2 node 22
restraint 3 node 23
restraint 4 node 24
study effort displa

all se 0 to 1 step 1 rel
exec mode
#--------------
spectrum 1
pond 9.81
EUROCODE
HORIZONTAL AX 0.1 S 1 ST 1.2 PERIOD 0.01 0.2 2.5 4
VERTICAL AX 0.1*0.9 S 1.1 PERIOD 0.01 0.2 2.0 3
end
spectrum 10 response
spectrum 1
CQC
POND X 1
end
spectrum 20 response
spectrum 1
CQC
POND Y 1
end
exec spectrum reponse 10,20
env 10 comb
spectre 10 1.0 -1.0
spectrum 20 1.0 -1.0
end
#--------------
spectrum 100 reponse
spectrum 1
CQC
POND X 1 Y 1
end
spectrum 1
CQC
POND X 1 Y -1
end
spectrum 1
CQC
POND X -1 Y 1
end
spectrum 1
CQC
POND X -1 Y -1
end
exec spectrum reponse 100 a 103
env 100 comb

spectrum 100 1.0 -1.0
end
env 101 comb
spectrum 101 1.0 -1.0
end
env 102 comb
spectrum 102 1.0 -1.0
end
env 103 comb
spectrum 103 1.0 -1.0
end
env 1000
env 100
env 101
env 102
env 103
end
#
###################################################
output 'example7.txt' non pagine
list damping
#list spectrum
RESU
MODE FREQUENCE
SPECTRUM 10,20 bar effort
ENV 10,1000 bar effort
END

The result file for this example is in the exemples directory of ST1 (example7.txt).
--- AMORTISSEMENTS DYNAMIQUES ---
Nombre de definition d amortissement : 2
* Numero Amortissement : 10
.ponderation : 0.10000E-01
.fraction d amortissement (calcul energie) : 5.0000 %
Nombre de modes amortis directement : 0
* Numero Amortissement : 11
.ponderation : 0.10000E-01
.fraction d amortissement (calcul energie) : 2.0000 %
Nombre de modes amortis directement : 0
* Amortissement modal moyen calcul a partir de l energie de deformation des structures
amorties
.numero du mode : 1
.periode du mode : 1.0003 sec
.fraction d amortissement du mode : 3.9883 %
.numero du mode : 2
.numero du mode : 3
.numero du mode : 4
.numero du mode : 5
.numero du mode : 6
.periode du mode : 0.63057E-01 sec

---> Direction 1
---> Direction 2

Facteur Participation Mod -0.21120E-04 Masse Modale : 0.44606E-09
Taux Participation Modale 0.63723E-11 % Cumul : 84.167 %
---> Direction 1
---> Direction 2

---> Direction 1
---> Direction 2

---> Direction 1
---> Direction 2

---> Direction 1
---> Direction 2
Periode 0.63057E-01 sec Frequence : 15.859 Hz

---> Direction 1
---> Direction 2
--- RESULTATS REPONSE SPECTRALE : 10 ---
Barre Abscisse N Ty Mz
20 0.000 1371. 1371. 2747.
20 1.000 1371. 1371. 1505.
21 0.000 1068. 1068. 1505.

21 1.000 1068. 1068. 547.3
22 0.000 547.3 547.3 547.3

22 1.000 547.3 547.3 0.5546E-03
--- RESULTATS REPONSE SPECTRALE : 20 ---

20 0.000 1357. 1357. 2720.
20 1.000 1357. 1357. 1490.
21 0.000 1057. 1057. 1490.

21 1.000 1057. 1057. 541.8
22 0.000 541.8 541.8 541.8

22 1.000 541.8 541.8 0.5490E-03
--- RESULTATS DE L'ENVELOPPE : 10 ---

20 0.000 Min -2727.7 -2727.7 -5466.6
Max 2727.7 2727.7 5466.6
20 1.000 Min -2727.7 -2727.7 -2995.8
Max 2727.7 2727.7 2995.8
21 0.000 Min -2124.4 -2124.4 -2995.8

Max 2124.4 2124.4 2995.8
21 1.000 Min -2124.4 -2124.4 -1089.2
Max 2124.4 2124.4 1089.2
22 0.000 Min -1089.2 -1089.2 -1089.2

Max 1089.2 1089.2 1089.2
22 1.000 Min -1089.2 -1089.2 -.11036E-02
Max 1089.2 1089.2 0.11036E-02

20 0.000 Min -2727.7 -2727.7 -5466.6
Max 2727.7 2727.7 5466.6
20 1.000 Min -2727.7 -2727.7 -2995.8
Max 2727.7 2727.7 2995.8
21 0.000 Min -2124.4 -2124.4 -2995.8

Max 2124.4 2124.4 2995.8
21 1.000 Min -2124.4 -2124.4 -1089.2
Max 2124.4 2124.4 1089.2
22 0.000 Min -1089.2 -1089.2 -1089.2

Max 1089.2 1089.2 1089.2
22 1.000 Min -1089.2 -1089.2 -.11036E-02
Max 1089.2 1089.2 0.11036E-02
18.7 - SPATIAL STRUCTURE TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS

Here we present an example of calculation of a linear elastic time history.
18.7.1 - DATA FILE

#===============================================================================
option spatial
TITLE 'time history 3D'
node
21 0.0 0.0 0
22 1.0 0.0 0
23 2.0 0.0 0
# generation bar
bar 20 21 22
bar 21 22 23
cara 20 sx 18 ix 1000 iy 18 iz 18 vy 1 wy 1 vz 1 wz 1
cara 21 sx 18 ix 1000 iy 18 iz 18 vy 1 wy 1 vz 1 wz 1
restraint 1 node 21 dx dy dz rx ry rz
restraint 2 node 22 rx rz
restraint 3 node 23 rx rz
damping 10
auto mass 1.3 stiffness 0.001
pond 1
end
cons 20 e 1e6 ro 20000 g_dyn 1 damping 10

cons 21 e 1e6 ro 20000 g_dyn 1 damping 10
masse eigen
bar all
bar 20,21 sup uni 10000
end
contrg 10
20,21 N 1 MY 1
end
accelerogram 100 'test titre histo'

contrg 10
# beta 0
method 1 #alpha -0.3
time_step 0.01
pond 1
acceleration
ax -18 ay -18.0 az -18.0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
ax 0.0 ay 0.0 az 0
end
study effort displa

all se 0 a 1 step 1 rel
exec history 100

#
env 10 comb
contrg 10
history 100
end
###################################################
output 'example8.txt' non pagine
RESU
env 10 bar effort contrg
end
resu
HISTORY BAR contrg effort
END

==> Resultats concomitants des extrema de la contrainte generalisee : 10

Barre Abscisse N Ty Tz Mx My Mz
20 0.000 Min 36788. -61748. 57264. 0.0000 -62588. 30874.
Max -27876. 13088. -37630. 0.0000 45696. -6544.2
20 1.000 Min -29246. -49847. -30133. 0.0000 7466.6 -24923.
Max 36788. -61748. 57264. 0.0000 -5323.9 -30874.
21 0.000 Min 12000. -20153. 32747. 0.0000 -33098. 10076.

Max 20705. -19434. 5409.9 0.0000 -5276.7 9717.0
21 1.000 Min -12074. 8735.1 -8110.1 0.0000 -51.451 4367.5
Max 20705. -19434. 5409.9 0.0000 133.28 -9717.0
Contrainte 10
==> Resultats concomitants des extrema de la contrainte generalisee : 10

Barre Abscisse 10
20 0.000 Min -25799.
Max 17821.
20 1.000 Min -21779.
Max 31465.
21 0.000 Min -21098.

Max 15429.
21 1.000 Min -12125.
Max 20839.
--- RESULTATS DE L HISTORIQUE : 100 --- test titre histo
Sollicitation : K*DU+C*VU+M*AU
Barre : 20
Temps Abscisse N Ty Tz Mx My Mz
0.10000E-01 0.0000 7655.9 64278. 32185. 0.0000 -22386. -32139.
0.20000E-01 0.0000 21564. 0.12101E+06 48743. 0.0000 -42167. -60503.
0.30000E-01 0.0000 31910. 58971. 11491. 0.0000 -31908. -29485.
0.40000E-01 0.0000 37743. -43584. -2432.3 0.0000 -30793. 21792.
0.50000E-01 0.0000 39127. -97746. 32946. 0.0000 -51422. 48873.
0.60000E-01 0.0000 36788. -61748. 57264. 0.0000 -62588. 30874.
0.70000E-01 0.0000 31624. 30679. 32029. 0.0000 -44794. -15339.
0.80000E-01 0.0000 24318. 87330. -1883.7 0.0000 -19527. -43665.
0.90000E-01 0.0000 15259. 54929. -1494.2 0.0000 -9986.5 -27464.

0.10000 0.0000 4743.4 -23626. 14387. 0.0000 -7394.8 11813.
0.11000 0.0000 -6688.8 -70303. 3696.8 0.0000 8528.7 35151.
0.12000 0.0000 -18036. -49922. -25914. 0.0000 32907. 24961.
0.13000 0.0000 -27876. 13088. -37630. 0.0000 45696. -6544.2
0.14000 0.0000 -34688. 59668. -24439. 0.0000 42746. -29834.
0.15000 0.0000 -37315. 46799. -15879. 0.0000 38806. -23399.
0.16000 0.0000 -35345. -8769.1 -24483. 0.0000 40437. 4384.6
0.17000 0.0000 -29246. -49847. -30133. 0.0000 37600. 24923.
0.10000E-01 1.0000 7655.9 64278. 32185. 0.0000 9798.1 32139.
0.20000E-01 1.0000 21564. 0.12101E+06 48743. 0.0000 6575.6 60503.
0.30000E-01 1.0000 31910. 58971. 11491. 0.0000 -20417. 29485.
0.40000E-01 1.0000 37743. -43584. -2432.3 0.0000 -33225. -21792.
0.50000E-01 1.0000 39127. -97746. 32946. 0.0000 -18475. -48873.
0.60000E-01 1.0000 36788. -61748. 57264. 0.0000 -5323.9 -30874.
0.70000E-01 1.0000 31624. 30679. 32029. 0.0000 -12765. 15339.
0.80000E-01 1.0000 24318. 87330. -1883.7 0.0000 -21411. 43665.
0.90000E-01 1.0000 15259. 54929. -1494.2 0.0000 -11481. 27464.
0.10000 1.0000 4743.4 -23626. 14387. 0.0000 6992.3 -11813.
0.11000 1.0000 -6688.8 -70303. 3696.8 0.0000 12225. -35151.
0.12000 1.0000 -18036. -49922. -25914. 0.0000 6993.2 -24961.
0.13000 1.0000 -27876. 13088. -37630. 0.0000 8066.1 6544.2
0.14000 1.0000 -34688. 59668. -24439. 0.0000 18307. 29834.
0.15000 1.0000 -37315. 46799. -15879. 0.0000 22927. 23399.
0.16000 1.0000 -35345. -8769.1 -24483. 0.0000 15954. -4384.6
0.17000 1.0000 -29246. -49847. -30133. 0.0000 7466.6 -24923.
Temps Abscisse contrainte gen 10

0.10000E-01 0.0000 -14731.
0.20000E-01 0.0000 -20603.
0.30000E-01 0.0000 2.1353
0.40000E-01 0.0000 6950.9
0.50000E-01 0.0000 -12295.
0.60000E-01 0.0000 -25799.
0.70000E-01 0.0000 -13170.
0.80000E-01 0.0000 4791.1
0.90000E-01 0.0000 5272.1
0.10000 0.0000 -2651.4
0.11000 0.0000 1839.8
0.12000 0.0000 14871.
0.13000 0.0000 17821.
0.14000 0.0000 8057.8
0.15000 0.0000 1491.5
0.16000 0.0000 5091.7
0.17000 0.0000 8353.9

0.10000E-01 1.0000 17454.
0.20000E-01 1.0000 28140.

0.30000E-01 1.0000 11493.
0.40000E-01 1.0000 4518.6
0.50000E-01 1.0000 20651.
0.60000E-01 1.0000 31465.
0.70000E-01 1.0000 18859.
0.80000E-01 1.0000 2907.5
0.90000E-01 1.0000 3777.9
0.10000 1.0000 11736.
0.11000 1.0000 5536.6
0.12000 1.0000 -11043.
0.13000 1.0000 -19810.
0.14000 1.0000 -16381.
0.15000 1.0000 -14387.
0.16000 1.0000 -19391.
0.17000 1.0000 -21779.
Barre : 21
0.10000E-01 0.0000 353.80 14117. -9166.8 0.0000 9239.5 -7058.4
0.20000E-01 0.0000 2110.0 44171. -6677.4 0.0000 7037.4 -22086.
0.30000E-01 0.0000 6161.9 37138. 20351. 0.0000 -20549. -18569.
0.40000E-01 0.0000 12000. -20153. 32747. 0.0000 -33098. 10076.
0.50000E-01 0.0000 17656. -49135. 18326. 0.0000 -18347. 24567.
0.60000E-01 0.0000 20705. -19434. 5409.9 0.0000 -5276.7 9717.0
0.70000E-01 0.0000 19511. 16119. 12616. 0.0000 -12557. -8059.3
0.80000E-01 0.0000 14062. 29675. 21222. 0.0000 -21505. -14837.
0.90000E-01 0.0000 5979.0 23543. 11258. 0.0000 -11326. -11772.
0.10000 0.0000 -2259.7 -5217.3 -6797.2 0.0000 6880.0 2608.6
0.11000 0.0000 -8455.5 -32122. -12147. 0.0000 12326. 16061.
0.12000 0.0000 -11591. -22609. -6889.1 0.0000 6823.3 11304.
0.13000 0.0000 -12074. 8735.1 -8110.1 0.0000 8058.6 -4367.5
0.14000 0.0000 -11255. 24459. -18077. 0.0000 18149. -12229.
0.15000 0.0000 -10537. 16978. -22732. 0.0000 22907. -8489.0
0.16000 0.0000 -10566. -2173.9 -15766. 0.0000 15827. 1087.0
0.17000 0.0000 -10935. -19566. -7475.1 0.0000 7423.4 9783.1
0.10000E-01 1.0000 353.80 14117. -9166.8 0.0000 72.702 7058.4
0.20000E-01 1.0000 2110.0 44171. -6677.4 0.0000 360.00 22086.
0.30000E-01 1.0000 6161.9 37138. 20351. 0.0000 -198.41 18569.
0.40000E-01 1.0000 12000. -20153. 32747. 0.0000 -351.08 -10076.
0.50000E-01 1.0000 17656. -49135. 18326. 0.0000 -21.148 -24567.
0.60000E-01 1.0000 20705. -19434. 5409.9 0.0000 133.28 -9717.0
0.70000E-01 1.0000 19511. 16119. 12616. 0.0000 58.581 8059.3
0.80000E-01 1.0000 14062. 29675. 21222. 0.0000 -283.55 14837.
0.90000E-01 1.0000 5979.0 23543. 11258. 0.0000 -68.630 11772.
0.10000 1.0000 -2259.7 -5217.3 -6797.2 0.0000 82.752 -2608.6
0.11000 1.0000 -8455.5 -32122. -12147. 0.0000 178.88 -16061.
0.12000 1.0000 -11591. -22609. -6889.1 0.0000 -65.786 -11304.
0.13000 1.0000 -12074. 8735.1 -8110.1 0.0000 -51.451 4367.5

0.14000 1.0000 -11255. 24459. -18077. 0.0000 72.239 12229.
0.15000 1.0000 -10537. 16978. -22732. 0.0000 174.41 8489.0
0.16000 1.0000 -10566. -2173.9 -15766. 0.0000 60.718 -1087.0
0.17000 1.0000 -10935. -19566. -7475.1 0.0000 -51.711 -9783.0

0.10000E-01 0.0000 9593.3
0.20000E-01 0.0000 9147.4
0.30000E-01 0.0000 -14387.
0.40000E-01 0.0000 -21098.
0.50000E-01 0.0000 -690.42
0.60000E-01 0.0000 15429.
0.70000E-01 0.0000 6954.2
0.80000E-01 0.0000 -7443.3
0.90000E-01 0.0000 -5347.4
0.10000 0.0000 4620.2
0.11000 0.0000 3870.6
0.12000 0.0000 -4767.7
0.13000 0.0000 -4015.0
0.14000 0.0000 6894.2
0.15000 0.0000 12370.
0.16000 0.0000 5260.7
0.17000 0.0000 -3511.6

0.10000E-01 1.0000 426.51
0.20000E-01 1.0000 2470.0
0.30000E-01 1.0000 5963.5
0.40000E-01 1.0000 11649.
0.50000E-01 1.0000 17635.
0.60000E-01 1.0000 20839.
0.70000E-01 1.0000 19570.
0.80000E-01 1.0000 13778.
0.90000E-01 1.0000 5910.4
0.10000 1.0000 -2177.0
0.11000 1.0000 -8276.6
0.12000 1.0000 -11657.
0.13000 1.0000 -12125.
0.14000 1.0000 -11183.
0.15000 1.0000 -10362.
0.16000 1.0000 -10506.
0.17000 1.0000 -10987.
18.8 - FLAT STRUCTURE LINEAR ELASTIC BUCKLING

Here we present an example of calculation of eigen modes and effect of spectrum.
18.8.1 - DATA FILE

#===============================================================================
OPTION PLANE
TITLE 'CRITICAL LOAD'
lg=10
kl=2
ndiv=10
NODE
FOR i=1 A ndiv+1
<<
i X 0 Y lg*(i-1)/ndiv
>>
END
RESTRAINT
1 DX DY RZ
END
BAR
FOR i=1 A ndiv
<<
i DE i A i+1
>>
END
CONS ALL E 1
CARA ALL SX 1 IZ 1
STUDY EFFORT DISPLA ALL SE 0 TO 1 STEP 0.1
LOAD 1
NODE ndiv+1 FY -(pi**2)/((kl*lg)**2)
END
EXEC LOAD 1
EXEC BUCKLING 2 VAR LOAD 1 #CTE LOAD 0
OUTPUT 'example9.txt' non pagine
RESU
buckling mode displa
end

--- RESULTATS DU MODE CRITIQUE : 1 ---
Effort critique : 1.0000

Facteur Participation Modale : -0.47753E-02 Rigidite Modale : 0.22803E-04
Rigidite Modale Generalisee 1.0000
Taux Participation Modale : 0.27726E-01 % Cumul : 0.27726E-01 %
Noeud DX DY RZ
1 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
2 -0.22315 0.0000 0.44538
3 -0.88710 0.0000 0.87979
4 -1.9755 0.0000 1.2925
5 -3.4615 0.0000 1.6735
6 -5.3087 0.0000 2.0132
7 -7.4714 0.0000 2.3033
8 -9.8964 0.0000 2.5367
9 -12.524 0.0000 2.7077
10 -15.290 0.0000 2.8120
11 -18.125 0.0000 2.8471
--- RESULTATS DU MODE CRITIQUE : 2 ---
Effort critique : 9.0006

Facteur Participation Modale : 0.14177E-01 Rigidite Modale : 0.20099E-03
Rigidite Modale Generalisee 1.0000
Taux Participation Modale : 0.24437 % Cumul : 0.27210 %
Noeud DX DY RZ
1 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
2 0.65863 0.0000 -1.2928
3 2.4908 0.0000 -2.3035
4 5.0970 0.0000 -2.8121
5 7.9092 0.0000 -2.7078
6 10.314 0.0000 -2.0134
7 11.788 0.0000 -0.87992
8 12.010 0.0000 0.44545
9 10.930 0.0000 1.6736
10 8.7851 0.0000 2.5369
11 6.0421 0.0000 2.8472
ST1 - Appendices 285
Part ST1 - Appendices 286
IV
APPENDICES
Appendix ST1 - Appendices 288
A DESCRIPTION OF THE
PARAMETERS FILE
The ST1.par file is the file that contains all the parameterisable data for ST1:
The scaling of ST1 internal tables ST1
The dictionary of keywords (keywords used can be changed by the user, however, a
modification of these keywords results in a mismatch between the modified ST1 program and
the manual)
definition of certain usual constants
the default structure calculator parameters
colours and types of drawing lines
The limits to change in the parameters file are defined in the Chapter
programme
p25.
Limites du
EXTRACT FROM PARAMETER FILE

st1-v23
300 # taille memoire en mega-octets
128 # taille nb_lign_index - BASEIND modifier pour gros projets(ref:64)
***CEREMA*** # Nom SOCIETE (limite 12 caracteres)
7 'starbcl'
7 'starlst'
20 # nombre maximum de fichiers ouverts simultanement
256 # longueur maximale d'un nom de fichier
12 # nombre maximum de boucles actives simultanement
128 # longueur maximale d'une ligne de fichier < 256
128 # longueur maximale d'un mot < 256
20 # longueur du buffer de liste (nombre de reels )
3000 # nombre maximum de cles du dictionnaire
0 # assimilation des majuscles et des minuscules ( 0:non 1:oui )
0 # code de representation des caracteres ( 0:ASCII 1:EBCDIC )
5000 # nombre maximum de variables
500 # nombre maximum de tableaux
20 # hauteur des piles dans les expression arith. ( voir notice )
35 # % sur le total memoire affecte a la zone primaire
50 # nombre maximum groupes de variables : $var
0 # titre sortie cable (0: titre / charg - 1: titre /cable)
100 # Nombre de modes propres maximum (attention ne pas trop augmenter :memoire)
50 # Nombre d iteration calcul modes propres maximum methode ss espace
25 # Nombre de modes critiques maximum (attention ne pas trop augmenter :memoire)
0 # prise en compte du raidissage de KG par l'effort de traction (0:non 1:oui)
0 # Sortie Matrice Rigidite et Masse dans fichier tampon (0 : non, 1:oui)
#-definition des mots cle internes----------------------------------------
...
END
#-definition des constantes
pi=acos(-1)
#---------------------------------------------------------
#-definition des parametres du calculateur de structures
LG_LISTE 20000 #-longueur maximale des listes externes
LG_CHAINE 256
LONG ENTIER 9
LONG REEL 12
SEP_LISTE ','
MAX_MENU 50 # dessin
#---------------------------------------------------------
PARA_STRUCTURE 20000 40000 2000 #-nombre maximum de : nodes, bars, restraint
OPTION PLANE #-definition de l'option de calcul par defaut
MX_ETUDE 80000 #-nombre maximum de sections d'etude
PAGINATION #-definition de la pagination (fichier de output)
ASC_PAGE 12 #-code ascii de saut de page (12 ou 49)
MAX_LIGNE 100 #-nombre maximum de ligne par page
END
#---------------------------------------------------------
ERREUR 'erreur.txt' #-nom du fichier de rappel des erreurs
#---------------------------------------------------------
EUROCODE
PSI FREQ TS 0.75 UDL 0.4
WEIGHT TS 300.0, 200.0, 100.0 UDL 9.0, 2.5
CLASSE 1 AJUSTEMENT TS 1.0, 1.0 UDL 1.0, 1.2 LM2 0.8
END
#---------------------------------------------------------
w640_480 = 1 #-ecran
w800_600 = 2
w1024_768 = 3
w1280_1024 = 4
ECRAN w1024_768 #-definition du type d'ecran graphique
...
IMPRIMANTE 'lpt1'
#---------------------------------------------------------
...
END_PARA
Appendix ST1 - Appendices 291
B
B1 - INSTANT EFFECTS OF PRE-STRESSING
CALCULATION PRINCIPLES
The line drawing of a pre-stressing cable tensioning is shown by cubic sections parameterised by the
curved abscissa of the cable. This line is discretised following a variable pitch depending on the curve
of the cable. This discretisation leads to a broken line which is used to build a structural load
equivalent to the effect of pre-stressing reinforcement. This method is known as the external method.
B1.1 - STRESSES IN THE REINFORCEMENTS ON TENSIONING

Stresses in the prestressing steel are measured on tensioning taking into account the following
instantaneous losses:
voltage loss due to friction on the reinforcement
tension losses at anchorage
tension losses by non-simultaneous tensioning (case of phasing)
B1.1.1 - TENSION LOSS DUE TO FRICTION ON THE REINFORCEMENT
The tensionp0 of a prestressing reinforcement at the curved line abscissa s when it is placed in tension
is determined by the formula:
p 0 ( s) pa e f s
with:
pa tension at the nearest active anchor
e base of natural logarithms
S curved line distance from the nearest active anchor section
total angular deviation of the cable over distance s
friction coefficient curve (rd-1) BPEL notion
coefficient of tension drop per unit length (m -1) BPEL Notion
friction coefficient curve (rd-1) Eurocode notion
k coefficient of tension drop per unit length (m -1)
Eurocode Notion (NB: k=)
B1.1.2 - TENSION LOSSES AT ANCHORAGE
The shift of the reinforcement in relation to its anchor results in a loss of tension which is evaluated as
follows.
We determine the extreme abscissa s1 propagating the effect of withdrawal at an anchorage using the
formula:
s1
1
p 0 s p s1 e
f s1 s s1 s
g ds
Ep 0
from the above equation we deduce the loss of pre-stress for any section between the anchor and
section s1:
f ( s1 s ) s1 s
( s) p 0 ( s) p ( s1 ) e
with:
g anchor input (value depending on the pre-stress device)
Ep modulus of elasticity of pre-stressing steel
p0(s) stress in the reinforcement before losses by anchoring withdrawal

p(s1) stress in the reinforcement of section s1 after losses by anchoring
withdrawal
For a short cable with two active anchors, it may happen that the areas of propagation of the
anchoring withdrawal effect overlap. In this case, the order in which the anchors are released
intervenes in the value of the loss of pre-stress (see command CABLE p114).
tension sans perte instantane tension sans perte instantane
tension avant recul d'ancrage tension avant recul d'ancrage
tension aprs recul d'ancrage tension aprs recul d'ancrage
Left anchoring Right anchoring Left anchoring Right anchoring

Case of a cable tensioned at one end Case of a long cable stretched at both ends
tension sans perte instantane tension sans perte instantane
tension avant recul d'ancrage tension avant recul d'ancrage
tension aprs recul d'ancrage tension aprs recul d'ancrage
Left anchoring released 1st Right anchoring Left anchoring Right anchoring released 2nd
Case of a short cable stretched at both ends
B1.1.3 - TENSION LOSSES BY NON-SIMULTANEOUS TENSIONING (CASE OF PHASING)

Tension losses by non-simultaneous tensioning are evaluated from the calculation of the deformation
of the elements during tensioning (see below).
B1.2 - EFFECT OF DEFORMATIONS ON THE PRE-STRESSING ELEMENTS (CASE OF

PHASING)
The deformation of a bar containing pre-stressing reinforcements causes a variation in the tensions of
the reinforcements attached to it.
For each cable section ST1 calculates:
the deformation P of the element at the cable's centre of gravity
the variation of tension in the cable by the formula:
p E p p
External loading due to variation in tension in the cable
B2 - DELAYED EFFECTS - CASE OF LOADING

Within a load (see command LOAD p100) the delayed effects can only be taken into account in a
simplified manner. To incorporate these effects more accurately you need to use phasing (see
command PHASAGE p163).
B2.1 - CONSIDERATION OF DELAYED EFFECTS IN MATERIALS

The inclusion of delayed deformations in materials (shrinkage, creep) can be achieved by a distributed
deformation type load (see command DEFOR p112).
B2.2 - CONSIDERATION OF DELAYED EFFECTS IN PRE-STRESSING REINFORCEMENTS

Taking into account deferred losses in the pre-stressing reinforcements is achieved by means of
simplified rules depending on the rules used as shown below.
LOSS OF PRE-STRESS DUE TO BPEL91 SHRINKAGE
The loss of pre-stress due to shrinkage is evaluated (see Chap BPEL91. 3.3,21) using the formula:
r E p . r
with:
r shrinkage deformation
For r = 2.10-4, 40MP4 or about 3% of the instantaneous tension.

r
LOSS OF PRE-STRESS DUE TO BPEL91 CREEP
The loss of pre-stress due to creep is evaluated (see Chap BPEL91. 3.3,21) using the formula:
E
fl 2.5 b
p
Eij
with:
b final stress in concrete at reinforcement
Eij modulus of concrete elasticity during tensioning
For = 6 MPa, 110 MPa or about 8% of the instantaneous tension.

b fl
LOSS OF PRE-STRESS DUE TO RELAXATION OF BPEL91 STEEL
The loss of pre-stress due to relaxation of steel is evaluated (see Chap BPEL91. 3.3,23) using the
formula:
6 pi s
s 1000 0 pi s
100 f prg
with:
pi(s) stress in steel after instantaneous losses
1000 guaranteed value of the relaxation loss at 1000 hours
0 coefficient equal to:
0.43 if 1000 2.5 (TBR reinforcement)
0.35 if 2.5 < 1000 < 8
0.30 if 8 1000 (RN) reinforcement
For a TBR reinforcement, 50 MPa about 4% of instantaneous tension.

p
The total deferred loss due to shrinkage, creep and relaxation should be assessed (see Chap
BPEL91. 3.3,24) using the formula:
5
d r fl
6
The deferred loss j due to shrinkage, creep and relaxation should be assessed (see Chap
BPEL91. 3.3,24) using the formula:
dj r j d
with:
j
r j
j 9 rm
rm mean radius of the part expressed in cm
LOSS OF PRE-STRESS DUE TO BHP99 CREEP
The loss of pre-stress due to creep is evaluated (see Chap BPEL91 Appendix 14 Chap. 3.3,22) using
the formula:
Ep Ep
b M
3 15
concrete without silica fume: fl ifM <1.5 b fl b
4 Eij 8 Eij
Ep Ep
b M
2
concrete with silica fume: fl if M < 1.5 b fl b
5 Eij Eij
with:
b final stress in concrete at reinforcement
M maximum stress in concrete at the centre of gravity of pre-stressing
reinforcements as a result of all loads, including pre-stressing
Eij modulus of concrete elasticity during tensioning
B3 - DELAYED EFFECTS - CASE OF PHASING
This paragraph only applies to users of ST1 version 2.
Depending on the material and the tensioning device defined ST1 is likely to vary the following
parameters depending on the time:
Young's modulus
deformation due to shrinkage
deformation due to creep
tension in the active steel
The first three parameters are related to the definition of the material of the bars (see command MAT
p73), the fourth depends on the type of pre-stress device used (see command PREC p86).
B3.1 - CONSIDERATION OF DELAYED EFFECTS IN MATERIALS

ST1 calculates in relation to time t the deformation (t) of the material subjected to a history of
stress (t) variable over time, and deformations of withdrawal or of thermal origin.
The following hypothesis of additivity, tried and tested by experience, has been adopted:
(t )
(t ) T (t ) r (t ) f (t )
E
with:
E instantaneous modulus of elasticity of the material
T(t) deformation of thermal origin
r(t) deformation due to shrinkage
(t) deformation due to creep
Developments in time of r(t) and T(t) are assumed to be known, independent of phenomena of elastic
deformation and creep.
B3.1.1 - DEFORMATION OF THERMAL ORIGIN
The T (t) function is defined by the user using thermal loads (see command TEMP p109).
B3.1.2 - DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE
The r(t) function is defined under the regulations depending on the type of material and ambient
humidity conditions. Deformations are calculated automatically by ST1 for materials in accordance
with one of the regulations in ST1 (see details later in the chapter).
If the deformation is imposed at the level of the material, it is retained in the calculation with phasing,
otherwise it is calculated by ST1 according to the phasing.
B3.1.3 - DEFERRED DEFORMATION DUE TO CREEP
Taking creep into account calls upon the incremental method developed by MM. ACKER and
EYMARD of LCPC (see n 507-1992, Acker and Eymard - Annals of the Technical Institute of
Building and Public Works, and see BPEL99 appendix 1).
This method is based on the fact that it is possible to define a state of the material in terms of creep.
Knowledge of this state at a given date is then sufficient to determine the behaviour of the material at a
later date.
Thus, if one moves to a date t0 , and if one considers a material subjected to a history of solicitations, it
is possible, using a reduced number of parameters, to set the status of this material in terms of creep.
Knowing this state, it is then possible to find a shadow load (constant loading or loading / unloading)
producing the same state of the material.
For any date t greater than t0, the creep of material subjected to the initial solicitation is identical to the
creep of the material submitted to shadow loading.
It can be noted that the method of the equivalent time is identical to the incremental method for any
area where the state of the material in terms of creep can be obtained by a constant shadow load.
IMPLEMENTATION OF CREEP CALCULATION IN ST1
We accept the following simplifying assumptions:

creep deformations due to tangent strains are negligible
creep deformations due to the normal constraints are properly evaluated by reducing the
section to 2 fibres (in 2D) and 4 fibres (in 3D), by maintaining the flatness of geometric
sections
cutting up in time steps is small enough for the strains to be assumed constant during each
time step
At each time step ST1 performs the following calculations:
calculation of stresses in each fibre from the displacements of the sections of bar
calculation of creep deformation of each fibre at the end of the time step
generation of a case of load including creep deformations, shrinkage and the effects of the
relaxation of the cables
update of structural displacements under this case of load
CALCULATION OF CREEP FOR EACH FIBRE
The incremental method to determine creep deformation in a time interval (t0, t) based on knowledge
of the data below:
the characteristics of the material, independent of time, they are the result of various
parameters (instant module at 28 days, percentage of bonded reinforcements, average radius,
etc.)
the features of the ambient environment, assumed constant in the range (t0, t), the ambient
environment is defined by its hygrometry
the stress in the material assumed constant in the range (t0, t)
the cumulative creep deformation over time t0 , value representing the state of concrete at time
t0 in terms of creep
B3.2 - CONSIDERATION OF DELAYED EFFECTS IN PRE-STRESSING REINFORCEMENTS

B3.2.1 - VARIATION IN TENSION DUE TO DEFERRED DEFORMATION OF COMPONENTS
Creep and shrinkage result in a distortion of the structural components over time. The effects of these
deformations are taken into account in the same way as the instantaneous deformations (see p313).
B3.2.2 - LOSS OF PRE-STRESS DUE TO RELAXATION OF STEEL
Losses by relaxation are defined by regulations depending on the type of pre-stressing reinforcement
used. These losses are calculated at each time step along each reinforcement in accordance with one
of the regulations in ST1.
B3.3 SPECIFIC CASE OF BPEL91 REGULATION

B3.3.1 BEHAVIOUR OF BPEL91 CONCRETE
The detailed definition of BPEL91 concrete is given in the chapter on

command p74). MAT
MATERIAUX (see.
The symbols used in the following formulas correspond to :

f
c28 normal 28 day compressive resistance of concrete (in MPa)
h average ambient hygrometry in %
s relationship of bonded reinforcing to the concrete section (As/B)
rm mean radius of the part expressed in cm (Ac/u)
YOUNG'S MODULUS BPEL91
Young's Modulus is defined starting from the characteristic resistance at 28 days expressed in MPa.
ST1 uses the formulas (see BPEL91 Chap. 2.1) :
Eij km kunit 11000 3 fcj
j
with: f cj f c 28 si f c28 40 MPa
4.76 0.83 j
j
f cj f c 28 si f c28 > 40 MPa
1.40 0.95 j
with:
Eij instantaneous concrete module
km advanced coefficient (by default 1)
kunit coefficient calculated by ST1 (depends on selected unit)
kunit = 1. BPEL MPA (module expressed in MPa)
kunit = 1000./9.81 BPEL TM2 (module expressed in t/m)
kunit = 1000. BPEL KNM2 (module expressed in
kN/m)
f c28 normal resistance at 28 days in MPa
j age of concrete in days
YOUNG'S MODULUS FOR BPEL99 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
Young's Modulus is defined starting from the normal resistance at 28 days expressed in MPa.
ST1 uses the formulas (see BPEL 99 Appendix 5) :
Eij km kunit 1650 f cj bs

3
with : f cj 0.680 log2 j 1 f c 28 if j < 7 days

f cj 0.519 0.332. log j f c 28 if j < 28 days
NORMAL RESISTANCE AT DAY J IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
The normal resistance at day j starting from the normal resistance at 28 days expressed in MPa (see
BPEL99 Appendix 6) :
f c 28 f cp
f cj f cp log10 ( j t p 1) if tp< j < 28 days
log10 28 t p 1
f cj f c 28 if j > 28 days
fcp normal resistance at the end of treatment (tensioning)
tp Age of concrete at the end of processing (tensioning)
BPEL91 DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE
Deformation due to shrinkage which develops within a time frame (t0, t) is given in the formula (see
BPEL Appendix 1-3) :
(t0 , t ) r r (t ) r (t0 )
t
With standard concrete : r (t )
t 9 rm
t
lightweight concrete : r (t )
50
t 9 rm E a h k
25
rm 4
with: k si rm > 4cm
rm
k0 si rm 4cm
with:
r final shrinkage deformation
t duration expressed in days
rm mean radius in cm (Ac/u)
Ea quantity of water absorbed by the aggregates
The final shrinkage deformation r can be given directly by its numerical value or directly calculated
by ST1. In this case, ST1 calculates the final shrinkage value using the following formula:
1
r kre ks . 0 with: ks
1 20 s
80
and standard concrete : 0 (100 h ) 6 10 6
10 3 rm
120
lightweight concrete : 0 (100 h ) 9 10 6
10 3 rm

with:
h average ambiant hygrometry in %
s relationship of incorporated reinforcing to the concrete section (As/B)
kre advanced coefficient (by default 1)
BPEL91 DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE IN THE EVENT OF THERMAL PROCESSING
Deformation due to shrinking which develops within a time frame (t0, t) is given in the formula (see
BPEL Appendix 6) :
(t0 , t ) r r (t teb ) r (t0 teb )
with :
teb t pa 1,08max 0
tf
1
max 0 0
t pa ( (t ) 0 ) dt
0 20
The other formulas remain the same.
BPEL91 CREEP
Calculation of the various deformations due to creep are carried out according to the incremental
method (see. p296).
REMINDER OF SOME DEFINITIONS USED FOR CREEP CALCULATION
Instantaneous normal deformation (see BPEL Appendix 1 Para 4.2.1)

.( j0 jb )
ic ( j0 )
Ei 28
with:
ic instantaneous normal deformation of concrete
Ei28 instantaneous 28 day concrete
Creep deformation (see BPEL Section 2.1.52)
fl kfe ic .K fl j0 jb . f j j0
with:
fl Creep deformation at date j
kfe Advanced coefficient (by default 1)
Creep coefficient (see BPEL Appendix 1 Para 4.2.2)
K fl ( j0 jb ) ks . ke kc k ( j0 jb )
with:
Kfl(j0-jb) creep coefficient at the moment of loading j0
ks same significance as shown above (see shrinkage)
ke lowest creep coefficient of unreinforced concrete
(ke = 0.40) (lightweight concrete ke = 0.20)
kc coefficient dependant on an ambient environment
120 h 2 100 h
standard concrete kc
30 3 20 rm
120 h 2 100 h
lightweight concrete kc
50 5 20 rm
wit:
rm mean radius of the part in cm (Ac/u)
k(j0-jb) coefficient dependant on concrete hardening at time of loading
100
k (t j 0 j b )
100 j 0 j b
with :
t=j0 -jb age of concrete at time of loading expressed in days
Creep development law (see BPEL Appendix 1 Section 4.2.3)
j j0
f ( j j0 )
j j 0 5 rm
with:
f(t) creep development law
t=j-j0 load application duration expressed in days
rm mean radius of the part in cm (Ac/u)
Load duration factor (see BPEL Appendix 1 Section 4.4,1)

k r (t ) 4 log(t ) if t 2 days
k r (t ) 1 0.6 t if t < 2 days
with:
t load application duration expressed in days
Creep return development law (see BPEL Appendix 1 Section 4.4.2)
1
g (t ) 1
1 t
with:
t load application duration expressed in days
BPEL91 CREEP IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
Deformation in relation to creep is given in the formula (see BPEL Appendix 6) :

fl kfe ic .K fl j0 teb jb . f j j0
with :
K fl ( j0 teb jb ) ks . ke kc k ( j0 teb jb )
teb t pa 1,08max 0
tf
1
max 0 0
t pa ( (t ) 0 ) dt
0 20
B3.3.2 BEHAVIOUR OF BPEL91 PRE-STRESSED REINFORCEMENT

LOSS BY BPEL91 PURE RELAXATION
Loss by pure relaxation is given in the formula (see BPEL Appendix 2 Section3) :

10 7.5
3 f prg
1
24 t prg
4 f
(t , ) k1 1000 e k2

1000
with :
t time expressed in days
reinforcement stress for t = 0
prg guaranteed rupture limits of pre-stressed steel
1000 guaranteed value of loss by relaxation at 1000 h
k1 = 6.10-3 if 1000 2.5
= 8.10 -3 if 1000 > 2.5
k2 = 1.10 if 1000 <2.5(reinforcing TBR)
= 1.25 if 2.5 1000 < 8.0
= 1.50 if 8.0 1000 (reinforcing RN)
BPEL91 RELAXATION LOSS DUE TO VARIABLE DEFORMATION
For t to be part of a time period (ti,ti+1) during which the pre-stressed reinforcing is not subject to
deformation, we know at the beginning of the time period the cumulated loss by relaxation p(ti)
and the stress i in the reinforcing.
We look for an equivalent time period t* (see BPEL Appendix 2 Section 4) which enables passing by
stress relaxation i + p(ti) to stress factor i :
t ,
*
i
(ti ) (ti )
for t > ti we calculate cumulated relaxation loss by replacing :

t by t* + t - ti
by i + p(ti)
(t ) t * t ti , i (ti )
BPEL91 RELAXATION IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT (APPENDIX 6 BPEL)
Stress due to relaxation is given in the formula (see BPEL Appendix 6 Section4.1) :

3 10 7.5
1
24 t teb
f prg
4 f prg
(t teb , ) k1 1000 e k2

1000
with :
teb t pa 1,14max 0
tf
1
max 0 0
t pa ( (t ) 0 ) dt
0 20
BPEL HEAT LOSS IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
Stress loss in the cable due to the effects of heat treatment is given in the formula (see Appendix 6
Section4.2) :
max Ep.b . max 0 1
with:
0 20
p Pre-stressed cable module
b Dilation coefficient of concrete subjected to heat treatment
Coefficient set at 0.1 in the BPEL
B3.4 SPECIFIC CASE OF BHP99 REGULATION

B3.4.1 BEHAVIOUR OF BHP99 CONCRETE
The detailed definition of BHP99 concrete is given in the chapter on

command p74).MAT
MATERIAUX (see.
The symbols used in the following formulas correspond to:

f
c28 normal 28 day compressive resistance of concrete (en MPa)
YOUNG'S MODULUS BHP99
Young's Modulus is defined starting from the normal resistance at 28 days expressed in MPa.
ST1 uses the formulas (see BPEL Chap. 2.1) :
j
Eij km kunit 11000 3 f cj with : f cj f c 28
1.40 0.95 j
with :
Eij instantaneous concrete module
kunit coefficient calculated by ST1 (depends on the unit selected)
kunit = 1. MPA (module expressed in MPa)
kunit = 1000./9.81 TM2 (module expressed in t/m)
kunit = 1000. KNM2 (module expressed in kN/m)
f c28 normal resistance at 28 days in MPa
NORMAL RESISTANCE IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
The normal resistance at 28 days expressed in MPa (see BPEL99 Appendix 6 modified) :
max 40C
f c 28m f c 28 1 0, 0035 max if
20
The normal resistance at day j starting from the normal resistance at 28 days expressed in MPa (see
BPEL99 Appendix 6) :
f c 28m f cp
f cj f cp log10 ( j t p 1) if tp< j < 28 days
log10 28 t p 1
fcj fc 28m if j > 28 days
fcp Normal resistance at the end of treatment (tensioning)
tp Age of concrete at end of treatment (tensioning)
BHP99 DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE

Total shrinkage deformation
krd rd kre re
ret
1 n s
with : n = 15 si 40 fc28 < 60 MPa
n=9 si 60 fc28 < 80 MPa
krd advanced coefficient (by default 1)
Deformation due to autogenous shrinkage
for j-jb < 28 days
f c j jb
if 0.1 then re j jb , fc 28 0
f c 28
f c j jb fc j jb
0.1 then re j jb , f c 28 f c 28 20 . 2.2
6
if 0.2 .10
f c 28 fc 28
re j jb , fc 28 fc 28 20 . 2.8 1.1e .106
j jb / 96
for j-jb > 28 days
Deformation due to desiccation shrinkage

75 h
0.046 fc 28
72e
Concrete without silica fume: rd j , jb K f c 28 . 2
.10 6
rm
1 8.4
j j0
75 h
0.046 fc 28
72e
Concrete with silica fume: rd j , jb K f c 28 . 2
.10 6
rm
1 2.8
j j0
with: K f c 28 18 if 40 fc28 < 57 MPa
K f c 28 30 0.21 f c 28 if 57 fc28 < 80 MPa
with:
rm median radius in cm (Ac/u)
average ambient hygrometry in %
h
jb date concrete poured
j current date
j-jb current age of concrete
j0 age at which desiccation begins ( j0=jb unless dried j0>jb)
j-j0 duration of concrete desiccation
BPEL99 DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE IN THE EVENT OF THERMAL PROCESSING
Deformation due to shrinking which develops within a time frame (t0, t) is given in the formula (see
BPEL Appendix 6 modified) :
(t0 , t ) r r (t ) r (t0 )
The normal resistance at 28 days is reduced (fc28 is remplaced by fc28m) (see BPEL99 Appendix 6
modified) :
CREEP BHP99
Calculation of the various deformations due to creep are carried out according to the incremental
method (cf. p296).
Total deferred creep deformation

kfd fd kfe fp
flu
1 n. s
with:
s relation between incorporated reinforcing to the concrete section (As/B)
n = 15 si 40 f c 28 60MPa
n=9 si 60 f c 28 80MPa
kfd advanced coefficient (by default 1)

kfe advanced coefficient (by default 1)
Instantaneous normal deformation on the loading date j0
j0 jb
ic ( j0 )
Ei 28
ic instantaneous conventional deformation of concrete
Ei28 instantaneous concrete module at 28 days
Normal deformation deferred by own creep
fp j0 K fl j0 jb . f j j0 . ic ( j0 )
fl coefficient of concrete creep at date j for concreting on date jb for loading
at age j
Creep coefficient Kfl and Creep development law
j j0
concrete without silica fume : K fl 1.4 f ( j j0 ) 3.1 f c j0 f c 28
j j0 kfc 0.40e
3.6 j j0
concrete with silica fume : K fl f ( j j0 ) 2.8 f c j0 f c 28
f c j0 jb 0.37
j j0 kfc 0.37e
with:
Kfl(j0-jb) creep coefficient at loading age t1
f (j-j0) creep development law
j-j0 loading application duration expressed in days
rm Mean radius of the part in cm (Ac/u)
fc(j0) concrete resistance on date j0
kfc advanced coefficient for the kinetik of creep (by default =1)
Normal deformation deferred by creep desiccation
concrete without silica fume: fd 3, 2. 103. rd j rd j0 . ic ( j0 )
concrete with silica fume: fd 103. rd j rd j 0 ic ( j 0)
rd(j) deformation due to desiccation shrinkage
BPEL99 DEFORMATION DUE TO CREEP IN THE EVENT OF THERMAL PROCESSING
Deformation due to creep take in account the reduction of the normal resistance fc28m (see BPEL99
Appendix 6 modified)
B3.4.2 BEHAVIOUR OF A PRE-STRESSED REINFORCEMENT BHP99

See Section B3.3.2 - behaviour of a pre-stressed reinforcement BPEL91
B3.5 SPECIFIC CASE OF CEB90 REGULATION BEHAVIOUR OF CEB90 CONCRETE
Reference: Information Bulletin No.213/214 - CEB-FIP Model Code 1990 (May 1993)
The detailed definition of CEB90 concrete is given in the chapter on

command p77). MAT
MATERIAUX (see.

f ck Normal 28 day compressive resistance of concrete (in MPa)
h average ambient hygrometry in % (see CEB 2.1-69)
h mean radius of the part expressed in mm (2Ac/u)
The cement types are characterised as follows:
SL slow setting cement
N, R normal or quick setting cement
RS high resistance quick setting cement
DFINITION OF SOME INTERMEDIARY VARIABLES
Average resistance at 28 days

f cm f ck f
with :
f = 8 MPa (see CEB 2.1-1)
Elasticity module at 28 days
f cm
Eci Ec 0 3
10
with :
Ec0 = 2.15 104 MPa (see CEB 2.1-15)
YOUNG'S MODULUS CEB90
Young's Modulus used by ST1 is calculated from the elasticity module at 28 days and the age of the
material using the formula:
Eci (t ) km kunit Eci E (t ) (see CEB 2.1-57)
with:
kunit coefficient calculated by ST1 (dependent on the selected unit)
=1 MPA (module expressed in MPa)
= 1000./9.81 TM2 (module expressed in t/m)
= 1000. KNM2 (module expressed in kN/m)
Eci elasticity module at 28 days (see above)
28
s 1
t
E (t ) e (see CEB 2.1-54 et 2.1-58)
with :
t age of concrete in days
s coefficient depending on the cement type
= 0.38 for slow setting cement SL
= 0.25 for normal or quick setting cement N and R
= 0.20 for high resistance quick setting cement RS
CEB90 DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE CEB90
Deformation relating to shrinkage which develops in concrete at age t is shown in the formula:
cs kre cs 0 s (t ts ) (see CEB 2.1-74)
with :
cs0 infinite shrinkage deformation (see above)
s(t-t0) shrinkage development law (see above)
Infinite shrinkage deformation
f
cs 0 160 10 sc . 9 cm RH 106 (see CEB 2.1-76)
10
wit :
sc = 4 for slow setting cement SL
= 5 for normal or quick setting cement N and R
= 8 for high resistance quick setting cement RS
RH RH
3
= 1.55 1 if 40% RH < 99% (see CEB 2.1-77)
100
= 0.25 if RH 99%
Shrinkage development law
t ts
s (t ts ) 2
(see CEB 2.1-79)
h
350 t ts
100
with:
t age of concrete in days
ts age of concrete in days at the start of shrinkage
CEB90 CREEP DEFORMATION
Creep deformation is calculated using the formula :

c (t0 )
cc kfe 0 c (t t0 ) (see CEB 2.1-61 et
Eci
2.1-64)
wit :
kfe advanced coefficient (by default 1)
t0 age of concrete at time of loading
c(t0) stress in the concrete at time of loading
Eci elasticity module at 28 days (see above
0 infinite creep coefficient (see below)
c(t-t0) creep development law(see below)
Infinite creep coefficient
0 RH ( f cm ) (t 0 ) (see CEB 2.1-65)
wit :
RH
1
RH 1 100 (see CEB 2.1-66)
h
0.46 3
100
5.3
( f cm ) (see CEB 2.1-67)
f cm
10
1
(t 0 ) (see CEB 2.1-68)
0.1 5 t 0
Creep development law
0.3
t t0
c (t t 0 )
(see CEB 2.1-70)
h t t0
with:
150 h 1,2 RH
18
h 1 250 1500 (see CEB 2.1-71)
100 100
B3.6 SPECIFIC CASE OF EN1992-1-1 REGULATION

B3.6.1 BEHAVIOUR OF EN1992-1-1 CONCRETE
The detailed definition of EN1992-1-1 concrete is given in the chapter on

command p79).MAT
MATERIAUX (see.

fck normal 28 day compressive resistance of concrete (in MPa)
h median radius of the part expressed in mm (2Ac/u)
Resistance classifications are characterised as follows:
S resistance classification CEM 32,5 N (slow setting cement)
N resistance classification CEM 32,5 R, CEM 42,5 N (normal cement)
R resistance classification CEM 42,5 R, CEM 52,5 N, CEM 52,5 R (high
resistance quick setting cement)
YOUNG'S MODULUS EN1992-1-1
Young's Modulus is defined from the normal 28 day resistance fck expressed in MPa.
ST1 uses the formulas (see EN1992-1-1 Table 3.1).
fcm fck 8 with: fcm en MPa
fcm
0.3
Ecm km kunit 22 000 with : fcm en MPa

10
28 0.5
f cm j f cm exp s 1
j
0.3
0.5

E j E cm . exp s 1
28

j

with :
Ecm instantaneous concrete module
km advanced coefficient (by default =1)
kunit coefficient calculated by ST1 (depends on the selected unit)
kunit = 1. EC2 MPa (module expressed in MPa)
kunit = 1 000/9.81 EC2 tm2 (module expressed in t/m)
kunit = 1 000 EC2 KNM2 (module expressed in kN/m)
fck Normal 28 day resistance in MPa
s coefficient depending on the type of cement
s = 0.20 class R cement
CEM42.5 R, CEM52.5 N, et CEM52.5 R
s = 0.25 class N cement
CEM32.5 R, CEM42.5 N
s = 0.38 class S cement
CEM32.5 N
AVERAGE RESISTANCE OF EN1992-1-1 AT DAY J IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
The average resistance at day j is defined from the average 28 day resistance expressed in MPa.
ST1 uses the formulas (see EC2-1-110.3.1.1) :
f cm f cmp
f cm j f cmp log10 ( j t p 1) if tp< j < 28 days
log10 28 t p 1
fcm ( j ) f c 28 if j > 28 days
with:
fcmp average resistance at the end of treatment (tensioned)
tp age of concrete at the end of treatment (tensioned)
EN1992-1-1 DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE
Deformation relative to the shrinkage which develops in the time period (j0,j) is given by the formula
(see EN1992-1-1 (eq. 3.8 3.13) & Appendix B2) :
Total shrinkage cs
cs krd cd kre ca (see eq. 3.8)
kre advanced coefficient (by default =1)
krd advanced coefficient (by default =1)
Desiccation shrinkage cd
cd ( j ) ds j .kh h . cd 0 (see eq. 3.9)
j
ds j (see eq. 3.10)
j 0.04 h3
with:
j age of concrete at time period t calculated in days
h Median radius of the transversal section in mm (2Ac/u)
kh(h) coefficient dependant on the median radius (table 3.3)
kh(100)=1 ; kh(200)=0.85 ; kh(300)=0.75 ; kh(h>500)=0.70
f cm 6
cd 0 0.85 220 110 ds1 .exp ds 2 .10 . RH (see Appendix B2 eq. B11)
f cm 0
RH
3
RH 1.551

(see Appendix B2 eq. B12)
RH 0

with :
fcm average compressive resistance in MPa
fcm0 10 MPa
RH humidity relative to the ambient environement in %
RH0 100 %
ds1 coefficient depending on the type of cement
ds1=3 (classe S) ou 4 (classe N) ou 6 (classe R)
ds2 coefficient depending on the type of cement
ds1=0.13 (classe S) or 0.12 (classe N) or 0.11 (classe R)
Autogenous shrinkage ca
ca ( j ) as j . ca (see eq. 3.11)

ca () 2.5 fck 10 .106 (see eq. 3.12)

as j 1 exp 0.2 j 0.5 (see eq. 3.13)
DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
Deformation relative to shrinkage is given by the formula:

Total shrinkage cs
cs krd cd kre ca (see eq. 3.8)
cd ( j ) ds j .kh h . cd 0 (see eq. 3.9)
j jP
ds j00 (see eq. 3.10)
j jP 0.04 h3
with:
jp Age of cement at end of treatment (tensioned)
ca ( j ) 0
EN1992-1-1 CREEP
Calculating deferred deformations due to creep is carried out by a method of increments (see. p296).
Instantaneous normal deformation on the date j0
c j0 jb
ic j0
Ec
with :
c Constant compressive stress applied on the concrete loading date j0
(described in the section on phasing)
Ec Instantaneous concrete tangent module Ec 1.05Ecm
Section 3.1.4 (2)
Deferred normal deformation
c j0
cc j0 kfe k , j0 . (see eq. 3.6)
Ec
kfe advanced coefficient (by default=1)
k (j,j0) concrete creep coefficient at date j for loading at age j0
Creep coefficient, Sectionc3.1.4 (2)(3)(4)
k , j0 , j0
Appendix B Section B.1 provides the definition of creep coefficient:
j, j0 0 .c j, j0 (see eq. B1)
0 RH . fcm . j0 (see eq. B2)

1 RH / 100
RH 1 for fcm 35MPa (see eq. B3a)
0.1 3 h
1 RH / 100
RH 1 1 2 for fcm > 35MPa (see eq. B3b)
0.1 3 h
with :
RH humidity relative to the ambient environment in %
h median radius of the part expressed in mm
h = 2Ac / u (see eq. B6)
Ac right section air
u perimeter of item in contact with atmosphere
f cm
16.8
(see eq. B4)
f cm
1
j0 (see eq. B5)
0.1 j000.2

9
j00 j0T . 1.2
0,5 et j0T j0 (see eq. B9)
2 j0T
j j0
c j, j0
0.3
(see eq. B7)
H j j0
H 1.5 1 0.012 RH h 250 1500 for fcm 35MPa
18
(see eq. B8a)
H 1.5 1 0.012 RH h 250 3 1500 3 for fcm > 35MPa

18
(see eq. B8b)
0.7 0.2 0.5
35 35 35
1 2 3 (see eq. B8.c)
f cm f cm f cm
EC2 CREEP IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
Deformation relative to creep is given by the formula (EN 1992-1-1 Appendix B) :

j0T e
4000/ 273T ( ti )13.65
.ti (see eq. B10)
with :
T(Ti) treatment temperature in degrees of heat of between 0 and 80 degrees
Ti time during which the temperature T is applied
Please note, j0T t j ,i 0 when the temperature is 20 degrees, that is to say, there is no
treatment.
B3.6.2 BEHAVIOUR OF EN1992-1-1 PRE-STRESSED REINFORCING

EN1992-1-1 LOSS BY PURE RELAXATION
Loss by pure relaxation is given by the formula (see EN 1992-1-1 3.3.2 eq. 3.28-3.29-3.30 Appendix
C) :
3
1
24 t 4
r (t , ) k1 1000 e k3 . pi
1000
with:
t times expressed in days
pi initial stress in the reinforcement for t = 0
=pi/ f pk guaranteed rupture limits of pre-stressed steel
1000 guaranteed value of loss by relaxation at 1000 h
k1 0.66.10-5 if 1000 2.5 (reinforcing TBR)
1.98.10 -5 if 2.5 1000 < 8
5.39.10-5 if 8.0 1000 (reinforcing RN)
k3 9.1 if 1000 2.5 (reinforcing TBR)
8 if 2.5 1000 < 8
6.7 if 8.0 1000 (reinforcing RN)
EN 19921-1 RELAXATION LOSS DUE TO VARIABLE DEFORMATION
for t to be part of a time period (ti,ti+1) during which the pre-stressed reinforcing is not subject to
deformation, we know that at the beginning of the time period the cumulated loss by relaxation
p(ti) and the stress i in the reinforcing.
We look for an equivalent time period t* which enables passing by stress relaxation i + p(ti) to
stress factor i :

t * , i (ti ) (ti )
for t > ti we calculate the cumulated relaxation loss by replacing:
t by t* + t - ti
by i + p(ti)
(t ) t * t ti , i (ti )
EC2 RELAXATION IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
Stress due to relaxation is given in the formula (see EC2-1-1 Section 10.3.2) :
3
1
24 t t eb 4
r (t t eb , ) k1 1000 e k3 . pi
1000
with:
1
teb t pa 1,14max 0 et t pa ( (ti ) 0 ).ti (eq 10.2)
max 0 i
0 20
T(Ti) treatment temperature in degrees of heat between 0 and 80 degrees
Ti time during which temperature T is applied
EC2 HEAT LOSS IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
The stress loss in the cable due to the effects of the treatment is given in the formula (see EC2-1-1
Section10.5.2) :
max Ep.b . max 0 1
with:
0 20
p Pre-stressed cable module
b Dilation coefficient of concrete subjected to treatment
Coefficient set at 0.5 in the EC2
B3.7 SPECIFIC CASE OF BHP EN1992-2 REGULATION- BEHAVIOUR OF BHP EN1992-

2 CONCRETE
The detailed definition of BHP EN1992-2 concrete is given in the chapter on

command MAT
p80).
MATERIAUX (see.

f ck normal 28 day compressive resistance of concrete (in MPa)
h median radius of the part expressed in mm (2Ac/u)
n equivalent coefficient Steel/Concrete (Es/Ec)
Resistance classifications are characterised as follows:
S resistance classification CEM 32,5 N (slow setting cement)
N resistance classification CEM 32,5 R, CEM 42,5 N (normal cement)
R resistance classification CEM 42,5 R, CEM 52,5 N, CEM 52,5 R (high
resistance quick setting cement)
YOUNG'S BHP EN1992-2 (EN1992-1-1) MODULUS
Young's Modulus is defined from the normal 28 day resistance fck expressed in MPa.
ST1 uses the formulas (see EN1992-1-1 Table 3.1).
fcm fck 8 with: fcm en MPa
fcm
0.3
Ecm km kunit 22000 with: fcm en MPa

10
0.3
0.5

E j E cm . exp s 1
28

j

with:
Ecm instantaneous concrete module
km advanced coefficient (by default =1)
kunit coefficient calculation by ST1 (depends on the unit selected)
kunit = 1. EC2 MPa (module expressed in MPa)
kunit = 1 000/9.81 EC2 tm2 (module expressed int/m)
kunit = 1 000 EC2 KNM2 (module expressed inkN/m)
f ck resistance characteristic at 28 days in MPa
j Age of concrete in days
s coefficient dependant on the type of cement
s = 0.20 class R cement
CEM42.5 R, CEM52.5 N, et CEM52.5 R
s = 0.25 class N cement
CEM32.5 R, CEM42.5 N
s = 0.38 class S cement
CEM32.5 N
AVERAGE RESISTANCE OF EN1992-1-1 AT DAY J IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
The average resistance at day j is defined from the average 28 day resistance expressed in MPa.
ST1 uses the formulas (see EC2-1-110.3.1.1) :
f cm f cmp
f cm j f cmp log10 ( j t p 1) if tp< j < 28 days
log10 28 t p 1
fcm ( j ) f c 28 if j > 28 days
with:
fcmp average resistance at the end of treatment (tensioned)
tp age of concrete at the end of treatment (tensioned)
BHP EN1992-2 DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE
Deformation relative to shrinkage which develops over a time period (j0,j) is given in the following
formula (see. EN 1992-1-1 and Appendix B2 and EN 1992-2 Appendix B103).
Total shrinkage deformation (EN 1992-1-1)
krd cd kre ca
ret (eq. 3.8)
1 n s
And taking steel into account
krd advanced coefficient (by default =1)
kre advanced coefficient (by default =1)
Deformation due to autogenous shrinkage (EN 1992-2 Appendix B103)
for j-jb < 28 days
if f cm j jb f ck 0.1 alors ca j jb , f ck 0
fcm j jb
if f cm j jb f ck 0.1 alors ca j jb , fck fck 20 . 2.2 0.2 .10
6
fck
for j-jb > 28 days
ca j jb , fck fck 20 . 2.8 1.1e
j jb / 96
.10 6
Deformation due to desiccation shrinkage (EN 1992-2 Appendix B103)

75 h
0.046 fck
72e
cd j , jb K fck . 2
.10 6
h
1 cd .
j j0
concrete without silica fume : cd 0.021
concrete with silica fume : cd 0.007
with : K f ck 18 if fck < 55 MPa
K fck 30 0.21 f ck if 55 fck
with:
h median radius in mm (2Ac/u)
jb date concrete poured
j current date
j-jb current age of concrete
j0 age at which desiccation begins (j0=jb unless dried j0>jb)
j-j0 duration of concrete desiccation
DEFORMATION DUE TO SHRINKAGE IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
Deformation relative to shrinkage is modified by the formula:

jp Age of cement at end of treatment (tensioned)
ca ( j ) 0
BHP EN1992-2 CREEP
Calculating deferred deformations due to creep is carried out by a method of increments (cf. p296).
Total deferred creep
kfe ccb kfd ccd
flu
1 n s
kfe, kfd advanced coefficients (by default =1)
Instantaneous deformation at date j0
c j0 jb
ic ( j0 )
Ec
ic instantaneous normal concrete deformation
Ec instantaneous concrete tangent module (Ec = 1.05 Ecm) 3.1.4(2)
c constant compressive stress applied on the concrete loading date j0
Normal deformation deferred by own creep
c ( j0 jb )
ccb j0 b j j0 .
Ec
b j j0 b 0 j j0 . f ( j j0 )
b0 coefficient of concrete creep at date j for concreting on date jb for loading
at age j0
f creep development law
j j0
f ( j j0 )
j j0 bc
concrete without silica fume: b 0 1.4 bc kfc 0.40e3.1 f cm ( j0 )/ f ck
3.6
concrete with silica fume : b 0 bc kfc 0.37e2.8 f cm ( j0 )/ f ck
f cm j0 jb
0.37
j-j0 duration of loading application expressed in days

fcm(j0-jb) average resistance of concrete at date of loading j0
kfc advanced coefficient for the kinetik of creep (by default =1)
Normal deformation deferred by desiccation creep
c ( j0 jb )
ccd j0 d j j0 .
Ec
d j j0 d 0 . cd j cd j0
concrete without silica fume: d 0 3200
concrete with silica fume: d 0 1000
cd(j) deformation due to desiccation shrinkage
d0 coefficient of concrete desiccation creep at date j for concreting on date jb
for loading at age j0
EC2 CREEP IN THE EVENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
Deformation relative to creep is modified by the formula (EN 1992-1-1 Appendix B) :

b 0 is modified by the formula :
j0T e
4000/ 273T ( ti )13.65
.ti (see eq. B10)
with :
T(Ti) treatment temperature in degrees of heat of between 0 and 80 degrees
Ti time during which the temperature T is applied
Please note, j0T t j ,
i 0 when the temperature is 20 degrees, that is to say, there is no
treatment.
B4 DYNAMIQUE
Bibliography:
Elements de Gnie parasimique et de cacul dynamique des structures, Ecole Poytechnique de
Montral, A Filiatrault 1996
Une prsentation de la methode des lments finis- Gour Dhatt-Gilbert Touzot Les presses de
l'universit Laval, Qc, 1981
Dynamics of structures, 2nd edition, Ray Clough, J Penzien, 1993
CIV 6508 - Anayse Dynamique des structures- Ecole Polytechnique de Montral-P Lger, 1994
Dynamique des structures, application aux ouvrages de gnie civil, P. Paultre, Lavoisier, 2005
B4.1 - RSOLUTION OF THE PROBLEM TO GET EIGEN MODES :

Definition of the problem with eigen values
K M 2
K Stiffness Matrix (n,n)
M Mass Matrix (n,n)
Matrix of n eigen vectors of dimension n
2 Diagonal Matrix of eigen pulsations

Methodologies of resolution:
Methododology of Inverse Itration
Methodology of Rayleigh Ritz : Iteration by sub space
Verification of Sturm sequence
For each mode i, the matrix is written under the following formulation :
K M
1
L D L et 1.001
2 T
i
The number of diagonal terms of D ngatif gives the number of eigne mode under the pulsation of the
eigen mode i.
Error on eigen modes:
K i i 2 M i . K i
B4.2 - FORMULATION OF THE SELF MASS FOR A BAR

The consistant matrix of mass of a bar can be expressed as:
l
mi , j m x i x j x dx
0
The shape's functions associated to the dformation for the 6 degrees of freedom for the both ends of a
bar are defined as :
3 9 12
2 8 6 5 11
1 7 4
10
x x
1 x 1 7 x

l l
2 3 2
x x x x
2 x 1 3 2 8 x 3 2
l l l l
2 3 2
x x x x
3 x 1 3 2 9 x 3 2
l l l l
x x
4 x 1 10 x

l
l
2 2
x x x x
5 x 1 11 x 1
l l l l
2 2
x x x x
6 x 1 12 x 1

l l l l
The linear density of a bar can be expressed as :
m x S x
x
S0 S1 S2
2
x x
S x 2 S0 S2 2S1 4S1 S2 3S0 S0
L L
For torsion, the expression is :
m x I x
2
x x
I x 2 I 0 I 2 2 I1 4 I1 I 2 3I 0 I 0
L L
B4.3 DAMPING MATRIX

Rayleigh damping matrix
The Rayleigh damping matrix is :
C M K
and the damping coefficient for the eigen mode j is:
j T C j j
j
2 j j T
M j 2 j 2
Spetral Combination CQC :
The spectral combination CQC is (Filiatrault Elments de gnie Parasismique) :
X CQC X
j k
j j ,k X k
8 j k j r k r 3/2
j ,k
1 r 2 2
4 j k r 1 r 2 4 j 2 k 2 r 2
k
r
j
Damping matrix with eigen mode
Nc : number of eigen modes calculated.
c : cut frequency (i.e. the frequency of the highest mode calculated)
The damping matrix is :
Case of only one damping element ( Clough and Penzien p242):

nc 1 2 nn t
C M n . n M 2 c K
n 1 M n c
n
n n c
c
Damping cofficient in each mode calculated with elastic energy of deformation

Edj Energy of deformation in the eigen mode j for the all structure. The structure is made of frames
connecting nodes 1 and 2.
Xj Vector of spectral displacement in the eigen mode j
Fj Vector of spectral elastic force in the eigen mode j
Edj
1
2

F 2 j .X 2 j F 1 j .X 1 j
1

2 i i 0,...,in
f 2i , j .d 2i , j f 1i , j .d 1i , j
Edij Energy of deformation in the eigen mode j for the under structure "k"
Edjk
1

2 k
1

F 2 j . X 2 j F 1 j . X 1 j f 2i , j .d 2i , j f 1i , j .d 1i , j
2 i k
The equivalent modal damping for the eigen mode j can be written as:
.E k
k
dj
eff , j k
Edj
Annexe
C CONCEPTION
The software ST1 has been design at the CTOA in SETRA, then in DTecITM in CEREMA :
The design has obey to the following developpement history :
- P.Peyrac (Original Design)
- J. Herv (Moving Loads for Eurocode)
- A.L. Millan (Computation core)
- G. Bondonet (Eurocode et Dynamique)

ST1 Manuel en

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ST1 Manuel en

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ST1

COMMAND LIST ....................................................................................... 32

APPENDICES ......................................................................................... 286

CARA VAR LIN Y liste p57

MAT i ('Title material') p79

SELECTIVE ENABLING (OUTSIDE PHASING)

FULFILLING FIXED LOADS

< AL,AL BRAKE,AL PLANCHER,AL PLANCHER BRAKE,AL PEDESTRIAN,

ALG i ('Title live load ')

CONV i ('Title convoy') p148

FULFILLING LIVE LOADS

PHASE DEFINITION (ONLY ST1 V2)

PHASE FULFILLMENT (ONLY ST1 V2)

FULFILLING OF EIGEN MODES

SPECTRUM ic RESPONSE p191

HISTORY OF GROUND MOTIONS (ONLY ST1 V2)

EXECUTION OF A TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS WITH GROUND MOTIONS (ONLY ST1

DYNAMIC OF ROLLING LOADS (ONLY ST1 V2)

HISTORY UNDER IMPOSED LOAD (ONLY ST1 V2)

EXECUTION OF TIME HISTORY FOR AN IMPOSED LOAD (ONLY ST1 V2)

CRITICAL MODE FOR LINEAR ELASTIC BUCKLING

FULFILLING OF CRITICAL LOADS FOR LINEAR ELASTIC BUCKLING MODES

ENVELOPES AND COMBINATIONS

LIST CARA CABLE (liste) p209

PSEUDO-PROGRAMMING: RESULTS RECOVERY

The new features offered by version 23 of ST1 are :

Due to the reworking of the ST1 calculation node:

3. LIMITS OF THE PROGRAM

Some ST1 limits can be modified by the user:

It is advisable to use a .ST1

The separator, separates commands entered on one line.

4.4 - NUMERICAL VALUES

4.5 - CHARACTER STRINGS

Do not use accented characters in ST1.

4.6 - NUMERICAL LISTS

the numerical list 1,23,12,5,6,7,8,9

5.1 - DISTINGUISHING KEYWORDS AND NUMERIC VALUES OR LISTS

5.2 - OPTIONAL PARAMETERS

5.3 - MANDATORY CHOICE BETWEEN SEVERAL PARAMETERS

Comments are indicated by

Messages displayed on the screen are saved in a file named

7.2 - WARNING MESSAGES

Redefinition of the characteristics of a bar:

Reading a data file can be achieved within another data file.

1.2 - INTERUPTING READING A FILE BEFORE REACHING THE END

In the file toto.st1:

1.3 - TEMPORARY EXIT TO THE CONSOLE WHEN READING A DATA FILE

in the file toto.st1:

1.4 - CONTINUING READ AFTER TEMPORARY EXIT TO THE CONSOLE

in the file toto.st1:

1.5 - PROJECT EDITING

1.5.1 - EDITING TO A FILE

1.5.2 - CONSOLE EDITING

1.6 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT

1.6.1 - SAVING A PROJECT

1.6.2 - REVIEWING A PROJECT

1.6.3 - RECALLING THE NAME OF THE CURRENT PROJECT

1.6.4 - LIST OF PROJECTS STORED ON THE DISK

1.6.5 -MODIFYING THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF THE PROJECTS ON THE DISK

1.7 - DEFINING THE OUTPUT FILE PAGE NUMBERING PARAMETERS

1.8 - DELETING WARNING MESSAGES

1.9 - ST1 OUTPUT